Contents

Mercedes-Benz EQS 2022 Operator's Manual PDF

1 of 538
1 of 538

Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz EQS 2022 Operator's Manual PDF

Digital in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet Familiarize yourself with the con- tents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multime- dia system (menu item "Vehicle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips.

Here you can nd comprehensive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form.

2975842502R 2975842502

Order no. P297 0525 13 Part no. 297 584 25 02 Edition D-2022

EQS Operator's Manual

Mercedes-BenzMe rce

de s-B

en z

EQ S

Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles and about MercedesBenz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Documentation team MercedesBenz AG: Not to be reprinted, transla- ted or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from MercedesBenz AG.

Vehicle manufacturer MercedesBenz AG Mercedesstrae 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany

Front passenger airbag warning

Airbag warning sticker for USA and Canada

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co- driver airbag is enabled

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- driver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".

As at 16.03.21

Thank you for buying Mercedes-Benz Before you rst drive o , read this operator's manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operat- ing lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this operator's manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre- gard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol- lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability

Your vehicle may therefore di er, in individual cases, from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.

Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment R Technical features

The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator's Manual R Printed operator's manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent supplements R Supplementary documents

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company

2975842502

2975842502

Symbols .......................................................... 5

At a glance ...................................................... 6 Cockpit (central display) .................................. 6 Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen) .......................... 8 Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ......... 10 Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) ........................................................ 14 Overhead control panel ................................. 18 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ....... 20 Control settings in the rear passenger compartment ................................................ 22 Emergencies and breakdowns ....................... 24

Digital Operator's Manual .............................. 26 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ........ 26

General notes ............................................... 27 Protecting the environment ........................... 27 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ....................... 27 Operator's Manual ........................................ 28 Touch-sensitive controls ................................ 29 Mercedes me app ......................................... 29

Service and vehicle operation ........................ 30 Operating safety ............................................ 31 Declaration of conformity for vehicle installed radio components ........................... 33 Diagnostics connection ................................. 33 Quali ed specialist workshop ........................ 35 Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 35 Notes for persons with electronic medical aids .............................................................. 35 Problems with your vehicle ............................ 36 Reporting safety defects ................................ 36 Limited Warranty ........................................... 37 QR code for rescue card ............................... 37 Data storage ................................................. 37 Copyright ...................................................... 42

Occupant safety ............................................ 43 Restraint system ........................................... 43 Seat belts ..................................................... 45 Airbags ......................................................... 50 PRE-SAFE system ........................................ 57 Automatic measures a er an accident ........... 58 Safely transporting children in the vehicle ...... 58 Notes on pets in the vehicle .......................... 72

Opening and closing ...................................... 73 SmartKey ...................................................... 73 Doors ............................................................ 77 Cargo compartment ...................................... 87 Side windows ................................................ 92 Sliding sunroof .............................................. 95 Anti-the protection ...................................... 99

Seats and stowing ....................................... 102 Notes on the correct driver's seat position .. 102 Seats .......................................................... 102 Steering wheel ............................................ 115 Easy entry and exit feature .......................... 116 Memory function ......................................... 118 Stowage areas ............................................ 119 Cup holder .................................................. 135 Sockets ....................................................... 138 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna .... 138 Installing and removing the oor mats ......... 141

Light and visibility ........................................ 143 Exterior lighting ........................................... 143 Interior lighting ............................................ 154

2 Contents

Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ 157 Mirrors ........................................................ 159 Area permeable to radio waves on the windshield ................................................... 162 Infrared-re ective windshield function ......... 162

Climate control ........................................... 163 Overview of climate control systems ............ 163 Operating the climate control system .......... 166

Driving and parking ..................................... 178 Driving ........................................................ 178 DYNAMIC SELECT button ............................ 191 Transmission ............................................... 193 Function of the 4MATIC ............................... 195 Charging the high-voltage battery ................ 195 Parking ....................................................... 210 Driving and driving safety systems ............... 217 Vehicle towing instructions .......................... 285

Driver display .............................................. 286 Notes on the driver display .......................... 286

Notes on the range ..................................... 286 Operating the driver display ......................... 287 Driver display menus ................................... 288 Head-up Display .......................................... 288 Overview of status displays on the driver's display ........................................................ 292

MBUX multimedia system ............................ 294 Overview and operation ............................... 294 System settings .......................................... 316 Drive system settings .................................. 321 Navigation and tra c .................................. 321 Telephone ................................................... 333 Mercedes me app ....................................... 336 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ....... 343 Radio & media ............................................. 346 Sound settings ............................................ 352

Maintenance and care ................................. 353 ASSYST PLUS service interval display .......... 353 Engine compartment ................................... 354 Adding washer uid to the windshield washer system ............................................ 355 Cleaning and care ....................................... 356

Breakdown assistance ................................. 363 Emergency .................................................. 363 Flat tire ....................................................... 364 Battery (vehicle) .......................................... 370 Tow starting or towing away ........................ 372 Electrical fuses ............................................ 378

Wheels and tires ......................................... 381 Notes on noise or unusual handling char- acteristics ................................................... 381 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ 381 Notes on snow chains ................................. 382 Activating or deactivating snow chain mode .......................................................... 382 Tire pressure ............................................... 383 Loading the vehicle ..................................... 388 Tire labeling ................................................ 392 De nition of terms for tires and loading ....... 397 Changing a wheel ........................................ 399 Emergency spare wheel ............................... 408

Technical data ............................................. 410 Notes on technical data .............................. 410

Contents 3

Vehicle electronics ...................................... 410 Regulatory radio identi cation and notes ..... 412 Vehicle identi cation plate, VIN and engine number overview .............................. 412 Operating uids ........................................... 414 Vehicle data ................................................ 418

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps .......................................................... 420 Display messages ........................................ 420 Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 484

Index .......................................................... 500

4 Contents

In this Operator's Manual, you will nd the follow- ing symbols:

& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices

Warning notices draw your attention to haz- ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe environ- mental notes

Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi- ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage

Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being dam- aged.

# Observe notes on material damage.

% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.

# Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Display Display on the central display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be

selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be

selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause

Symbols 5

Le -hand-drive vehicles (with central display)

6 At a glance Cockpit (central display)

1 Increases recuperation 187

q Reduces recuperation 187 2 Combination switch 144 3 Driver display 287 4 DIRECT SELECT lever 193 5 Central display 294 6 Glove box 122 7 Stowage space 122 8 Switch panel for:

DYNAMIC SELECT button 192

c Active Parking Assist 272

Calls up the EQ menu 209

\ Quick vehicle access

Fingerprint sensor 294

Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/o

294

a Switches sound on/o 294

Adjusts the volume 294

9 Hazard warning light system 145 A Start/stop button 181 B Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system 303 C Adjusts the steering wheel 115 D ! Electric parking brake 214 E Diagnostics connection 33 F Light switch 143 G Control panel:

Driver display 287

H Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 231

At a glance Cockpit (central display) 7

Le -hand-drive vehicles (with MBUX Hyperscreen)

8 At a glance Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen)

1 Increases recuperation 187

q Reduces recuperation 187 2 Combination switch 144 3 DIRECT SELECT lever 193 4 MBUX Hyperscreen with:

Driver display 286

Central display 294

Front passenger display 294 5 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system 303 6 Glove box 122 7 Stowage space 122 8 Hazard warning light system 145 9 Switch panel for:

DYNAMIC SELECT button 192

c Active Parking Assist 272

Calls up the EQ menu 209

\ Quick vehicle access

Fingerprint sensor 294

Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/o

294

a Switches sound on/o 294

Adjusts the volume 294

A Start/stop button 181 B Adjusts the steering wheel 115 C ! Electric parking brake 214 D Diagnostics connection 33 E Light switch 143 F Control panel:

Driver display 287

H Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 231

At a glance Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen) 9

Standard driver display

10 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard)

1 #! Turn signal lights 144 2 System error 487 3 Suspension (red) 493

Suspension (yellow) 493

4 # Electrical malfunction 487 5 Power steering (red) 488

Power steering (yellow) 488

Rear axle steering (red) 488

Rear axle steering (yellow) 488

6 6 Restraint system 485 7 Seat belt 485 8L Distance warning 493

9 ! ABS 495 A h Tire pressure monitoring system 498 B ESP OFF 495

ESP 495

C_ Reduced power 487

D Operational readiness of drive system 181

E ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 490 F Electric parking brake (red) 490

F USA only

! Canada only G Brakes (red) 490

$ USA only

J Canada only

Recuperative Brake System, USA only 490

J Brakes (yellow), Canada only 490 HR Range

I Condition of charge display J K High beam 144

L Low beam 143

T Parking lights 143

At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 11

K R Rear fog light 144 LH Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 497

12 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard)

Driver display with driver camera

14 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera)

1 System error 487 2 #! Turn signal lights 144 3 Seat belt 485 4L Distance warning 493

5 6 Restraint system 485 6_ Reduced power 487

7 h Tire pressure monitoring system 498 8 ESP OFF 495

ESP 495

9 ! ABS 495 A Operational readiness of drive system 181

B ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 490 C Electric parking brake (red) 490

F USA only

! Canada only D Brakes (red) 490

$ USA only

J Canada only

Recuperative Brake System, USA only 490

J Brakes (yellow), Canada only 490 ER Range

F Charge level display G R Rear fog light 144 H K High beam 144

L Low beam 143

T Parking lights 143 IH Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 497

J # Electrical malfunction 487 K Power steering (red) 488

Power steering (yellow) 488

Rear axle steering (red) 488

Rear axle steering (yellow) 488

At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) 15

L Suspension (red) 493 Suspension (yellow) 493

16 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera)

18 At a glance Overhead control panel

1 Sun visors 2 c Switches the front interior lighting on/o 154 3 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/o 154 4; me button 336

5 | Switches automatic interior lighting con- trol on/o

154

6 G SOS button 336 7 Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/o 154

8 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

95

3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

95

9 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 54 A Inside rearview mirror 160 B Switches the le -hand reading lamp on/o 154

At a glance Overhead control panel 19

20 At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment

1 Locks/unlocks the vehicle 78

2 Opens the door 77 3 Adjusts the seats electrically 102 4w Switches the seat heating on/o 113

5 s Switches the seat ventilation on/o 114 6 w Adjusts the front passenger seat from

the driver's seat 105

7V Operates the memory function 119

8 q Opens/closes the tailgate 87

9 Operates the outside mirrors 159 A W Opens/closes the right side window 92 B W Opens/closes the rear right side window 92 CS Child safety lock for the rear side win-

dows 72

D W Opens/closes the rear le side window 92 E W Opens/closes the le side window 92 F Adjusts the head restraints 108 G Seat adjustment using the multimedia system 111

At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment 21

22 At a glance Control settings in the rear passenger compartment

1 Climate control rear operating unit 165 2 Electronics compartment in the center console 3V Selects the front passenger seat 105

4 s Switches the rear seat ventilation on/o 114

5w Switches the rear seat heating on/o 113

6 Adjusts the rear seats electrically 106 7 Stowage compartment in the rear armrest 8 Charges a mobile phone wirelessly 140

At a glance Control settings in the rear passenger compartment 23

24 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns

1 B-pillar with:

QR code for accessing the rescue card 37 2 Safety vests 363 3; me button 336

G SOS button 336 4 Towing away 372 5 Flat tire 364 6 To operate the high-voltage disconnect device 179

7 Hazard warning light system 145 8 Socket ap with:

Information label on tire pressure 384

QR code for accessing the rescue card 37 9 Towing away 372 A TIREFIT kit 366 B Warning triangle 363 C First-aid kit (so sided) 364

At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 25

Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Info 5 Operator's Manual 5 Open Digital Operator's Manual The Digital Operator's Manual describes the func- tions and operation of the vehicle and the multi- media system. # Select one of the following menu items in the

Digital Operator's Manual: R Quick start: nd the rst steps towards

adjusting your seat (driver's side). R Tips: nd information that prepares you for

certain everyday situations with your vehicle. R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle

functions. R Messages: receive additional information

about the messages in the driver's display. R Language: select the language for the Digital

Operator's Manual.

You can search for keywords using the search eld Search, in order to nd quick answers to

questions about the operation of the vehicle.

1 Menu 2 Search 3 Back 4 Contents section

Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and col- lapsed. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Oper- ator's Manual: Driver display: call up brief information as display messages in the driver's display MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice con- trol system Global search: call up search results for contents of the Digital Operator's Manual in the home screen For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated while driving.

26 Digital Operator's Manual

Protecting the environment

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style

Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi- ronment. Please observe the following recom- mendations on operating conditions and per- sonal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor-

rect. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight

(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no lon- ger need them).

# Monitor the energy consumption. # Adhere to the service intervals.

A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib- ute to environmental protection.

# Always have maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Personal driving style: # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable

distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and

braking. # Drive in a style which saves energy.

Observe the ECO display for an economi- cal driving style.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by irresponsible disposal of the high-voltage battery

A high-voltage battery contains materials which are harmful to the environment. # Dispose of defective high-voltage batter-

ies at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Environmental issues and recommendations It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regula- tions serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled recon- ditioned components

MercedesBenz AG o ers recycled recondi- tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned components

and parts from MercedesBenz AG.

* NOTE Impairment of the operating e - ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding

Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol- lowing areas of your vehicle: R Doors

General notes 27

R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console R Lateral roof frame # Do not install accessory parts such as

audio systems in these areas. # Do not carry out repairs or welding. # Have accessory parts retro tted at a

quali ed specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system, may malfunction. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and acces- sory parts that have been speci cally approved for your vehicle model.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been spe- cially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used. More than 300,000 di erent genuine Mercedes- Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz mod- els. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for neces- sary service and repair work. In addition, strategi- cally located parts delivery centers provide for quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identi cation number (VIN) (/ page 412) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts.

Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual and the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle describe the following mod- els and the standard and special equipment for your vehicle: R The models and the standard and special

equipment available at the time of this Opera- tor's Manual going to press. R The models and the standard and special

equipment only available in certain countries. R The models and the standard and special

equipment, which will only be available at a later date.

Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equip- ment on your vehicle may di er from that in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at the time of delivery.

28 General notes

Should you have any questions concerning equip- ment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual, Supplement, further sup- plementary documents and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Touch-sensitive controls In addition to conventional switches and buttons, your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensitive con- trols. These are located in the following areas of your vehicle: R Roof and door control panel R Climate control R Steering wheel R MBUX multimedia system

The controls have touch-sensitive user interface surfaces. The surfaces are controlled by pressing or swiping to adjust settings or to trigger func- tions, for example.

In the area of the touchscreen, you also receive haptic feedback in the form of a pulse or a vibra- tion, or the surface structure changes on the touch-sensitive user interface surface, for exam- ple. You receive haptic feedback in the following situa- tions, for example: R When pressing a button on the user interface

surface R When scrolling in a list or table R When reaching a new area on the user inter-

face surface, e.g. a pop-up window

When handling touch-sensitive user interface sur- faces, observe the following points to avoid prob- lems operating: R Do not a x stickers or similar objects on the

surfaces R Keep the surfaces protected from moisture

and wet conditions R Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt

Some touch-sensitive control elements have a symbol and integrated indicator lamps. When

operating, make sure to press on the symbol of the control element.

Mercedes me app Notes about the on-demand feature

You can also activate various functions (on- demand feature) subsequently via Mercedes me a er purchasing your vehicle. Information is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Activating on-demand feature using Mercedes me

Requirements: R The vehicle has GPS reception. R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user

account.

Ordering and activating on-demand feature # Add the desired on-demand feature for the

vehicle to the shopping basket in the Mercedes me Store.

General notes 29

# Complete the order. The on-demand feature is activated when operating the vehicle.

Speeding up activation # Switch the vehicle o and lock it. # A er about 2 minutes, unlock the vehicle and

switch on the vehicle. The on-demand feature has been activated. For some features, a noti cation also appears in the vehicle's multimedia system.

If the activation was not successful, repeat the process.

Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada

When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R Service points or replacement parts may not

be available immediately.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program.

For more information, please consult an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center, or write to one of the following addresses: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Maintenance

Your customer advisor con rms the service in the service report.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program o ers technical help in the case of a breakdown.

Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can nd further information in the Mercedes- Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will nd both in the vehicle document wallet.

Change of address or change of ownership

In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Noti cation of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus- tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces- sary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera- ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the next

30 General notes

owner. If you have purchased a used vehicle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim- ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus- tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Possible danger due to substances hazardous to health

In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California:

Operating safety

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal- functions or system failures

To avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the prescribed service and

maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a quali ed special- ist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modi cations on electronic component parts

Modi cation of electronic components, their so ware or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com- ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec-

tronic component parts or their so - ware.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by driving too fast and by blows to the under- body and chassis parts

The vehicle can be damaged in the following cases in particular: R The underside of the vehicle makes con-

tact with the ground, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road. R The vehicle drives too quickly over an

obstacle, e.g. a curb, a speed bump or a pothole. R A heavy object hits the underbody or chas-

sis components.

In these or similar situations, the vehicle body, the underbody, chassis components, wheels or tires and parts of the high-voltage battery

General notes 31

could be damaged even if this is not visible. Components that have been damaged in this way can fail unexpectedly or, in the event of an accident, may not absorb the loads that arise as intended. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired

immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

or # If driving safety is impaired during the

rest of the journey, stop immediately paying attention to the tra c situation and notify a quali ed specialist work- shop.

Electric vehicles have an electric motor. The elec- tric motor's energy supply is provided by the high- voltage on-board electrical system.

& DANGER Risk of death and re due to modi ed and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical sys- tem

The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modi ed and/or damaged compo- nents may cause a re. In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the high- voltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible. # Never make any modi cations to the

high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its

high-voltage on-board electrical system components have been modi ed or dam- aged.

# Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical sys- tem.

# A er an accident, do not touch any com- ponents of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

# A er an accident, have the vehicle trans- ported away.

# Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop and replaced if necessary.

The components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system are marked with yellow warning stickers. The cables of the high-voltage on-board electrical system are orange.

32 General notes

Vehicles with an electric motor generate signi - cantly less vehicle noise emissions than vehicles with combustion engines. As a result, your vehicle may not be heard by other road users in certain situations. This can occur, for example, when you are parking and your vehicle cannot be seen by other road users. This requires you to adopt a par- ticularly anticipatory driving style, as it is neces- sary to allow for the possibility that other road users may behave unpredictably.

Declaration of conformity for vehicle installed radio components

USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is sub- ject to the following two conditions: 1) These devi- ces may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Changes or modi cations not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "This vehicle contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Inno- vation, Science and Economic Development Can- adas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference. (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation of the devices." "Les metteurs/rcepteurs dans cette

vhicule sont conforme aux CNR dInnovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux con- ditions suivantes : 1) Ces appareils ne doivent pas produire de brouillage; 2) Ces appareils doivent accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den com- promettre le fonctionnement."

Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical inter- face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, in the context of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data at a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be con- nected at a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to con- necting devices to the diagnostics con- nection

If you connect devices to the diagnostics con- nection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle

General notes 33

systems and operating safety may be impaired. # For safety reasons, we recommend that

you only use and connect products approved by your authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another.

* NOTE Battery discharging from using devi- ces connected to the diagnostics connec- tion

Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the bat-

tery, e.g. by driving a considerable dis- tance.

Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following e ects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components

Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter.

34 General notes

Quali ed specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali- ed specialist workshop. It has the necessary

special skills, tools and quali cations to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. For the following, always have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modi cations as well as installations and con-

versions R Work on electronic components

MercedesBenz recommends a MercedesBenz service center.

Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.

Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R The safety notes in this Operator's Manual,

vehicle-speci c supplements and further sup- plementary documents R Technical data for the vehicle R Tra c rules and regulations R Laws and safety standards pertaining to motor

vehicles

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic elds on a par with permanent magnets. These elds can be found, for example, in the area around the multi- media and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.

For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health e ects

Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac- turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibil- ity of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes- Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. When charging the high-voltage battery, keep a distance of at least an arm's length between the medical aid and the following components: R The power supply equipment

This includes charging stations in the form of a wallbox or a public charging point, for exam- ple. R Vehicle components carrying live voltage

This includes the charging cable and the charging control box, for example.

General notes 35

Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system

If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehi- cle, particularly one that you believe may a ect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and recti ed. If the prob- lem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center

One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects

USA only: The following text is published as required of man- ufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Tra c and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Tra c Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it nds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall

and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to the https:// www.safercar.gov/; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590,: USA. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: https://www.safercar.gov

Canada only: The following text is published as required of man- ufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it nds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,

36 General notes

Transport Canada cannot become involved in indi- vidual problems between you, your dealer or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll-free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; you may also go to the following websites for more information: R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels

Limited Warranty

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions.

Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat-

ing instructions on proper operation of

your vehicle as well as on possible vehi- cle damage.

QR code for rescue card QR codes are attached in the socket ap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly nd the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code

Data storage Data processing in the vehicle

Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehi- cle. Control units process data which, for exam- ple, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves.

Some control units are required for the safe oper- ation of your vehicle, some assist you when driv- ing, such as driver assistance systems, while oth- ers enable convenience or infotainment functions. The following provides you with general informa- tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective Operator's Manual. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehi- cle equipment, digitally.

Personal data Every vehicle is identi ed by a unique vehicle identi cation number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identi cation number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to deter- mine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number.

General notes 37

Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a per- son. Depending on which vehicle data are availa- ble, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns.

Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide govern- mental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. For example, this may be the case during the investi- gation of a criminal o ense. Governmental entities are themselves, in individ- ual cases and within the applicable legal frame- work, authorized to read out data from the vehi- cle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example.

Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units.

This includes the following data, for example: R Vehicle status information such as the speed,

longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display R Ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain

sensor or distance sensor

Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of oper- ation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units o en contain data memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operat- ing state, component loads, maintenance require- ments and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- ing data are stored: R Operating status of system components, such

as ll levels, tire pressure or battery status R Malfunctions or faults in important system

components, such as lights or brakes

R System reactions in special driving situations, such as airbag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems R Information on events leading to vehicle dam-

age R Condition of charge of the high-voltage bat-

tery, estimated range

In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only tempo- rarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example. If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identi cation number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as break- down services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis

38 General notes

of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obliga- tions and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identi cation number to the manufacturer. Fur- thermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for exam- ple, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.

Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R Seat and steering wheel positions R Suspension and climate control settings R Individual settings, such as interior lighting

Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R Multimedia data, such as music, lms or pho-

tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R Address book data for use in connection with

an integrated hands-free system or an integra- ted navigation system R Entered navigation destinations R Data about the use of Internet services

These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB ash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in par-

ticular, when you use online services in accord- ance with the settings that you have selected.

Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart- phone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Operator's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smart- phone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of addi- tional data processing is determined by the pro- vider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the speci c app and the operating system of your smartphone.

General notes 39

Online services

Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless net- work connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manu- facturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's web- site, where the relevant data protection informa- tion is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any per- sonal data which are collected, processed and

used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permis- sion. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva- ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.

Third party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibil- ity of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no in uence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data.

Data protection rights

Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on o er, you are entitled to di erent data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service o ers. There you will also nd the contact information for the manufacturer and its data pro- tection o cers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.

MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect

If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multime- dia system or Mercedes me connect, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multi- media system or Mercedes me connect.

40 General notes

For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions.

Event data recorders

USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa- tions, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understand- ing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were

operating R Whether or not the driver and front passenger

seat belts were buckled/fastened R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal and

R How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which accidents and inju- ries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driv- ing conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine EDR data with the type of person- ally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip- ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu- facturer, other parties that have the special equip- ment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat- ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly

disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with- out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les- see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and a liates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modify- ing or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that con ict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such con ict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

General notes 41

Copyright Free and open source so ware

Information on license for free and open-source so ware used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Registered trademarks R Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue-

tooth SIG, Inc. R DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. R Dolby and MLP are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories. R ESP and PRE-SAFE are registered trade-

marks of Daimler AG. R HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-

tex Corporation. R iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks

of Apple Inc.

R Burmester is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. R Microso and Windows Media are regis-

tered trademarks of Microso Corporation. R SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM Radio Inc. R HD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-

uity Digital Corporation. R Gracenote is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc. R ZAGAT Survey and related brands are regis-

tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

42 General notes

Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system

The restraint system includes the following com- ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems

The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occu- pants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro- tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tension- ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro- tection o ered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident.

In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu- pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their

back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possi-

ble. R Always secure persons under 5 (1.50 m) tall

in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

However, no system available today can com- pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.

Limitations of the protection provided by the restraint system

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modi cations to the restraint system

Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint sys-

tem. # Never tamper with the wiring or any elec-

tronic component parts or their so - ware.

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom- modate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assis- tance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).

Occupant safety 43

Restraint system functionality

When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is per- formed, during which the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds a er the vehicle is started. The com- ponents of the restraint system are then func- tional.

Malfunctioning restraint system

A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys- tem if: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does

not light up when the vehicle is switched on R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights

up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

& DANGER Risk of death due to the restraint system malfunctioning

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may receive an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and

repaired immediately at a quali ed spe- cialist workshop.

# A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.

Function of the restraint system in an accident

How the restraint system works depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover

The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at vari- ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp- tive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the

components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision. Factors which can only be seen and measured a er a collision has occurred cannot play a deci- sive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they pro- vide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed signi cantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are a ected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle su ers only minor defor- mation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitu- dinal members are hit, this may result in su - ciently high levels of vehicle deceleration. Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal impact,

rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal

impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact

44 Occupant safety

R Side airbag: side impact R Window curtain airbag: side impact, rollover,

frontal impact R Belt airbag: frontal impact R PRE-SAFE Impulse Side: side impact

The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger air- bag is correct (/ page 54).

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components

The air bag parts are hot a er an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a

quali ed specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop

a er an accident. Take this into account, particu- larly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig- gered or an airbag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally a ect your hearing. R In general, the powder released is not hazard-

ous to health but may cause short-term breathing di culties to persons su ering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing di culties.

Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental protec- tion measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search func- tion, you will nd information on perchlorate, for example.

Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt

Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occupants

have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.

Always observe the instructions about the correct driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 102).

Occupant safety 45

In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must t

tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the cen-

ter of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should

not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter

coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible

across your hips and pull tight with the shoul- der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin-

ted, abrasive or fragile objects. R Only one person should use each seat belt at

any one time.

R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehi- cle's occupants. Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.

The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a child seat safety feature: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

Activate or deactivate the child seat safety feature of the seat belt (/ page 63). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 59). Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 119).

Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat- belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin-

ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is

in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature

Persons under 5 (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable addi- tional restraint system.

46 Occupant safety

# Always secure persons under 5 (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys- tem.

& WARNING Danger of injury or death due to blocked seat belt anchorage

The restraint e ect of the seat belt is impaired if objects between the front seat and the door are blocking the movable seat belt anchorage on the front seat. # Before starting a journey, make sure that

there are no objects between the front seat and the door.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modi ed seat belts

Seat belts cannot provide protection in the fol- lowing situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi-

ed, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed

R The seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty R Modi cations have been made to the

Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi ed or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modi ed Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as inten- ded. # Never modify the seat belt system, for

example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.

# Make sure that the seat belts are undam- aged, not worn and clean.

# Always have the seat belts checked immediately a er an accident at a quali- ed specialist workshop.

Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tension- ing Devices

Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera- tional and are unable to perform their inten- ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic

Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi- ately replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop a er an accident.

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt

If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.

Occupant safety 47

# Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.

Information on the beltbag in the rear seat belt

The BELTBAG identi cation indicates that a rear seat belt is equipped with a beltbag. When activated, the beltbag increases the protec- ted area of the vehicle occupant's ribcage.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to use of a non-approved child restraint sys- tem

In an accident, the beltbag may damage a non-approved child restraint system or a child restraint system which has not been approved for use in conjunction with the beltbag. # Therefore, always use LATCH or ISOFIX

to fasten a child seat equipped with an integrated restraint system.

# For vehicles equipped with the optional rear seat-belt airbags ("beltbag"), only

use a Mercedes-Benz approved booster seat with integrated backrest.

# Never use an airbag equipped seat belt to fasten a front- or rear-facing child seat or a non-approved booster seat.

# Please contact an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center for information on approved child restraint systems.

Fastening and adjusting seat belts

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can- not be pulled out any further. Vehicles with illuminated design seat belt buckles: the illuminated seat belt buckle makes fastening your seat belt easier in certain situations, for example, when ambient light conditions are poor. % The illumination on the seat belt buckle does

not indicate that the seat belt buckle is func- tioning correctly.

# Always engage seat belt tongue2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle1 of the corre- sponding seat.

# To adjust the seat belt height: press and hold the belt guide release and slide seat belt out- let3 into the desired position.

# To engage the seat belt outlet: let go of the belt guide release and ensure that seat belt outlet3 locks into position.

48 Occupant safety

% A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the notes on fastening the seat belt (/ page 45).

* NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled

When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessa- rily on the front passenger side, e.g. the Emer- gency Tensioning Device. # Only buckle the seat belts as intended.

% Observe the notes on stowage areas (/ page 119). Information on installing a child restraint sys- tem and on children traveling in the vehicle can be found in the "Children in the vehicle" section (/ page 62).

Seat belt adjustment function

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: A er a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjust- ment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system (/ page 49).

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant Protection # Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.

Releasing seat belts # Press the release button in the seat belt

buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.

Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger

The seat belt warning lamp in the driver's display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. The seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h)

and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened. R The driver or front passenger unfastens their

seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

Occupant safety 49

Airbags Overview of airbags

1 Driver's knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger airbag 4 Front passenger knee airbag 5 Window airbag 6 Side airbag

The installation location of an airbag is identi ed by the AIRBAG symbol. An additional arrow sym- bol M indicates the installation location for cer- tain airbags.

When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head

and ribcage R Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat

occupants R Window airbag: head

Information on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co- driver airbag is enabled

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- driver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 69). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 69).

Information on automatic front passenger airbag shuto The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger air- bag is correct (/ page 54).

* NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied

In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front

passenger seat.

50 Occupant safety

R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

# Store objects in a suitable place. # Only one person should use each seat

belt at any one time.

Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.

Protection provided by the airbags

Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection o ered by a cor- rectly fastened seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protec- tive function.

Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant

women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep

as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information. # Always make sure that there are no

objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.

To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat

correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa- tion on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 102).

R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when

the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R The occupants must always keep their feet on

the oor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. R If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe

the additional notes (/ page 59). R Always stow and secure objects correctly.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air- bag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occu- pant must always make sure of the following in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects

between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. R There are no objects between the seat, door

and door pillar (B-pillar).

Occupant safety 51

R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessories, such as mobile navi-

gation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side win- dow or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instruc- tions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile

objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

Limitations of the protection provided by airbags

& WARNING Risk of injury due to modi ca- tions to the cover of an airbag

If you modify the cover of an airbag or a x objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and

do not a x objects to it.

The installation location of an airbag is identi ed by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 50). Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly.

& WARNING Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag

Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the airbag. The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even cause additional inju- ries to the vehicle occupants by deploying.

This may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat. # Always stow and secure objects cor-

rectly. # Before commencing your journey, make

sure that no objects are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers

Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as intended. In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that

have been approved for the correspond- ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.

52 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- tioning sensors in the door

The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modi cations or incorrect work per- formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the

doors. # Always have work on the doors or door

trim carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag

A deployed airbag no longer o ers any protec- tion. # Have the vehicle towed to a quali ed

specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.

Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.

Status of the front passenger front airbag

Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto The automatic front passenger airbag shuto is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint system. The front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag are enabled or disabled accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat

Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system. # Do not store any objects under the co-

driver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied,

make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 69). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing

child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 69). A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 45). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their

back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possi-

ble.

The front passenger airbag may otherwise be dis- abled by mistake, for example, in the following sit- uations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by

supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that

their weight is raised from the seat surface.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag

The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.

Occupant safety 53

A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sit- ting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classi cation of the person in the front

passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly. # Both before and during the journey,

ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, the classi- cation of the person or child restraint system on

the front passenger seat takes place a er the front passenger airbag shuto self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag.

Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 54).

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps

Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shut- o When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is per- formed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simulta- neously. The status of the front passenger airbag is dis- played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps a er the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may

deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out a er 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger

airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa-

bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is o , only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger air- bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be o .

54 Occupant safety

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shuto checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta- tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. A er installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is

o , the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is

disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA- BLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERI- OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 69). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be o . In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. A er installing a forward-facing child restraint sys- tem on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the

child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit contin- uously or be o . Always observe the following information.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward-facing child restraint system

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with the vehicle interior

if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o . # Always move the front passenger seat as

far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap

Occupant safety 55

must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c information (/ page 69). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be o , depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an

adult or a person with a stature corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be o . This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person

with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a

person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains o , depending on the classi cation. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is o : move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the person of smaller stature should use a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit a er the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classi cation of the person in the front

passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor-

rectly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible.

Be sure to also observe the following further rela- ted subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger

seat (/ page 69)

56 Occupant safety

PRE-SAFE system Function of PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection)

PRE-SAFE is able to detect certain critical driv- ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas- ures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE can implement the following meas- ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat

and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the slid-

ing sunroof. R Vehicles with memory function: Moving the

front passenger seat to a more favourable seat position. R Vehicles with multicontour seat: increasing the

air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. R PRE-SAFE Sound: provided that the multime-

dia system is switched on, generating a brief

noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing.

* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat

The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place.

Reversing the PRE-SAFE system measures

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings yourself. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,

move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.

Function of PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu- pant protection plus)

PRE-SAFE PLUS can detect certain impacts, par- ticularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-

emptive measures to protect the vehicle occu- pants. These measures cannot necessarily pre- vent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat

and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is

stationary. This brake application is canceled automatically when the vehicle pulls away.

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol- lowing situations: R When backing up

The system will not initiate any braking application in the following situations: R Whilst driving

or

Occupant safety 57

R When entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist

Function of PRE-SAFE Impulse Side

If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE- SAFE Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the center of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly in ating an air cushion in the outer seat side bol- ster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant. If PRE-SAFE Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual display message appears (/ page 421).

Automatic measures a er an accident Depending on the type and severity of the acci- dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example: R Automatic braking (post-collision brake)

R Activating the hazard warning lights R Triggering an automatic emergency call

(/ page 343) R Switching o the drive system and high-volt-

age on-board electrical system R Unlocking the vehicle doors R Lowering the side windows R Displaying the emergency guide on the central

display R Switching on the interior lighting

Function of the post-collision brake Depending on the accident situation, the post-col- lision brake can minimize the severity of a further collision or even avoid it. If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehi- cle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied. The driver can cancel automatic braking by taking the following actions: R Braking more strongly than automatic braking

R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force

Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle % Also strictly observe the safety notes for the

speci c situation. In this way you can recog- nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil- dren are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 59).

Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have seri- ous consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey. Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant.

58 Occupant safety

To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the fol- lowing information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint sys-

tem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. R The child restraint system must be appropriate

to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for installing

a child restraint system.

Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat.

The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example: R A baby car seat R A rearward-facing child seat R A forward-facing child seat

R A child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest.

The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.

Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.

Observe standards for child restraint systems All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213

and 210.2

Con rmation that the child restraint system com- plies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This con rmation can also be found in the instal- lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.

Detecting risks, avoiding danger

Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings R The vehicle's seat belt system R The Top Tether anchorages

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehi- cle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system (/ page 63). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a

Occupant safety 59

height where a three-point seat belt can be fas- tened properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.

Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint sys- tem It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint sys- tem. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces back- wards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer- vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.

Always secure a child restraint system correctly

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system

The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.

# Be sure to comply with the manufactur- er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.

# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.

# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys- tem.

# Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.

# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle

If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be ung around and hit vehicle occupants.

# Always install child restraint systems cor- rectly, even when not in use.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-speci c information: - Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system on the right and le rear seats (/ page 63).

- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 67).

- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 69). Observe the speci c instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 69). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour-

60 Occupant safety

ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 54).

R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- rior and on the child restraint system. R Also secure Top Tether if present.

Do not modify the child restraint system

& WARNING Risk of injury due to modi ca- tions to the child restraint system

The child restraint system can no longer func- tion properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system. # Only a x accessories which have been

specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.

Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition

& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint sys- tems

Child restraint systems or their retaining sys- tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child

restraint systems that have been dam- aged or involved in an accident.

# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a quali ed specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

Avoid direct sunlight

& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight

If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up excessively. Children could su er burns from these parts, particularly the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint

system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # Cover the child restraint system with a

blanket, for example. # If the child restraint system has been

exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Occupant safety 61

Observe when stopping or parking

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

& WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in particu-

lar, unattended in the vehicle.

Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for instal- ling a child restraint system

Le /right rear seat Preferred securing system: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing

system Also secure Top Tether if present

(/ page 66).

Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt

Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 66).

Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt

Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied,

ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 54). R Notes on automatic front passenger airbag

shuto (/ page 53).

Center rear seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Also secure Top Tether if present

(/ page 66).

62 Occupant safety

Activating or deactivating the special seat belt retractor of the seat belt

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion

If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accord-

ance with the tra c conditions. # Activate the special seat belt retractor

again and correctly secure the child restraint system.

When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured.

The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

Installing a child restraint system # When installing a child restraint system,

always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the infor- mation in this Operator's Manual.

# Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet.

# Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor # Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia

reel retract it again. When the special seat belt retractor is activa- ted, you will hear a ratcheting sound.

# Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly.

Deactivating the special seat belt retractor # Press the release button of the seat belt

buckle. # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to

the seat belt outlet.

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the le and right rear seats

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the le and right rear seats

& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back- rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be

pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to pro- tect as intended and could cause addi- tional injury.

Occupant safety 63

R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is excee- ded.

Too much load may be placed on the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child restraint system and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child and the child restraint system

together weigh more than the permissi- ble gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg ), only use a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt.

# Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R In the manufacturer's installation and operat-

ing instructions for the child restraint system used R On a label on the child restraint system, if

present

Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still com- plied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats

and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system.

O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the following: O When using a baby car seat in weight group

0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight group I on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.

O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as at as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi- ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys- tems in weight group II or III.

64 Occupant safety

Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

# Before every journey, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is correctly engaged in both mounting brackets in the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the cen- ter seat during installation of the child restraint system

# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap- ped.

Vehicles with premium seats

# Fold upholstered lining1 upwards. # Pull the tab on upholstered lining1 upwards

and position it on the support surface. Upholstered lining1 will remain folded upwards.

# Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both mounting brackets2 in the vehicle.

# To close, fold upholstered lining1 upwards. # Li the tab from the support surface and slide

it back into the upholstery slot between the seat backrest and seat cushion. Close the upholstery ap.

Occupant safety 65

Vehicles with standard seats

1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting bracket # Remove and stow away covers1. # Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

system to both mounting brackets in the vehi- cle.

# A er removing the child seat, reattach covers 1.

Fastening a Top Tether

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked a er Top Tether belts are installed

The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving. As a result, child restraint systems will no lon- ger be able to perform their intended protec- tive function. This may also cause additional injuries. # Always lock rear seat backrests a er

installing Top Tether belts. # Observe the lock veri cation indicator.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from adjusting the seat a er installing a child restraint system

Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear bench seats: The following may occur: R The Top Tether belt may sit either too loose

or too tight R The child restraint system may be loose,

incorrectly positioned or damaged and then not perform its intended protective function.

# Never adjust the seat a er the child restraint system has been installed.

If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (le and right rear seats) or the seat belt (all rear seats) and the vehicle.

66 Occupant safety

# If necessary, slide head restraint1 upwards (/ page 108).

# Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) or belt- secured child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions.

# Guide Top Tether belt4 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars.

For child restraint systems with an I-strap Top Tether belt, the belt must be guided past the headrest on the le in the direction of travel. # Hook Top Tether hook3 into Top Tether

anchorage2 without twisting. # Tension Top Tether belt4. In doing so, com-

ply with the child restraint system manufactur- er's installation instructions.

# If necessary, slide head restraint1 down- wards (/ page 108). Make sure that you do

not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt4.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat

& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back- rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be

pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to pro- tect as intended and could cause addi- tional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo

compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.

Occupant safety 67

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator will be visible.

When installing a belt-secured child restraint sys- tem, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

O Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 66).

O When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearward- facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.

O When using a weight category I forward- facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible.

A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi- ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.

O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys- tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seatbelt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

When enabled, the special seatbelt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 63). # Install the child restraint system.

The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat surface of the rear seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet.

68 Occupant safety

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o , the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is

disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA- BLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERI- OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the speci c instructions for the rear- ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys- tems (/ page 69).

Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 54). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is o , the front passenger airbag is ena- bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint sys- tem on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and

forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 69).

O Observe the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation and operating instructions.

O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. A er the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi- ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.

O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys- tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction.

Occupant safety 69

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.

The seat belt on the front passenger side is equip- ped with a special seatbelt retractor. When enabled, the special seatbelt retractor ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 63).

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system

Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could a ect the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shut- o . # Do not place any objects between the

seat surface and the child restraint sys- tem.

# Always make sure that the child restraint system is correctly installed.

# Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible.

# Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust- ment.

# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.

# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.

# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the seat belt out- let.

# If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.

Child-proof locks

Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

70 Occupant safety

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

& WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in particu-

lar, unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users R Get out and be struck by oncoming tra c

R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example

# Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are traveling in the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

# Press the lever in direction1 (activate) or2 (deactivate).

# Make sure that the child safety locks are work- ing properly.

Occupant safety 71

Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows

# To activate/deactivate: press button2. The rear side window can be opened or closed as follows: R Indicator lamp1 is lit: via the switch on

the driver's door

R Indicator lamp1 is o : via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door

When the child safety lock is activated, the con- trols in the rear passenger compartment are disa- bled for: R The rear side windows R The adjustment of the front passenger seat

from the rear passenger compartment R The roller sunblinds in the roof

Notes on pets in the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals le unsecured or unattended in the vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possibly press but- tons or switches.

An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example R Switch systems on or o and endanger

other road users

Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- den steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat-

tended. # Always correctly secure animals while

driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car- rier.

72 Occupant safety

SmartKey Overview of SmartKey functions

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

* NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic elds

# Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic elds.

Vehicle SmartKey with panic alarm 1 Opens/closes the tailgate 2 Unlocks (with embossed surface)

3 Locks 4 Indicator lamp 5 Panic alarm

% If indicator lamp4 does not light up a er pressing the ors button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Replace the SmartKey battery (/ page 75). % Vehicles with convenience doors: if you have

activated the convenience doors function in the multimedia system (/ page 85), you can open or close the driver's or front passenger door by pressing the ors button. Additional information on the conveni- ence doors (/ page 80).

The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R Doors R Socket ap R Tailgate

Opening and closing 73

If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds a er unlocking, it locks again. Anti- the protection is activated again. Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec- tronic devices or metal objects. This can a ect the SmartKey's functionality.

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking veri - cation signal

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/Close # Activate or deactivate the Acoustic Lock.

Arming/disarming the panic alarm

Requirements: R The vehicle is switched o .

# To arm: press button1 for approximately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered.

# To disarm: brie y press button1 again. or # Press the start/stop button.

A SmartKey belonging to the vehicle must be detected in the vehicle.

Changing the unlocking settings

Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: R Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and socket ap

# To switch between settings: press the ands buttons simultaneously for approx- imately six seconds until the indicator lamp ashes twice.

Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and socket ap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the

inner surface of the door handle on the driv- er's door, only the driver's door and the socket ap are unlocked.

Deactivating the function of the SmartKey

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the SmartKey, the KEYLESS-GO func- tions are also deactivated. Access or drive author- ization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular SmartKey. Activate the func- tion of the SmartKey so that all its functions will again be available. You can also deactivate the function of the Smart- Key to reduce the energy consumption of the

74 Opening and closing

SmartKey if you do not use the vehicle or a Smart- Key for an extended period of time. # To deactivate: press thes button on the

SmartKey twice in quick succession. The SmartKey indicator lamp ashes twice brie y and lights up once.

# To activate: press any button on the SmartKey. % When the vehicle is started with the SmartKey

in the marked space of the center console, the function of the SmartKey is automatically activated (/ page 182).

Removing/inserting the emergency key

Removing the emergency key

# Press release button1. Emergency key2 is pushed out slightly.

# Fully remove emergency key2.

Inserting the emergency key

# Insert emergency key2 at marking3 until it engages.

% You can use emergency key2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring.

Replacing the SmartKey battery

& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swal- lowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- ces. Swallowing batteries may cause severe internal burns to occur within two hours.

Opening and closing 75

There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-

dren. # If the cover and/or cap of the battery

compartment does not close securely, do not use the SmartKey any longer and keep out of the reach of children.

# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat- teries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. #

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner.

Take discharged batteries to a quali ed specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a quali ed specialist work- shop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 75).

# Press emergency key2 into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow

until cover1 opens. When doing so, do not hold cover1 closed.

# Insert emergency key2 into the opening and li up covering3 and remove it.

# Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery4 falls out of the Smart- Key.

# Insert the new battery with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

# Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other impurities.

76 Opening and closing

# Insert the front tabs of covering3 into the housing and then press on both sides to close it.

# Make sure that covering3 is completely closed.

# Insert the front tabs of cover1 into the housing and then press until it is completely closed.

# Insert the emergency key again (/ page 75).

Problems with the SmartKey, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # Check the battery using the indicator lamp

(/ page 73). # Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary

(/ page 75). # Use the replacement SmartKey. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock

(/ page 86).

# Have the SmartKey checked at a quali ed spe- cialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of the SmartKey is impaired: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction

loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers

# Make sure that there is su cient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.

You have lost a SmartKey # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a quali ed

specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock

replaced as well.

Doors Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

# To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle1.

# To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door han- dle.

# To open a rear door: pull the rear door handle again.

Opening and closing 77

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

# To unlock: press button1. # To lock: press button2.

The red indicator lamp on button2 lights up once the vehicle is locked.

% The buttons are also on the front passenger and rear doors.

The socket ap is also locked and unlocked. The socket ap can be opened even if a SmartKey is detected in the vehicle. The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the Smart-

Key R If you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO

Requirements: R The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the

vehicle does not exceed 3 (1 m). R The driver's door and the door on which the

door handle is used are closed.

The door handles are extended when: R The vehicle is unlocked R The vehicle SmartKey is detected R A door is opened

The door handles retract: R When the vehicle is locked R When pulling away R A er waiting for a time

* NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten- tional opening of the tailgate or a door

R When using an automatic car wash R When using a high pressure cleaner # Deactivate the function of the SmartKey

in these situations. or # Make sure that the SmartKey is at a min-

imum distance of 10 (3 m) (power washer) or 20 (6 m) (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle.

Observe the notes: R On washing the vehicle in a car wash

(/ page 356) R On using a high pressure cleaner

(/ page 357)

78 Opening and closing

# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of door handle1.

% If the door handle is not extended, touch sen- sor surface2 to unlock.

# To lock the vehicle: touch recessed sensor surface3.

# Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface3 for an extended period.

% Further information on convenience closing (/ page 94).

Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The function of the SmartKey has been deacti-

vated. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # Activate the function of the SmartKey

(/ page 74). # Check the battery using the indicator lamp

(/ page 73). # Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary

(/ page 75). # Use the replacement SmartKey. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock

(/ page 86). # Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a

quali ed specialist workshop.

Opening and closing 79

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction

loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers

# Make sure that there is su cient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.

Activating or deactivating the automatic locking feature

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Locking Function % The vehicle is locked automatically when the

vehicle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace.

# Activate or deactivate Automatic Door Lock. In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R The vehicle is being towed or pushed. R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna-

mometer.

Opening and closing the convenience doors

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur- ing automatic closing of the convenience doors

Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people or animals in the closing area. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity

of the closing area. # Use one of the following options to stop

the closing process: R Driver's or front passenger door:

press the ors button on the SmartKey.

R Driver's door: depress the brake pedal. R All doors: pull on the inner or outer

door handles. R All doors: push against or pull the

door. R All doors: touch the touch screen in

the convenience menu in the multi- media system.

* NOTE When automatically opening and closing the convenience doors, please note

Your view of your surroundings may be restric- ted. # Make sure that there are no persons,

animals or objects in the area of the con- venience doors when opening and clos- ing.

# When opening, pay particular attention to low objects and obstacles in the side window area.

80 Opening and closing

Opening or closing the convenience doors The following functions are required to automati- cally open and close the convenience doors: R KEYLESS-GO (/ page 78) R Power closing function (/ page 85) R Parking Package with surround view camera

(/ page 262) or Remote Parking Assist with Mirror Package (/ page 275) R Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 252)

The convenience doors can then be opened and closed automatically. % If Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated or

unavailable, the convenience doors cannot be opened from inside.

The following options are available for opening or closing the convenience doors: R The SmartKey (to open and close the driver's

and front passenger door) R Approaching the vehicle (to open the driver's

door)

R Depressing the brake pedal (to close the driv- er's door) R The inner door handles (to open and close the

doors) R The outer door handles (to open and close the

doors) R The multimedia system (/ page 85)

% You cannot open a rear door with the door handle from inside the vehicle if it is secured by the child safety lock. Further information on the child safety lock for the rear doors (/ page 70). You can still open the rear doors from the inside via the multimedia system (/ page 85).

Special features of the convenience doors: R If, when closing, the door has reached the rst

detent position, the power closing function (/ page 85) will automatically draw the door into the lock. R If the rear doors are closed using the conveni-

ence function, they are not automatically locked.

# To open the driver's or front passenger door with the SmartKey: press and hold the button on the SmartKey until the door starts to open.

% In the multimedia system, you can set whether the driver's door, the front passenger door or no door opens when you press the button on the SmartKey (/ page 85). If no door opens, the convenience opening function is carried out when the button is pressed. The convenience opening function opens, for example, the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof. Further informa- tion on convenience opening (/ page 94).

# To close the driver's or front passenger door with the SmartKey: press and hold thes button on the SmartKey until the door starts to close. All open doors close.

# Convenience closing with the SmartKey: press and hold thes button on the SmartKey. All open doors, side windows, and the panor- amic sliding sunroof close.

Opening and closing 81

% Press thes button on the SmartKey again to lock the vehicle.

To open the vehicle by approaching it:

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to the unintentional opening of a door

R when walking past the vehicle R when using an automatic car wash R when using a high pressure cleaner # Deactivate the function of the SmartKey

in these situations. or # Make sure that the SmartKey is at a min-

imum distance of 20 (6 m) away from the vehicle.

When you approach your vehicle and the Smart- Key is detected, the vehicle is unlocked and the driver's door opens automatically. # Set the function in the multimedia system

(/ page 85).

% A driver's door that is automatically opened by approaching the vehicle does not close again automatically.

To close the driver's door with the brake pedal: # Depress the brake pedal until the door starts

to close.

To open or close the convenience doors from inside: # Brie y pull the door handle (/ page 77).

Automatic operation is then started.

% If you pull the door handle during automatic operation, the opening or closing process is stopped. If you pull the door handle again, the process continues in reverse order.

# To open the convenience doors from outside: pull on the outside door handle.

# To close the convenience doors from outside: touch recessed sensor surface1 on the door handle.

Object detection Object detection uses several sensors to monitor the opening range of the convenience doors in order to detect objects. If one of the sensors detects an object, the convenience doors are

82 Opening and closing

stopped and a warning is displayed in the multi- media system. # Manually open a door stopped in an intermedi-

ate position.

Even if the convenience doors are equipped with sensors, it cannot be guaranteed that all objects are detected. Object detection is only an aid and is not a substitute for the attention of the vehicle occupants to their immediate surroundings when opening and closing the convenience doors. The vehicle occupants are always responsible for opening and closing the doors safely. Detection range of the sensors

1 3 (Approximately 1 m)

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Object recognition may not detect certain objects at close range. # When opening the convenience doors,

pay particular attention to low objects and obstacles in the side window area. Object detection does not always detect such objects at close range, especially during movement. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged.

* NOTE Risk of accident due to faulty sen- sors

The sensors may malfunction because of snow or due to objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. # Make sure that the convenience doors

are free from dirt, ice or slush. # Be especially careful when opening the

convenience doors if other ultrasonic sources are nearby.

* NOTE Risk of accidents if the detection performance of the sensors in the conve- nience doors is restricted

If the sensors are covered, the convenience doors cannot function reliably. # Do not apply stickers, foils or other coat-

ings to the outside of the convenience doors. The sensors may otherwise be blocked and obstacles may not be detected or only detected to a limited extent.

Opening and closing 83

Exit warning when opening the doors from inside The exit warning of Active Blind Spot Assist is used as an additional safeguard. If an obstacle is detected, the convenience function is deactivated and the moving door will be stopped. # Manually open a door stopped in an intermedi-

ate position.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning

The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly di ering speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the

tra c situation when opening the doors and make sure there is su cient clear- ance.

The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi- tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors

and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi- cle occupants. % Further information on Active Blind Spot

Assist with exit warning (/ page 252).

Blockage detection when opening the doors If an obstacle obstructs a door during the auto- matic opening process, blockage detection will stop the door. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # Manually open a door stopped in an intermedi-

ate position.

* NOTE Damage to the convenience doors despite blockage detection

Blockage detection may not be able to stop the automatic opening process of the doors in all cases. This can be the case in particular with light, so objects. # Therefore, make sure that there is su -

cient clearance next to the vehicle.

Automatic reversing function when closing the doors The doors are equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle stops a door during the automatic closing proc- ess, it will automatically open again. The auto- matic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no

body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

The reversing function will not react: R To so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. R Towards the end of the closing process.

In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trap- ped. # Make sure that no body parts are in the

closing area. # If someone is trapped, use one of the fol-

lowing options:

84 Opening and closing

R Driver's or front passenger door: press the ors button on the SmartKey. R Driver's door: depress the brake

pedal. R All doors: pull on the inner or outer

door handles. R All doors: push against or pull the

door. R All doors: touch the touch screen in

the convenience menu in the multi- media system.

Setting convenience doors

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Comfort # Activate or deactivate Comfort Doors.

Operating convenience doors # Select.

# Select Open door control. The window for operating the doors opens. The doors can be opened or closed by using the slider.

# Select Cancel Process. The procedure is interrupted and the door remains in the position it has reached.

# Select Close All. All doors are closed simultaneously.

% The convenience doors can also be closed using MBUX Interior Assist. Further information on operating the conveni- ence doors .

Setting the SmartKey function for the conveni- ence doors # Select. # Select SmartKey Assignment.

Convenience Opening for Windows, open Right Front Door and open Left Front Door can be set separately for operation with the SmartKey.

Door opening on approach # Activate or deactivate the function.

When the function is activated, the driver's door opens automatically when the vehicle is approached.

Warning of obstacles in the door area # The vehicle warns you of obstacles in the door

area with acoustic feedback and a graphic dis- play.

Power closing function

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically

Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries. # Ensure that no body parts or objects are

in the closing area. # Automatic closing of the doors can be

canceled by pulling the outer or inner door handle.

Opening and closing 85

If you push the door into the lock to the rst detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock. % If the vehicle is locked from the outside, or

while pulling away, an automatic closing of the doors can be triggered.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emer- gency key

Unlocking a le -hand vehicle door with the emer- gency key # Remove the emergency key (/ page 75).

If the door handle is retracted: # Insert a at, non-metallic object behind door

handle1 from above and pry it slightly out- ward.

# Reach behind door handle1 from below, pull it outward to the pressure point and hold it there.

If the door handle is extended: # Pull door handle1 outward to the pressure

point and hold it there. # Insert the emergency key into the lock cylin-

der. # Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise to

position 1.

86 Opening and closing

# Forcefully pull door handle1 outward past the pressure point.

# Remove the emergency key and release the door handle.

Locking the doors

# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening1 on the door lock.

# To lock the le -hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go.

# To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key counter-clockwise as far as it will go.

If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside.

Cargo compartment Opening the tailgate

* NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle

The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened. # Make sure that there is su cient space

behind and above the tailgate.

# If the tailgate is unlocked, press the top of the Mercedes star.

# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 90).

# Pull remote operating switch1 until the tail- gate opens.

or # Press and hold theH button on the Smart-

Key.

Opening and closing 87

# If the tailgate is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open.

If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the tailgate. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid. It is not a substi- tute for your attentiveness.

Closing the tailgate

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehi- cle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around.

# Before the journey, secure objects, lug- gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Notes on closing the tailgate: your vehicle is equipped with automatic key recognition. If a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle, the tailgate will not be locked. Note that the tailgate will not be locked in the fol- lowing situation: R You have locked the vehicle and close the tail-

gate while a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle. and R A second SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is

not detected outside the vehicle.

Automatic SmartKey recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # Before locking, ensure that at least one

SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle.

# To close the tailgate: pull the tailgate down- wards slightly. Release it as soon as it begins to close.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur- ing automatic closing of the tailgate

Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity

of the closing area. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: R Press theH button on the SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating switch

on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the

tailgate. R Press the top of the Mercedes star on the

tailgate.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper.

88 Opening and closing

# Switch on the power supply or the vehicle. # Push remote operating switch1 until the tail-

gate is fully closed.

# Press closing button1 on the tailgate.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO # Press locking button2 on the tailgate.

If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate will close and the vehicle will be locked.

# Press and hold theH button on the Smart- Key. The SmartKey must be in the vicinity of the vehicle.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS # Make a kicking movement with your foot

below the bumper (/ page 90).

Automatic reversing function for the tailgate The tailgate is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic closing process, it will automatically open again slightly. Automatic blockage detection with the reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no

body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

The reversing function will not react: R To so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. R Towards the end of the closing procedure.

Opening and closing 89

In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trap- ped. # Make sure that no body parts are in the

closing area. If someone is trapped, either: R Press theH button on the SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating switch

on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the

tailgate. R Press the top of the Mercedes star on the

tailgate.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or stop the closing process of the tailgate by per- forming a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately. Observe the notes when opening (/ page 87) and closing (/ page 88) the tailgate.

% Two warning tones sound when the tailgate is opening or closing.

* NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten- tional opening of the tailgate or a door

R When using an automatic car wash R When using a high pressure cleaner # Deactivate the function of the SmartKey

in these situations. or # Make sure that the SmartKey is at a min-

imum distance of 10 (3 m) (power washer) or 20 (6 m) (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle.

When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing rmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes: R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the

vehicle while performing the kicking move- ment.

90 Opening and closing

R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too

slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the

vehicle and back again.

1 Detection range of the sensors

If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or

snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros-

thetic leg.

The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in the following situations: R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sen-

sor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehi-

cle, e.g. a charging cable or luggage. R Clamping straps, tarps or other coverings are

pulled over the bumper. R A protective mat with a length reaching over

the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R The protective mat is not secured correctly.

Deactivate the function of the SmartKey (/ page 74) or do not carry the SmartKey about your person in such situations.

Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate

Activating the opening angle limiter You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in the top half of its opening range up to a point shortly before the end position. # Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at

the desired position. # Press and hold the closing button on the tail-

gate until you hear a short acoustic signal. The opening angle limiter will be activated. The tailgate will then stop in the stored position when opened.

To open the tailgate fully, pull the top part of the Mercedes star on the tailgate again a er it has stopped automatically.

Deactivating the opening angle limiter # Press and hold the closing button on the tail-

gate until two short acoustic signals sound.

Opening and closing 91

Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency key

Requirements: R The rear seat backrest has been folded

forward. R The cargo compartment cover has been

removed.

# Remove the emergency key (/ page 75).

# Insert emergency key2 into opening1 in the trim and push it in the direction of the arrow. The tailgate will be unlocked.

Side windows Opening and closing the side windows

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when open- ing a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is

touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but-

ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window

When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body

parts are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, release the but-

ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows

Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unatten- ded. # Activate the child safety lock for the rear

passenger compartment side windows. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

92 Opening and closing

Requirements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been

switched on.

1 Closes 2 Opens

The buttons on the driver's door take precedence.

# To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.

# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again.

When the vehicle is switched o , you can con- tinue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened.

Automatic reversing function of the side windows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten- tiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no

body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window

The reversing function does not react: R To so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. R During resetting.

The reversing function cannot prevent some- one from becoming trapped in these situa- tions. # During the closing process, make sure

that no body parts are in the closing area.

# If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again.

Opening and closing 93

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when open- ing a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is

touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if some-

body becomes trapped.

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the immediate vicinity of

the vehicle. # Press and hold the button on the Smart-

Key. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened.

R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on.

% If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened rst.

# To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.

# To continue convenience opening: press and hold the button again.

Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from out- side)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience clos- ing

When the convenience closing feature is oper- ating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature is

operating, monitor the entire closing

process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the immediate vicinity of

the vehicle. # Press and hold thes button on the Smart-

Key. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The panoramic sliding roof is closed.

# To interrupt convenience closing: release the s button.

# To continue convenience closing: press and hold thes button again.

% Convenience closing also functions with KEY- LESS-GO (/ page 78).

94 Opening and closing

Resolving problems with the side windows

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated

If you close a side window again immediately a er it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are

in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the

button or press the button again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the

window guide. # Adjust the side windows.

Adjusting the side windows

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corre-

sponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corre-

sponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature. Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # Check the battery using the indicator lamp

(/ page 73).

# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 75).

Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pano-

rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During the opening and closing process,

make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the sliding sunroof.

# If someone is trapped, release the con- trol panel immediately.

or

Opening and closing 95

# Touch the control panel during automatic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by children

Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

key with you and lock the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof.

# During the opening or closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement.

# If someone is trapped, release the con- trol panel immediately.

or # Touch the control panel during automatic

operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped.

* NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice

Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free

of snow and ice.

* NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects

Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals.

# Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.

* NOTE Damage to panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel caused by roof luggage rack

If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is opened when a roof luggage rack is installed, the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel may be damaged by the roof lug- gage rack. # Do not open the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel if a roof luggage rack is installed.

96 Opening and closing

The sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind are operated using control panel1. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. # To open: swipe backwards across control

panel1 and hold.

# To close: swipe forwards across control panel 1 and hold.

# To raise or lower: press control panel1 brie y.

# To start automatic operation: swipe forwards or backwards across control panel1.

# To cancel automatic operation: press control panel1 again. The opening/closing process will be stopped.

Automatic reversing function of the sliding sun- roof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing func- tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no

body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

The reversing function will not react: R To so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. R Towards the end of the closing procedure. R During resetting. # During the closing process, make sure

that no body parts are in the closing area.

# If someone is trapped, release the con- trol panel immediately.

or # Touch the control panel during automatic

closing. The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing func- tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

Opening and closing 97

# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of move- ment.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

In particular, the reversing function does not react to so , light and thin objects, e.g. n- gers. # When closing the roller sunblind, make

sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.

# If someone is trapped, release the con- trol panel immediately.

or # Touch the control panel during automatic

closing. The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pano-

rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.

Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel: If it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion.

Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel: If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof

At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the

sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion.

# If somebody becomes trapped, brie y push the sliding sunroof button forwards or backwards.

Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again

If you close the sliding sunroof again immedi- ately a er it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof will close with increased or maximum force. There is a risk of becoming trapped or even of fatal injuries! # Make sure that no parts of the body are

in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, release the con-

trol panel immediately. or # Touch the control panel during automatic

closing. The closing process will be stopped.

The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you can- not see the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pano-

rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.

98 Opening and closing

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: # Immediately a er automatic reversing, swipe

forwards across the control panel (/ page 95) and hold until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step.

The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.

The sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-

blind.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sun- blind # Swipe forwards across the control panel

(/ page 95) and hold repeatedly until the sliding sunroof is completely closed.

# Press and hold the control panel for another second.

# Press and hold the control panel until the front roller sunblind is completely closed.

# Press and hold the control panel for another second.

# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.

Anti-the protection Function of the immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. The immobilizer is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched o , and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart- Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the vehicle if a valid SmartKey has been le inside the vehicle. % In the event that the engine cannot be started

(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-

tem is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-the alarm system)

Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R When a door is opened R When the tailgate is opened R When the interior motion sensor is triggered

(/ page 101) R When the tow-away alarm is triggered

(/ page 100)

The ATA system is armed automatically a er approximately ten seconds in the following situa- tions: R A er locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R A er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Opening and closing 99

Example: with MBUX Hyperscreen

Indicator lamp1 ashes when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R A er unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey R A er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

R A er pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 182)

% When the MercedesBenz emergency call sys- tem is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is automatically sent to the Customer Assistance Center (/ page 344).

% In the case of severe battery discharging, the anti-the alarm system is automatically deac- tivated to facilitate the next engine start.

Deactivating the ATA # Press the,s orH button on the

SmartKey. or # Press the start/stop button with the SmartKey

in the marked space (/ page 182)

Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # With the SmartKey outside the vehicle, touch

the inner surface of the door handle.

Function of the tow-away alarm % This function may not be available in all coun-

tries. An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alter- ation to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed a er approximately 60 seconds: R A er locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R A er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol- lowing components are closed: R Doors R Tailgate

The tow-away alarm is automatically deactivated: R A er pressing the orH button on the

SmartKey R A er pressing the start/stop button with the

SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 182) R A er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

100 Opening and closing

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 216).

Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection # Arm or disarm Tow-away Protection. The tow-away alarm is armed again in the follow- ing cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.

Function of the interior motion sensor % This function may not be available in all coun-

tries. When the interior motion sensor is activated, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior.

The interior motion sensor is activated automati- cally a er approximately ten seconds: R A er locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R A er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

The interior motion sensor is only activated when the following components are closed: R Doors R Tailgate

The interior motion sensor is automatically deacti- vated: R A er pressing the orH button on the

SmartKey R A er pressing the start/stop button with the

SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 182) R A er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R When there are moving objects such as mas-

cots in the vehicle interior R When a side window is open

R When a panoramic sliding sunroof is open

Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection # Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sensor. The Interior motion sensor is activated again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.

Opening and closing 101

Notes on the correct driver's seat position

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-

cle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular,

adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

Ensure the following when adjusting the steering wheel1, seat belt2 and driver's seat3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's

airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration: R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat

cushion R Your legs are not fully extended and you can

depress the pedals properly R The back of your head is supported at eye

level by the center of the head restraint

R You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent R You can move your legs freely R You can see all the displays on the instrument

cluster clearly R You have a good overview of the tra c condi-

tions R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body

and passes across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area

Seats Adjusting the front seat electrically

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

102 Seats and stowing

You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched o .

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that

no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil- dren in the vehicle".

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion

R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion

# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that

hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints

If head restraints have not been adjusted cor- rectly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking. # Before driving o , make sure for every

vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat- belt and become injured.

Seats and stowing 103

# Adjust the seat properly before begin- ning your journey.

# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat

Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system. # Do not store any objects under the co-

driver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied,

make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.

* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back

The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back.

# When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.

The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feedback on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat.

1 Head restraint height 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat cushion length 5 Seat fore-and-a position 6 Seat backrest inclination # Save the settings with the memory function

(/ page 119).

104 Seats and stowing

% The head restraint height will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-a position.

Adjusting the front passenger seat electrically from the driver's seat

You can call up the following functions for the front passenger seat: R Seat adjustment R Seat heating R Seat ventilation R Memory function # To select the front passenger seat: press but-

ton1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.

# Adjust the front passenger seat using the but- tons on the driver's side door operating unit.

Adjusting the front passenger seat electrically from the rear passenger compartment

1 Select front passenger seat 2 Head restraint height 3 Seat backrest inclination 4 Seat height 5 Seat fore-and-a position

Seats and stowing 105

# To select the front passenger seat: press but- ton1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.

# Adjust the front passenger seat using the but- tons on the door operating unit in the rear passenger compartment.

% You can use the rear passenger compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 72).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

1 Higher 2 So er 3 Lower 4 Firmer # Use buttons1 to4 to adjust the contour of

the backrest.

Adjusting the rear seats electrically

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not o er the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat- belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin-

ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is

in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feedback on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat.

106 Seats and stowing

1 Head restraint height 2 Seat backrest inclination # Make the appropriate adjustments.

Head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints on the front seats

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-

cle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular,

adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints

If head restraints have not been adjusted cor- rectly, there is an increased risk of injury in

the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking. # Before driving o , make sure for every

vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

Moving forward or back

# Take hold of the head restraint on both sides and press release knob1.

Seats and stowing 107

# Pull the headrest forwards or push it back- wards.

# Let go of release knob1. # To raise or lower: adjust the head restraint

using the buttons on the door operating unit (/ page 102).

Adjusting the luxury head restraints on the front seats

Moving forward or back

# Take hold of the head restraint on both sides and press release knob1.

# Pull the headrest forwards or push it back- wards.

# Let go of release knob1. # To raise or lower: adjust the head restraint

using the buttons on the door operating unit (/ page 102).

Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats mechanically (standard seats)

# To set in the rst position: pull the head restraint up.

# To raise: push release knob1 in the direc- tion of the arrow and pull the head restraint up.

# To lower: press release knob1 in the direc- tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

108 Seats and stowing

Attaching and removing the additional cushion of the head restraint in the rear passenger compart- ment (standard seats)

# To attach the additional cushion: guide long strap3 of additional cushion1 over the back of head restraint2.

# Guide short strap4 of additional cushion1 under head restraint2.

# Bring both straps3 and4 together on the underside of the head restraint and close Vel- cro fastening5.

# To remove the additional cushion: open Velcro fastening5.

# Remove additional cushion1.

Attaching and removing the additional cushion of the head restraint in the rear passenger compart- ment (premium seats)

# To attach the additional cushion: open Velcro strip4 on the rear of additional cushion1.

# Guide Velcro strip4 between head restraint 2 and strip3.

# Close Velcro strip4.

Seats and stowing 109

# To change the position of the additional cush- ion: move additional cushion1 up or down.

# To remove additional cushion: open Velcro strip4 of additional cushion1.

# Remove additional cushion1.

Attaching a heated additional cushion # Attach the additional cushion to the head

restraint as described. # Move the head restraint to the very top.

# Push press-studs2 on the additional strap into counterpieces1 on the head restraint.

# Move the head restraint to the desired height.

Switching neck heating from the additional cush- ion on/o # Make sure that press-studs2 on the addi-

tional strap are correctly pushed into counter- pieces1 on the head restraint.

# Ensure that the "Couple neck heating to seat heating" function is active (/ page 111) in the multimedia system.

# Activate or deactivate the seat heating (/ page 113).

Folding the center head restraint into position and folding it back manually (premium seats)

# To fold into position: pull the head restraint upwards until it engages.

Folding down

# Press button1. # Fold down the head restraint completely.

The center head restraint has a usage position and a non-usage position. The usage position is

110 Seats and stowing

the upright position in which the head restraint is locked; the non-usage position is the position in which the head restraint is folded downwards. When the center seat is used, the head restraint must be in the upright, locked usage position.

Con guring the seat settings

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat

Adjusting the air cushions # On the corresponding menu, adjust the air

cushions for Lumbar, Shoulders or Side Bol- sters.

Setting the seat heating balance # Select Heating Settings. # Select Seat Heating Balance. # Adjust the heat distribution for the desired

seat. % The seat heating balance can be set in the

Seat Climate Control menu in the rear passenger compartment.

Coupling neck heat to seat heating # Select Additional Neck Warmer. # Switch the function for the desired seat on or

o . If the function is active, the neck heat of the additional cushion has been coupled to the seat heating.

Setting automatic seat adjustment

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur- ing adjustment of the driver's seat a er calling up a driver pro le

Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjust- ment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user pro le. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driv-

er's seat is being adjusted using the mul- timedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trap- ped, stop the adjustment process immedi- ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the cen-

tral display. or # b) Press a memory position button or a

seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stopped.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Automatic Seat Positioning

Manually adjusting driver's seat and steering wheel position to body size The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's body size and sets this directly. # To set the unit of measurement: select cm or

ft/in. # Set the size using the scale.

Seats and stowing 111

# Select Start Positioning. The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size that has been set.

% You can also con gure these settings via the Mercedes me user account for your user pro- le. By synchronizing the pro les in the vehi-

cle and the Mercedes me connect pro les, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchroniz- ing user pro les .

Automatically adjusting driver's seat and steering wheel position to body size If the vehicle has the Interior Assistant, the driv- er's body size can be determined automatically using the 3D laser cameras in the overhead con- trol panel. # Wait until the Interior Assistant has deter-

mined the body size. # Select Start Positioning.

The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size that has been determined.

% Further information on the Interior Assistant: (/ page 306)

% If the driver's seat and steering wheel position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be manually adapted at any time via the control buttons. The outside mirrors are not set via this func- tion. Instead, they have to be set manually via the operating switches.

Overview of massage programs % Depending on the vehicle equipment, di erent

massage programs are available: R Relaxing Massage Relaxing back massage

with increasing wave motions and then sooth- ing movements. R Hot Relaxing Back Based on hot stone mas-

sage, the program combines heat and mas- sage. It starts by massaging the back. In addi- tion, warm pressure points become noticea- ble, starting in the pelvic area. R Hot Relaxing Shoulders Combination of heat

and massage. It starts by massaging the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area.

R Activating Massage Activating massage pro- gram with upward-moving massage waves. R Classic Massage Calming back massage pro-

gram. R Wave Massage Regenerating massage pro-

gram through massage waves across the back and in the seat cushion. R Mobilizing Massage Mobilizing massage pro-

gram with upward-moving massage waves. Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain. R Workout, Backrest and Workout, Cushion

These programs require your cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood ow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it to activate back, abdominal and leg muscles. R Deep Waves Wave-like movements in the

cushion can promote blood ow and meta- bolic processes in the lower back and legs. R Deep Workout Connect the Workout, Back-

rest to the Workout, Cushion. The vibrating

112 Seats and stowing

massage in the cushion intensi es the e ec- tiveness of tensing and releasing muscles when you tense against the pressure point. This supports metabolic processes and blood ow in the buttocks and legs.

Selecting the massage program for the front seats

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select a massage program (/ page 112). # Start the program for the desired seat ;. # To set the massage intensity: switch Intensive

on or o .

Resetting seat settings

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat # Select Reset. # Select for the desired seat.

Switching the seat heating on/o

& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad- ding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be a ected or they may even su er burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat

heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated a er it has been switched on repeatedly.

* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heat- ing is switched on

When the seat heating is switched on, over- heating may occur due to objects or docu-

ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or documents

are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on.

Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.

Seats and stowing 113

# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are o , the seat heating is switched o .

% The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels a er 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches o .

% If you switch the power supply o and on again within 20 minutes, the previous setting of the seat heating for the driver's seat will remain active.

% You can set the heat distribution of the heated sections among the seat cushions and seat backrests on the front and rear seats using the multimedia system (/ page 111).

Switching the seat ventilation on/o

Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.

114 Seats and stowing

# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are o , the seat ventilation is switched o .

% If you switch the power supply o and on again within 20 minutes, the previous seat

ventilation setting for the driver's seat will remain active.

Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-

cle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular,

adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel

Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected.

Seats and stowing 115

1 To move up 2 To move back 3 To move down 4 To move forward # Save the settings with the memory function

(/ page 119).

Coupling the steering wheel heater with the seat heating

Requirements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been

switched on.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Heating Settings # Tap on Additional Steering Wheel Heating.

The steering wheel heater will be coupled to the seat heating.

When the function has been activated, the steer- ing wheel heater is automatically activated and deactivated when you switch the switch the seat heating on and o .

Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature

& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature

You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment process

is complete before driving o .

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur- ing adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature

You and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped. # Ensure that no one has a body part in

the sweep of the steering wheel or driv- er's seat.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel:

116 Seats and stowing

# Move the adjustment lever of the steer- ing wheel. The adjustment process will be stopped.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the seat adjustment switch.

The adjustment process will be stopped. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

You can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature

Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the easy entry and exit feature, particu- larly when unattended.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

In order to use the easy entry and exit feature, the automatic seat adjustment function must have been switched on (/ page 111). When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel and driver's seat will move as fol- lows: R The steering wheel will move upwards. R The driver's seat will move forward or back-

ward to a seat position suitable for getting out of the vehicle.

This will occur in the following situations: R You switch o the vehicle when the driver's

door is open. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is

switched o .

% The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go.

The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range.

The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last drive position in the following cases: R You switch the power supply or the vehicle on

when the driver's door is closed R You close the driver's door when the vehicle is

switched on.

The last drive position will be saved when: R You switch o the vehicle. R You call up the seat settings via the memory

function. R You save the seat settings via the memory

function.

If you press one of the memory function position buttons, the adjustment process will be stopped.

Seats and stowing 117

Setting the easy entry and exit feature

Requirements: R The automatic seat adjustment has been acti-

vated (/ page 111).

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Convenience 5 Easy Entry And Exit Feature # Activate/deactivate Seat Positioning or Steer-

ing Wheel Positioning. % If you are using an individual user pro le, this

information is used for the easy entry and exit feature. This will cause the driver's seat and steering wheel to move into the correct posi- tion automatically .

Lowering the window # Activate or deactivate the function.

The front windows lower to an intermediate position when the doors are opened.

Memory function Function of the memory function

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the mem- ory function is used while driving

If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the

driver's side when the vehicle is station- ary.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func- tion

When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped. # During the adjusting process of the

memory function, ensure that no body

parts are in the area of movement of the seat or the steering wheel.

# If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjust- ment switch immediately. The adjustment process is stopped.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the mem- ory function is activated by children

Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

You can use the memory function when the vehi- cle is switched o . Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function.

118 Seats and stowing

You can save the following settings for the front seat: R Seat, backrest, head restraint position and

contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec-

tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest R Driver's side: steering wheel position and posi-

tion of the outside mirrors on the driver's and front passenger sides R Head-up Display

Operating the memory function

Storing

# Set the seat, the steering wheel, the head-up display and the outside mirror to the desired position.

# Press theV button and then release it.

# Press one of the preset position buttons 4, T orU within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.

# To call up: press the preset position button 4,T orU. The seat is moved to the stored position. A er releasing the button, the front seat, outside mirror, head-up display and steering column continue to move into the stored position automatically.

Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehi- cle occupants.

Seats and stowing 119

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug-

gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or abrupt changes in direction. # Always store objects such that they can-

not be thrown around in such situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.

# Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.

# Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment.

& WARNING Risk of accident from objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell and front- passenger footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell or front-passenger footwell.

# Always install the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that

there is always su cient clearance for the pedals.

# Do not use loose oor mats and do not lay multiple oor mats on top of one another.

Vehicles with automatic front passenger airbag shuto : Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front passenger air- bag shuto (/ page 53).

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehi- cle is moving

The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be ung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu- pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You

120 Seats and stowing

could be distracted from tra c conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehicle

is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers of

the right size. # Close the container, particularly if the

liquid is hot.

* NOTE Damage to the cup holder

When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged. # Only fold the rear armrest back when the

cup holder is closed.

* NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight

When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the rear

seat armrest.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to an open cargo compartment oor

If you drive with the cargo compartment oor open, objects could be ung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always close the cargo compartment

oor before a journey.

* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart- ment under the ashtray due to intense heat

The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully

engaged.

The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or

the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci ed on the vehicle identi cation plate on the vehi- cle's B-pillar. R the load must not protrude above the upper

edge of the seat backrests. R When transporting objects in the cargo com-

partment, always install the cargo compart- ment cover and partitioning net. R always place the load behind unoccupied

seats if possible. R secure the load using the tie-down eyes and

distribute the load evenly.

Notes on driving with a roof load R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place

heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle.

Seats and stowing 121

R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. R When transporting roof loads and when the

vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs; andA. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 191).

% For more information on stowage compart- ments and stowage areas, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual.

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

Overview of the front stowage compartments

1 Stowage spaces in the doors 2 Stowage and telephone compartment

beneath the armrest with charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones, multime- dia and USB ports as well as stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player

3 Stowage compartment in the front center console with cup holders, USB ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones

4 Stowage tray below the central display of the multimedia system with USB ports

5 Glove box

% The rubber mat in the stowage compartment in front center console3 can be removed for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 360).

% Use the rubber strap to securely store objects in the stowage tray under the central display.

Opening and closing the stowage compartment in the front center console

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

122 Seats and stowing

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.

# Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

# To open: slide the cover of the stowage com- partment in the front center console all the way forwards in the direction of the arrow using handle1.

# To close: brie y push handle1 of the open cover of the stowage compartment in the front center console forwards. The cover automatically closes the stowage compartment in the front center console.

Opening and closing the glove box

# To open: press button1. The glove box is open.

# To close: fold the glove box upwards. The glove box is closed.

Seats and stowing 123

Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold)

Folding the rear seat backrests forward

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats

When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that

no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

& WARNING Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged

The seat backrest may fold forwards. There is a risk of the following, in particular: R The vehicle occupant may be pressed

against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause addi- tional injury.

R A child restraint system is no longer prop- erly supported or properly positioned and may no longer ful ll its function as inten- ded. R The seat backrest cannot restrain objects

or goods in the trunk or cargo compart- ment.

Always ensure that the seat backrest is engaged, especially: R A er the seat has been adjusted. R A er the cargo compartment enlargement

has been folded forwards

Make sure that the red marking of the lock veri - cation indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest will not be locked. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to chil- dren.

Requirements: R The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully

inserted.

R Vehicles with a folding rear armrest: the rear armrest has been folded up.

Folding the rear seat backrests forward mechani- cally You can fold the center and right seat backrests forwards separately. The le seat backrest can be folded forwards only together with the center seat backrest. Vehicles with a "Premium rear passenger com- partment" do not have a center seat backrest. If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back into place. # Ensure that the center seat backrest is in an

upright position and engaged with the le seat backrest (/ page 128).

124 Seats and stowing

# Press the seat belt tongue of seat belt1 into marked position2.

# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for- wards, if necessary.

# Pull release lever1. # Fold the corresponding seat backrest for-

wards.

Folding the rear seat backrests forward electri- cally You can fold the center and right seat backrests forwards separately.

The le seat backrest can be folded forwards only together with the center seat backrest. Vehicles with a "Premium rear passenger com- partment" do not have a center seat backrest. If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back into place. # Ensure that the center seat backrest is in an

upright position and engaged with the le seat backrest (/ page 128).

Seats and stowing 125

# Press the seat belt tongue of seat belt1 into marked position2.

# If at least one section of the rear seat back- rest is folded forwards, the corresponding front seat will move forwards slightly, if neces- sary, to avoid a collision. The rear head restraints are lowered as required.

# In the rear passenger compartment: pull release lever1.

# In the cargo compartment: brie y pull one of buttons1. The corresponding seat backrest will be unlocked. If the le seat backrest is not locked with the center seat backrest, this will be shown on the driver's display.

# Fold the corresponding seat backrest for- wards.

126 Seats and stowing

Folding the center rear seat backrest forwards separately If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back into place. Vehicles with a "Premium rear passenger com- partment" do not have a center seat backrest.

# Press release catch3.

# Fold seat backrest2 forwards.

Folding back the rear seat backrest

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat back- rest

The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-

ped when folding back the seat backrest.

Vehicles with a "Premium rear passenger com- partment" do not have a center seat backrest.

# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for- wards, if necessary.

# Swing seat backrest1 back until it engages. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, red lock veri cation indicator2 will be visible.

Seats and stowing 127

Locking and releasing the release catch of the center rear seat backrest You can lock the center seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the trunk against unauthorized access. The center seat backrest can then be folded forwards only together with the le seat backrest. Vehicles with a "Premium rear passenger com- partment" do not have a center seat backrest.

# To lock or unlock: slide catch1 upwards or downwards.

EASY-PACK cargo compartment cover and parti- tioning net cassette

Notes on the cargo compartment cover

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects

The cargo compartment cover alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of lug- gage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, partic- ularly in the event of abrupt changes in direc- tion, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads against

slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo compartment cover.

* NOTE Damage to the cargo compartment cover when loading the vehicle

The cargo compartment cover may be dam- aged when the vehicle is being loaded. # Do not place any objects above the

lower edge of the side windows or on the cargo compartment cover.

128 Seats and stowing

Extending/retracting the cargo compartment cover

Extending

# Pull the cargo compartment cover back by both grab handles1 and hook it into brack- ets2 on the le and right.

Retracting # Release the cargo compartment cover from

brackets2 on the le and right. # Guide the cargo compartment cover forwards

using both grab handles1 until it is fully retracted.

Installing/removing the cargo compartment cover

Requirements: R The cargo compartment cover is rolled up.

Removing the cargo compartment cover

# Press end cap1 on the le or right inwards. # Pull out the cargo compartment cover back-

wards.

Seats and stowing 129

Installing the cargo compartment cover

# Insert the cargo compartment cover in brack- ets1 on the le and right. The end caps of the cargo compartment cover will engage audibly.

Attaching/removing the partitioning net

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects

The partitioning net alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, partic- ularly in the event of abrupt changes in direc- tion, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads against

slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the parti- tioning net.

For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net when transporting a load. Damaged partitioning nets can no longer ful ll their functions and must be replaced. Visit a quali- ed specialist workshop.

Please note that the availability of the partitioning net depends on the equipment.

Attaching

Partitioning net without cargo compartment enlarge- ment

130 Seats and stowing

Partitioning net with cargo compartment enlarge- ment

# Unfold the partitioning net until it audibly clicks into place.

# Hook partitioning net1 into holders2 on the le and right on the headliner.

# Engage hooks3 in tie-down eyes4 on the le and right.

# Pull on the loose ends of the lashing straps at the same time until partitioning net1 is tight.

Removing

# Raise the buckle of lashing strap6 in the direction of arrow.

# Slide the loose end of lashing strap6 into the buckle in the direction of arrow until the lashing straps are loose.

# Remove hooks3 from tie-down eyes4 on the le and right.

# Remove partitioning net1 from brackets2 on the headliner on the le and right.

Stowing

Seats and stowing 131

# Press both buttons1 and fold together the partitioning net.

# The partitioning net can be stowed in the stowage space under the cargo compartment oor.

Overview of the tie-down eyes

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 119).

1 Tie-down eyes

Overview of bag hooks

& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects

The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage.

Objects or items of luggage may be ung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag

hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile

objects on the bag hooks.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 119). Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 6.6 lbs (3 kg) and do not attach any goods to them.

132 Seats and stowing

1 Bag hook

Using the clothes hooks in the rear passenger compartment

# Press clothes hook1 at the bottom. Clothes hook1 will extend.

% Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 119).

Attaching a roof luggage rack

& WARNING Risk of accident due to exceed- ing the maximum roof load

The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driv- ing characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load

and adjust your driving style.

You will nd information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head- room clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be dam- aged.

Seats and stowing 133

# Observe the signposted headroom clear- ance.

# If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.

# Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

* NOTE Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks

The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. # Only use roof luggage racks tested and

approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Depending on the vehicle equipment,

ensure that when the roof luggage rack is installed, the tailgate can be fully opened.

# Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will

not sustain damage even when it is in motion.

* NOTE Damage to panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel caused by roof luggage rack

If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is opened when a roof luggage rack is installed, the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel may be damaged by the roof lug- gage rack. # Do not open the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel if a roof luggage rack is installed.

* NOTE Damage to the covers

The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened. # Do not use metallic or hard objects.

# Carefully fold covers1 upwards in the direc- tion of the arrow.

134 Seats and stowing

# Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers1.

# Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer.

# Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.

Cup holder Installing the cup holder in or removing it from the center console

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehi- cle is moving

The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be ung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu- pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from tra c conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle.

# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.

# Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.

# Close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around in such situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.

# Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

Requirements: R For installation: the locking catch is pushed in

the direction of the cup holder.

Seats and stowing 135

Installation

# Insert cup holder housing1 into the stowage compartment on a slight angle.

# Place cup holder housing1 with the recesses on the two hubs2 in the stowage compartment so that they t.

# Push cup holder down.

Locking

# Slide locking catch1 toward the side wall of the center console. The cup holder is locked.

Removal

# Slide locking catch1 toward the cup holder. The cup holder is unlocked.

# First pull the cup holder up in the direction of arrow2 and then twist it slightly to remove it from the stowage compartment.

136 Seats and stowing

Using the cup holder

# Placing a beverage container in the cup holder. Base2 of the cup holder lowers automati- cally and the side walls1 of the cup holder move forward automatically.

% The cup holder automatically adjusts to the size of the container placed in it.

The side walls of the cup holder can also be acti- vated manually in di erent ways: R Slightly press down the bottom with the bever-

age container. R Press the grooved surface on the side wall of

the cup holder.

% Check whether the beverage container is rmly held by the cup holder. Some beverage

containers are not adequately secured in the cup holder due to their shape or size.

Original position When the cup holder is not in use, the side walls of the cup holder can be retracted manually. The bracket arms of the cup holder are automatically retracted as well, and the cup holder's holding function will then no longer be available.

# Manually push back the side walls of cup holder2 in the direction of the arrow.

Seats and stowing 137

Sockets Using the 12 V socket in the front passenger foot- well

Requirements: R Only connect devices up to a maximum of

180 W (15 A).

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has a 12 V socket in the front passenger footwell.

# Li up socket cap1. # Insert the plug of the device. # Make sure that no cables are running through

or secured in the airbag deployment area when using the socket. Also observe the notes on airbag protection (/ page 51).

USB ports

Depending on its equipment, the vehicle has the following USB ports: R In the storage compartment in the front center

console R In the storage compartment under the front

armrest R In front of the storage tray under the central

display of the multimedia system R In the electronics compartment in the center

console of the rear passenger compartment

You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging cable. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

devices can be charged with up to 20 V (5 A) when the vehicle is switched on.

Wireless charging of the mobile phone and con- nection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they cannot

be thrown around in such situations.

138 Seats and stowing

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart- ment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of re from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment

Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a re hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place

any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal.

* NOTE Damage to objects caused by plac- ing them in the mobile phone storage compartment

If objects are placed in the mobile phone stor- age compartment, these may be damaged by electromagnetic elds. # Do not place credit cards, storage

media, ski passes or other objects sensi- tive to electromagnetic elds in the mobile phone storage compartment.

* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stow- age compartment caused by liquids

If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be dam- aged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile

phone stowage compartment.

Always observe the notes for persons with elec- tronic medical aids (/ page 35).

R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module. R The charging function and wireless connection

of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the vehicle is switched on. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be

charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment. R Large mobile phones which do not rest at in

the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior antenna. R The mobile phone may heat up during the

charging process. This may also depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background. R To ensure more e cient charging and connec-

tion with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are necessary for wireless charging are an exception.

Seats and stowing 139

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front

Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless

charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz- mobile.com/

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the vehi- cle has the following options for wirelessly charg- ing a mobile phone in the cockpit: R In the front stowage compartment of the cen-

ter console R In the stowage compartment in the armrest

Example: wirelessly charging the mobile phone in the front stowage compartment (with MBUX Hyper- screen)

# Place the mobile phone as close to the center of mat1 as possible with the display facing upwards.

When a message is shown in the multimedia sys- tem, the mobile phone is being charged. In addi- tion, malfunctions during the mobile phone's charging process are shown in the multimedia system display. % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g.

using clean, lukewarm water.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment

Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless

charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz- mobile.com/

Wireless charging in the rear passenger compart- ment in vehicles without MBUX rear tablet

# Fold down the rear armrest.

140 Seats and stowing

# Place the mobile phone as close to the center of mat1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the indicator lamp at the front of the mobile phone system lights up, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunc- tions during the mobile phone's charging proc- ess are shown by the indicator lamp ashing three times.

Wireless charging in the rear passenger compart- ment in vehicles with MBUX rear tablet

# Fold down the rear armrest.

# Open the stowage compartment in rear arm- rest1 .

# Place the mobile phone as close to the center of mat2 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the indicator lamp at the front of the mobile phone system lights up, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunc- tions during the mobile phone's charging proc- ess are shown by the indicator lamp ashing three times.

% Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 119).

Installing and removing the oor mats

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another.

Seats and stowing 141

Installing oor mats

# Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the oor mat in the footwell with a positive t.

# Press studs1 onto holders2. # Adjust the corresponding seat.

# Insert the remaining oor mats with a positive t and, if available, attach them to the vehicle-

speci c securing system.

Removing oor mats # Slide the corresponding seat backwards and

pull the oor mat o holders2. # Adjust the corresponding seat. # Loosen and remove the remaining oor mats

from the vehicle-speci c securing system, if present.

142 Seats and stowing

Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility

The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and tra c situation.

Light switch

Operating the light switch

1 W Le -hand standing lights 2 X Right-hand standing lights 3 T Parking lights and license plate lamp 4 Automatic driving lights (preferred light

switch position)

5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/o

When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the parking lights will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using su cient

lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations.

* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights

Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the right X

or le W parking light.

If the battery is insu ciently charged, the stand- ing lights or parking lights will be switched o automatically to facilitate the next engine start.

Light and visibility 143

The exterior lighting (except standing and parking lights) will switch o automatically when the driv- er's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting

(/ page 154).

Automatic driving lights function When the vehicle is switched on, the parking lamps, low beam and daytime running lamps are switched on automatically depending on the ambi- ent light.

& WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched o in poor visibility

When the light switch is set to , the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visi- bility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to

L.

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting.

Switching the rear fog lights on or o

Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or posi-

tion. # Press the R button.

Please observe the country-speci c laws on the use of rear fog lamps.

Operating the combination switch for the lights

1 High beam 2 Turn signal light, right 3 High-beam asher 4 Turn signal light, le # Use the combination switch to activate the

desired function.

144 Light and visibility

Switching on high beam # Turn the light switch to the L or

position. # Push the combination switch in the direction

of arrow1. When the high beam is activated, the L indicator lamp for low beam will be deactiva- ted and replaced by the K indicator lamp for high beam.

Switching o high beam # Push the combination switch in the direction

of arrow1 or pull it in the direction of arrow 3.

High-beam asher # Pull the combination switch in the direction of

arrow3.

Turn signal light # To indicate brie y: push the combination

switch brie y to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. The corresponding turn signal light will ash three times.

# To indicate continuously: push the combina- tion switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R A turn signal indicator activated by the

driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand

but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may acti- vate automatically.

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights

Vehicles without MBUX Hyperscreen

Light and visibility 145

Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen

# Press button1. The hazard warning lights will switch on automati- cally if: R The airbag has been deployed.

Adaptive functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT

Intelligent Light System function In this system, the headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation. It also provides extended functions for improved illumination of the road. % The availability of the functions is dependent

on the country. The system comprises the following functions: R Active headlamps (/ page 146) R Cornering light (/ page 147) R Highway mode (/ page 147) R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 147) R Bad weather light (/ page 148) R City lighting (/ page 148) R Topographical compensation (vehicles with

DIGITAL LIGHT) (/ page 148)

The system is active only when it is dark.

Active headlamps function

R The headlamps follow the steering move- ments. R Relevant areas are better illuminated during a

journey.

The functions are active when the low beam is switched on. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance.

146 Light and visibility

Cornering light function

The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direc- tion, enabling better visibility on tight curves, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when the

turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and

43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned

Roundabout and intersection function: the corner- ing light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position. It will remain active until a er the vehicle has le the roundabout or the intersection.

Highway mode function (Canada) Highway mode increases the range and bright- ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility.

The function will be active if a freeway journey is detected by means of: R The vehicle's speed R The multifunction camera R The navigation system

The function is not active in the following cases: R at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h)

Enhanced fog light function (Canada) The enhanced fog light function reduces self- blinding and improves the illumination of the edge of the road.

The function is automatically activated under the following conditions: R At speeds below 43 mph (70 km/h) and when

the rear fog light is switched on.

Light and visibility 147

The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions: R When speeds greater than 62 mph

(100 km/h) are reached. R When the rear fog light is switched o .

Function of the bad weather light (Canada) The bad weather light reduces re ections in rainy conditions by dimming individual areas of the headlamps. The driver and other road users are blinded less as a result.

The city lighting function (Canada) City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function is active in the following cases: R At low speeds R In illuminated parts of urban areas

Function of the topographical compensation Based on map data, the lighting system responds pre-emptively to di erent road heights. This means that the headlamp range remains virtually constant when you are driving on uphill or down- hill gradients.

% Only vehicles with a multimedia system with navigation have this function.

Assistance functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT DIGITAL LIGHT visually expands on the driver assistance systems by projecting the assistant displays in front of the vehicle while it is in motion. DIGITAL LIGHT can therefore help the driver in critical situations. % The availability of the functions is dependent

on the country. The system is active in the following cases: R The light switch is in the position. R The high beam is switched on.

% Depending on the country in which you are currently driving, certain functions may be disabled due to di erent legal requirements, even if they are enabled in the multimedia system. When a border is crossed, the vehicle will automatically adapt to the valid require- ments.

Spotlight

The spotlight function runs in the background and ashes the headlamps at detected persons within

the lane markings in four short bursts. The driver is also made aware of the position of the person by a symbol projection. The function is active under the following condi- tions: R You are driving outside illuminated areas. R The system detects a lane marking.

148 Light and visibility

Notes

If Tra c Sign Assist detects a roadworks zone, the system will provide support as follows: R A corresponding symbol will be projected onto

the road when you enter a roadworks zone.

Observe the system limits of Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 246).

Collision warning

If you fall below the safe distance at speeds of at least 19 mph (30 km/h), a collision warning sym- bol will be projected onto the road. Observe the system limitations of Active Brake Assist (/ page 242).

Lane change warning

During assisted lane changes at speeds of at least 19 mph (30 km/h), the course of the lane change will be brightened. This enables you to identify possible dangers in the new lane at an early stage. Observe the system limitations of Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 239).

Light and visibility 149

Lane keeping and blind spot warning

At speeds of at least 19 mph (30 km/h), a trian- gle that indicates a lane correction and its direc- tion will be projected onto the road in the follow- ing cases: R The lane is le unintentionally.

Observe the system limitations of Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 255). R You switch on the turn signal light while an

object or obstacle is in your blind spot. Observe the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 252).

Switching the Intelligent Light System on/o

Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 DIGITAL LIGHT # Activate or deactivate Dynamic Low Beam.

Activating or deactivating enhanced assistance functions % The availability of the functions is dependent

on the country. % This function is an on-demand feature

(/ page 29). # Select Supporting Projections. # Activate or deactivate the desired projection. # Activate or deactivate Projection when open-

ing/closing. If the locator lighting or the exterior switch-o delay time is activated, a high-resolution greet- ing or farewell scene will be played back for a short period of time when the vehicle is

opened or locked. You can choose between the Digital Rain and Flowing Lines sequences.

% More information on locator lighting (/ page 154) More information on the exterior switch-o delay time (/ page 153)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist function

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap- tive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,

e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late.

150 Light and visibility

In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and tra c con-

ditions carefully and switch o the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and tra c conditions.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam

At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high

beam will switch on automatically.

The high beam will switch o automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is su cient

% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/o

Switching on # Turn the light switch to the position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina-

tion switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the driver display.

Switching o # Switch o the high beam using the combina-

tion switch.

Light and visibility 151

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function (Canada)

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap- tive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,

e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and tra c con-

ditions carefully and switch o the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and tra c condi- tions.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R Partial high beam R High beam R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam

152 Light and visibility

ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the bright- ness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum. Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not blind them but enables full high beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) or when there is su cient street lighting: R The partial high beam and the high beam will

be switched o automatically.

At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high

beam will switch on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial

high beam will switch on automatically.

At speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h): R If no other road users are detected on a

straight road, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial

high beam will switch on automatically.

R If highly re ective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched o auto- matically.

% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/o (Canada)

Switching on # Turn the light switch to the position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina-

tion switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the driver display. When partial high beam or high beam is active, the corresponding blue indica- tor lamp will also light up.

Switching o # Switch o the high beam using the combina-

tion switch.

Switching the daytime running lights on/o

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 DIGITAL LIGHT # Switch the Daytime Running Lights on or o . % In vehicles without DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps,

the daytime running lights can be switched on or o in the Driving Lights menu.

% The availability of the function is dependent on the country.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-o delay time

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/exterior lighting 5 External Lighting Delay # Set the switch-o delay time.

When the vehicle's engine is switched o , the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.

Light and visibility 153

Activating/deactivating the locator lighting

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/Exterior Lighting # Activate or deactivate Locator Lighting.

When the function is activated, the exterior light- ing will light up for 40 seconds a er the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the locator lighting is switched o and automatic driving lights are activated.

Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting

1c Switches the front interior lighting on/o

2u Switches the rear interior lighting on/o 3| Switches automatic interior lighting con-

trol on/o # To switch reading lamps on/o : hold your

hand under the respective reading lamp4 or 5.

Control panel in the rear passenger compartment

1p Reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle

2u Rear interior lighting # To switch reading lamps on: press button1.

The reading lamp, the interior lighting above the rear door and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will light up.

# To switch reading lamps o : press button1 once or twice. A er pressing it once, the interior lighting above the rear door and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out.

154 Light and visibility

A er pressing it twice, the reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out.

# To switch the rear interior lighting on/o : press button2. The reading lamps, the interior lighting above the rear door and the dome lamps on both sides of the vehicle will light up or go out.

Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Comfort 5 Ambient Lighting

Setting the color # Select Color. # Select Monochrome or Multi-color. # Set the desired color or color scheme. Energy Shine R The interactive Energy Shine color world

shows the di erent phases during the journey. Depending on the type of driving condition (speed, boost e ect or recuperation), this is shown in color by the active ambient lighting.

Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness. % Depending on the ambient light, the ambient

lighting will automatically switch between day and night modes.

Activating the brightness for zones # Select Brightness. # Switch o Link Zones .

The Direct, Indirect and Accents zones can be set separately.

% The Light Band zone can also be set in vehi- cles with active ambient lighting.

Activating e ects

& WARNING Risk of an accident despite activated e ects of ambient lighting and active ambient lighting

To use the Warning Assistance e ects, the respective functions must be activated in the driver assist menu.

# Make sure that the functions and assists are switched on.

% Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 217).

# Select Effects. # Activate the desired e ect. % Depending on the vehicle equipment, di erent

e ects are available. Operating feedback e ects R Climate: If changes are made to the tempera-

ture setting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change brie y. R Voice Assistant: For vehicles with active ambi-

ent lighting, the voice assistant is visually ani- mated.

Warning assistance e ects R Warning When Exiting: If an object is detected

in the blind spot while you are getting out of the vehicle, the ambient lighting in the a ec- ted door will ash red.

Light and visibility 155

Further information on the exit warning (/ page 252). R Active Lane Keeping Assist: If there is a warn-

ing from Active Lane Keeping Assist, the active ambient lighting will ash red. Further information on Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 255). R Active Brake Assist: If there is an Active Brake

Assist warning, the active ambient lighting in the center of the cockpit will ash bright red. Further information on the Active Brake Assist (/ page 242). R Active Blind Spot Assist: In vehicles with

active ambient lighting, the ambient lighting on the a ected side will ash red if there is a warning from Active Blind Spot Assist. Further information on the Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 252). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: The information

from the parking sensors during parking maneuver is displayed in color. Further information on Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: (/ page 266)

Greeting R When you get into the vehicle, a special color

animation will play.

Multi-color Animation R The chosen color combination will change at

prede ned intervals.

% In vehicles with active ambient lighting, an animation will be played.

% The desired operating feedback and warning assistance can be activated or deactivated via the symbol. Depending on the equip- ment, di erent operating feedback and warn- ing assistance e ects are available.

% If the brightness is set to a low level, warning animations will be displayed at a higher basic brightness.

Switching the interior lighting switch-o delay time on/o

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/exterior lighting 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch Interior Lighting Delay on or o .

When this function is active, the interior light- ing will light up for a short time a er the vehi- cle is locked.

156 Light and visibility

Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/o

1 g Windshield wipers o 2 Automatic wiping, normal 3 Automatic wiping, frequent 4 Continuous wiping, slow 5 Continuous wiping, fast

# Turn the combination switch to the corre- sponding position 1 - 5.

# Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R Single wipe R Wiping with washer uid

% Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 356).

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch o the windshield wipers

and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement posi- tion # Switch the vehicle on and then o again

immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press the

button on the combination switch for approx- imately three seconds (/ page 157). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

Removing the wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield.

Light and visibility 157

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1 as far as it will go.

# Press release knob2. # Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in

the direction of arrow3.

Installing the wiper blades

# Push the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1 until release knob 2 engages.

# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor- rectly.

# Fold the wiper arms back onto the windshield. # Switch on the vehicle.

# Press the button on the combination switch. The wiper arms will return to their original positions.

# Switch o the vehicle. % Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-

larly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

Maintenance display There is a maintenance display at the tip of the newly mounted wiper blade.

158 Light and visibility

# Remove protective lm1 from the mainte- nance display.

When the color of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.

Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-

cle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular,

adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis- judgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror

The outside mirror on the front passenger side re ects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoul-

der to check the actual distance between you and the road users traveling behind you.

Light and visibility 159

Adjusting the outside mirrors

# Use button2 or4 to select the desired mir- ror.

% In vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant and driver camera, the required outside mirror can also be preselected automatically via a natural head movement to the le or right (/ page 309).

# Use button1 to adjust the position of the selected mirror.

Folding the outside mirrors in/out # Brie y press button3. % If the battery has been disconnected or has

discharged, the outside mirrors must be moved brie y using button3. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

Engaging the outside mirrors If an outside mirror has been forcibly disengaged, proceed as follows. # Press and hold button3.

You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly engage. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.

Automatic anti-glare mirrors function

& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poison- ing due to the anti-glare mirror electrolyte

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is hazardous to health and cau- ses irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electrolyte,

observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte

from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact with

your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, imme-

diately rinse your mouth out thor- oughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.

160 Light and visibility

R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek

medical attention immediately.

The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti- glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sen- sor on the inside rearview mirror.

System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The vehicle is switched o . R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passenger outside mirror parking position function

The parking position makes parking easier.

The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 161). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shi the transmission to another transmis-

sion position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than

9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror on

the driver's side.

Storing the parking position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear

Storing

# Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button2.

# Engage reverse gear. # Move the front-passenger outside mirror into

the desired parking position using button1.

Light and visibility 161

Calling up # Select the front-passenger outside mirror

using button2. # Engage reverse gear.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position.

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror fold- ing function

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing # Switch Automatic Mirror Folding on or o .

Area permeable to radio waves on the wind- shield

Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll systems, can be mounted only on areas1 of the wind- shield that are permeable to radio waves. Areas permeable to radio waves1 are best visi- ble from outside the vehicle when the windshield is illuminated with an external light source. Note this position for vehicles with: R Windshield heating R Infrared re ective windshield

Infrared-re ective windshield function The infrared-re ective windshield is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle interior. The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves.

162 Light and visibility

Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control

An interior air lter in combination with the pre l- ter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level monitoring and the air ltration work cor- rectly. Use lters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Overview of the climate bar for automatic climate control

The indicator lamps indicate that the correspond- ing function is activated.

Front climate bar on the central display in vehicles without a HEPA lter (example)

1 s Increases the temperature 2 Upper display area of the climate bar with the

examples ofj switching climate control on/o (/ page 166) and0 synchroniza- tion function (/ page 169)

3 Defrosts the windshield (/ page 167)

4 Switches the A/C function on/o (/ page 167) or G Fine particle pre lter status display (/ page 166)

5 Switches the rear window heater on/o 6 r Reduces the temperature 7 Depending on vehicle equipment and set-

tings: temperature display, defrost function display, air ow, pre-entry climate control or ECO mode

8 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o (/ page 170, 169)

9 Calls up the air conditioning menu (/ page 166)

A Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 167)

B J Increases the air ow or switches on cli- mate control (/ page 166)

C I Reduces the air ow or switches o cli- mate control(/ page 166)

% The climate bar is visible even when the vehi- cle is parked or the air conditioning is switched o (/ page 166).

Climate control 163

% The availability of individual functions is coun- try and equipment-dependent.

Overview of the climate bar for 3-zone automatic climate control

The indicator lamps indicate that the correspond- ing function is activated.

Front climate bar on the central display in vehicles without a HEPA lter (example)

1 s Increases the temperature 2 Upper display area of the climate bar with the

examples ofj switching o climate con- trol (/ page 166), g switching air-recir- culation mode on/o (/ page 170, 169) and 0 synchronization function (/ page 169)

3 Defrosts the windshield

4 Switches the A/C function on/o (/ page 167) or G Fine particle pre lter status display (/ page 166)

5 Switches the rear window heater on/o 6 Depending on vehicle equipment and set-

tings: temperature display, pre-entry climate control display or Eco mode

7 J Increases the air ow or switches on cli- mate control (/ page 166)

8 r Reduces the temperature 9 Sets climate control to automatic mode,

right (/ page 167) A Calls up the air conditioning menu

(/ page 166) B Sets climate control to automatic mode,

le (/ page 167) C I Reduces the air ow or switches o cli-

mate control(/ page 166)

% The climate bar is visible even when the vehi- cle is parked or the air conditioning is switched o (/ page 166).

164 Climate control

% The availability of individual functions is coun- try and equipment-dependent.

Overview of the rear operating unit

The rear operating unit is available only for vehi- cles with the control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control.

Example: USA 1 Sets air distribution to the center and side air

vents in the rear passenger compartment, le 2 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger

compartment, le 3 Sets the air ow in the rear passenger com-

partment, le , or switches climate control on/o (/ page 166)

4 Switches climate control on/o (/ page 166)

5 Sets the air ow in the rear passenger com- partment, right, or switches climate control on/o (/ page 166)

6 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, right

7 Sets air distribution to the center and side air vents in the rear passenger compartment, right

8 Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, right

9 Sets the air distribution to the rear right foot- well vents

A Synchronization is activated (/ page 169) B Sets the air distribution to the rear le foot-

well vents C Sets rear climate control to automatic mode,

le

The settings for the second row of seats can be con gured via the rear operating unit or the multi- media system (/ page 168) depending on the vehicle's equipment.

Climate control 165

Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/o

Switching on climate control # Set the air ow to level 1 or higher via J on

the climate bar on the central display or # Press , s, r or.

Switching o climate control # Set the air ow to level 0 via I on the cli-

mate bar on the central display or # Pressj. If climate control is switched o , the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control o only brie y. % If the climate control is switched o via j, OFF will be shown on the climate bar.

% When the range maximization function is acti- vated, certain climate control functions are restricted and the window and mirror heaters are switched o . This can lead to windows fogging up and reduced visibility due to

weather conditions. To quickly reactivate the climate control functions, press the but- ton on the climate bar on the central display.

Switching climate control on/o via the rear oper- ating unit

Switching on # Press button4. or # Set the air ow to level 1 or higher using but-

tons3 and5. or # Press buttons2,6,8 orC.

Switching o # Press button4. or # Set the air ow to level 0 using buttons3 and 5.

% If rear climate control is switched o via but- ton4, OFF will be shown on the rear display.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the climate bar

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es the vehicle's interior air. # Press on the climate bar on the central

display. % Switch o the A/C function only brie y; oth-

erwise, the windows may fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a malfunction.

Calling up the air conditioning menu using the cli- mate bar

The air conditioning menu can be called up via the air conditioning line. The air conditioning line is always shown on the lower edge of the central display. # Select the Climate Menu entry in the air con-

ditioning line. The First Row of Seats menu is opened.

166 Climate control

Jumping directly to the Air Quality menu # Select theG particulate pre- lter status

display in the climate bar. The Air Quality menu is opened. An animation of the automatic air cleaning taking place is shown.

% The particulate pre- lter status display is on the home screen next to the temperature dis- play on the right and it informs you of the cur- rent particulate levels inside and outside of the vehicle. The measurement values are shown with the g/m3 units (micrograms per cubic meter).

Defrosting the windshield via the climate bar

Switching on # Press on the climate bar on the central

display.

Switching o # Press , orj on the climate bar

on the central display or

# set the air ow to 0. % When the defrost function is activated, some

functions (e.g. the temperature setting) are automatically deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 First Row of Seats Depending on the external conditions, improved cooling and dehumidi cation of the interior air are supported when the A/C function is activated. If it is not possible to operate the A/C function on the climate bar on the central display, this func- tion can be switched on and o on the climate menu on the central display. # Select A/C (A/C).

Setting climate control to automatic mode via the climate bar

In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior tem- perature is controlled automatically and main- tained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central

display.

% You can increase or reduce the air ow by pressing K on the climate bar on the cen- tral display.

# To switch to manual operation: switch o automatic mode or adjust an aspect of air dis- tribution, e.g. P.

Selecting climate modes via the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 First Row of Seats It is possible to switch between di erent climate modes on the Climate menu.

Climate control 167

If ECO or ECO+ mode is activated, certain climate control functions will be restricted to conserve energy and extend the vehicle's range. The following modes are available on the Climate menu: R Comfort: maximum climate comfort R ECO: while heating and cooling output are

limited, it remains possible to operate climate control without restriction. Activating will automatically switch the system to Com- fort mode. R ECO+: mode using only the blower and waste

heat, if applicable. It does not allow the tem- perature to be set. Activating will auto- matically switch the system to Comfort mode.

% The windows may fog up when ECO mode is activated.

% The lack of dehumidi cation may result in the windows fogging up more severely when ECO + mode is activated.

% ECO+ climate mode can also be switched on and o via the range maximization function. When the range maximization function is

deactivated, the system automatically switches to the last selected climate mode.

% The vehicle's climate control automatically detects seat occupancy. When the system switches to ECO or ECO+ mode, the climate control functions of the unoccupied seats are further restricted. Activating will auto- matically switch the system to Comfort mode.

# Tap on ECO. # Select Comfort, ECO or ECO+.

The selected mode will be shown on the cli- mate bar on the central display.

Setting air distribution using the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu # Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of

Seats. # To set the air distribution: select , P

or O. # Set the air ow.

% When the air conditioning system is switched on, at least one zone is always active. How- ever, several air distribution options can be selected at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the interior and the footwells simultaneously. The windshield air conditioning can only be selected for the rst row of seats. When automatic mode is active, the buttons for setting the air distri- bution are automatically deactivated. When the air conditioning system is switched o , the buttons remain operable and the last set- ting is saved.

Setting rear climate control using the air condi- tioning menu

Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu

Sets the temperature # Select Second Row of Seats. # Set the temperature.

168 Climate control

Setting the air ow # Select Second Row of Seats. # Set the air ow with s or .

Controlling the rear climate control automatically # Select AUTO. % When the defrost function is activated, some

functions (e.g. the temperature setting) are automatically deactivated. To deactivate the defrost function, either press , orj or set the air volume to level 0 (/ page 167).

Switching the synchronization function on/o via the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu Climate control can be set centrally using the syn- chronization function. The driver's settings for temperature, air ow and air distribution will be adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Select First Row of Seats.

# Select SYNC (SYNC).

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside # Press on the climate bar on the central

display. # If the windows remain fogged up: press

on the climate bar on the central display.

Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press on the climate bar on the central

display.

Switching the air-recirculation mode on/o via the air conditioning menu

Requirements: R The control panel for dual-zone automatic cli-

mate control with ne particle pre lter is avail- able.

R The control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control with or without ne particle pre lter is available.

Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 First Row of Seats # Press g on the upper display area of the

climate bar. The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to fresh air mode a er a while. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the

windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only brie y.

% By selecting theG ne particle status dis- play on the climate bar, you can jump directly to the air quality menu.

Climate control 169

Switching air-recirculation mode on/o via the climate bar

Requirements: R The control panel for dual-zone automatic cli-

mate control without ne particle pre lter is available.

# Press g on the climate bar on the central display. The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to fresh air mode a er a while. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the

windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only brie y.

Activating or deactivating ionization via the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality Ionization improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionization of the interior air is odor- less.

# Select Ionization. % The function can only be performed if the

AUTO mode is activated or the air distribution is set to the side air vent. The function is restricted if the side air vent on the driver's side is closed.

Fragrance system

Activating/deactivating the fragrance system using the multimedia system

Requirements: R Automatic climate control is activated. R The glove box is closed.

Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra- grance throughout the vehicle interior from a a- con located in the glove box. # Navigate down until the climate control bar is

active. # Select Air Freshener.

# Activate or deactivate fragrancing.

Setting the fragrance system using the multimedia system

Requirements: R A acon is inserted. R The glove box is closed. R Climate control is activated.

Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra- grance throughout the vehicle interior from a a- con located in the glove box. # Select Fragrance. # Keep pressing until the desired intensity is

reached.

170 Climate control

Inserting or removing the acon of the fragrance system

& WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per- fume

If children open the acon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into con- tact with their eyes. # Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid

perfume has been drunk. # If liquid perfume comes into contact with

your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water.

# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full acons

Full acons must not be disposed of with household waste. #

Full acons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point.

1 Cap 2 Flacon # To insert: slide the acon into the holder as far

as it will go. # To remove: a er opening the glove box, wait

for approximately seven seconds and pull out the acon.

Climate control 171

If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety noti- ces on the perfume packaging. Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume acon when it is empty and do not re ll it.

Re llable acon # Unscrew the cap of the empty acon. # Fill the acon with a maximum of 0.5 . oz.

(15 ml). # Screw the cap back on to the acon.

Always re ll the empty re llable acon with the same perfume. Observe the separate information sheet with the acon.

Information on the windshield heater

& WARNING Risk of burns from touching the windshield when the windshield heater is switched on

The windshield can become very hot when the windshield heater is switched on.

The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be a ected or they may even su er burn-like injuries. # Do not touch the windshield while the

windshield heater is switched on. # Allow the windshield to cool down before

touching it.

The windshield heater will be enabled automati- cally if is activated on the climate bar on the central display. A er the vehicle is started, the windshield heater will be switched on automatically as required. % If the on-board electrical system voltage is

low, the function of the windshield heater may be impaired.

Pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked

Function of pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked The seats can be brie y pre-warmed or pre- cooled before you get into the vehicle. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow- ing functions will be activated as needed during pre-cooling: R Automatic climate control R Blower R Seat ventilation

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow- ing functions will be activated as needed during pre-warming: R Automatic climate control R Blower R Seat heating R Steering wheel heating R Mirror heater R Rear window heater

172 Climate control

R Windshield heater

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow- ing functions will also be adjusted during pre- entry climate control if they have already been switched on during regular vehicle operation: R Fragrancing R Ionization

Setting the pre-entry climate control on the multi- media system when the vehicle is unlocked Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Pre-entry Climate Ctrl. # Activate or deactivate the function.

You can specify for which seat the function should be switched on or o via the seat selection.

Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked

Requirements: R The high-voltage battery is charged su -

ciently. R The function has been activated via the multi-

media system.

# To switch on: unlock the vehicle. The climate control functions are activated for up to ve minutes for pre-heating and pre- cooling.

Pre-entry climate control via unlocking cannot be activated more than three times in succession when the vehicle is switched o . # To switch o : press & on the climate bar

on the central display. The following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started: R Seat heating R Seat ventilation

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow- ing functions will also be adjusted during pre- entry climate control if they have already been switched on during regular vehicle operation: R Fragrancing R Ionization

Pre-entry climate control for departure time

Pre-entry climate control for departure time func- tion

& WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in particu-

lar, unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad- ding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be a ected or they may even su er burn-like injuries.

Climate control 173

# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated a er it has been switched on repeatedly. The air inside the vehicle can be heated, ventila- ted or cooled to the set temperature when the vehicle is parked. When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority is given to charging the high- voltage battery to a speci ed minimum charge. The running time of pre-entry climate control may be reduced under the following conditions: R The vehicle is not connected to power supply

equipment. R The high-voltage battery is not fully charged.

With active pre-entry climate control, the charge level of the high-voltage battery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connec- ted. If present, seat ventilation is activated in cooling and ventilation mode.

If present, the following functions are activated in heating mode: R Seat heating R Steering wheel heating R Mirror heater R Rear window heater R Windshield heater

When the set temperature is changed, the climate control mode will automatically be updated. It will be switched from heating mode to ventilation or cooling mode, from cooling mode to ventilation or heating mode or from ventilation mode to heating or cooling mode. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow- ing functions will also be adjusted during pre- entry climate control if they have already been switched on during regular vehicle operation: R Fragrancing R Ionization

Setting pre-entry climate control for departure time via the climate bar Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Pre-entry Climate Ctrl.

Setting the departure time % The set departure times are used for the vehi-

cle's pre-entry climate control and for predic- tions regarding the approximate state of charge and range at the time selected. Addi- tional information on the charging settings: (/ page 209).

# Select Edit Departure Time. # Select a departure time or set a new depar-

ture time.

Setting the repeat days # Select Edit Departure Time. # Set the desired departure time and select the

corresponding weekdays on which this depar- ture time is to apply.

# Press OK to con rm.

174 Climate control

Selecting seats # Select Driver, Passenger, Rear Left or Rear

Right. Pre-entry climate control will take place for the selected seats.

Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control for departure time

Requirements: R The high-voltage battery is charged su -

ciently. R The function has been activated via the multi-

media system. # To activate: set the departure time

(/ page 174). Pre-entry climate control for departure time switches on a maximum of 55 minutes before the selected departure time. It will remain active for another ve minutes if the departure is delayed.

# To deactivate the pre-entry climate control for departure time early: press & on the cli- mate bar on the central display or switch o

the preselection of the time in the climate menu.

If present, the following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started: R Seat heating R Seat ventilation

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow- ing functions will also be adjusted during pre- entry climate control if they have already been switched on during regular vehicle operation: R Fragrancing R Ionization

Operating immediate pre-entry climate control via the climate bar

& WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life.

# Never leave persons, children in particu- lar, unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad- ding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be a ected or they may even su er burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat

heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated a er it has been switched on repeatedly. Air conditioning of the vehicle interior can con- tinue for up to 50 minutes, e.g. if the journey is interrupted. # Press the & button on the climate bar on

the central display.

Climate control 175

# Set the temperature using the arrows w on the climate bar on the central display.

Air vents

Adjusting the front air vents

& WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants

always maintain a su cient distance from the air vents.

# If necessary, direct the air ow to another area of the vehicle interior.

To guarantee the ow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the fol- lowing: R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in

the vehicle interior clear. R Keep the air inlet grilles free of residue build-

up (/ page 355).

# To open or close the side air vents: hold the outer ring of side air vent1 and turn it to the le or right as far as it will go.

# To open or close the center air vent: move controller2 inwards or outwards as far as it will go.

# To adjust the air ow direction of the side air vents: hold the center of side air vent1 and move it up or down or to the le or right.

# To adjust the air ow direction of the center air vent: hold the controller of center air vent2 and move it up or down or to the le or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents

& WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants

always maintain a su cient distance from the air vents.

# If necessary, direct the air ow to another area of the vehicle interior.

176 Climate control

# To open or close the rear air vents: hold the controller of rear air vent1 and move it inwards or outwards as far as it will go.

# To set the air ow direction of the rear air vents: move controller1 up or down or to the le or right.

# To open or close the side air vents in the rear passenger compartment: hold the controller

of side air vent1 and move it up or down as far as it will go.

# To set the air ow direction of the side air vents: move controller1 up or down or to the le or right.

Climate control 177

Driving Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes on the following topics in the Supplement, otherwise you may fail to recognize dangers. % The availability of certain functions depends

on the equipment and model of the vehicle. R AMG Active Sound R AMG ceramic high-performance composite

brake system R RACE START R AMG adaptive sport suspension system + R AMG steering-wheel buttons

Notes on electric mode

& WARNING Risk of chemical burns and poi- soning from damaged high-voltage battery

If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out.

# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

# Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes o with water and seek medical atten- tion straight away.

& DANGER Risk of explosion from excessive internal pressure of the high-voltage bat- tery

Flammable gas may escape and ignite in the event of a vehicle re. # Stop the charging process immediately

in case of unusual odors, smoke or burn marks.

# Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at a su cient distance.

# Call the re brigade.

Observe the following notes on vehicle noise emissions and the acoustic vehicle warning sys- tem: R The vehicle is equipped with a purely electric

drive system and develops considerably lower stationary and vehicle noise emissions than vehicles with a combustion engine. It is for this reason that the vehicle is equip- ped with a sound generator, which serves as an acoustic vehicle warning system (AVAS). R The sound generator generates speed-depend-

ent vehicle noise emissions when driving forward or backing up at a speed of up to around 25 mph (30 km/h). This helps other road users, particularly pedestrians and cyclists, to hear your vehicle better. R When driving at speeds above 20 mph

(20 km/h) The vehicle acoustic warning sys- tem gradually switches o . R Despite the sound generator, the vehicle still

may not be heard by other road users. Adapt your driving style accordingly.

178 Driving and parking

Manual disconnection of the high-voltage on- board electrical system

& DANGER Risk of death and re due to modi ed and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical sys- tem

The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modi ed and/or damaged compo- nents may cause a re. In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the high- voltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible. # Never make any modi cations to the

high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its

high-voltage on-board electrical system

components have been modi ed or dam- aged.

# Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical sys- tem.

# A er an accident, do not touch any com- ponents of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

# A er an accident, have the vehicle trans- ported away.

# Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop and replaced if necessary.

Requirements: Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electri- cal system manually in the following situations: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights

up in the driver display, e.g. a er an accident. R The vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. a er an

accident, and the restraint system compo- nents have not been triggered.

Operating the high-voltage disconnect device Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electri- cal system manually in the above-mentioned sit- uations. # Switch o the vehicle. # Shi the transmission to position j. # Apply the electric parking brake. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Driving and parking 179

# Remove ap1 of the fuse box in the front passenger footwell.

# Press release tab3 on high-voltage discon- nect device2 in the direction of the arrow and pull it out.

# Pull connector4 in the direction of the arrow until it engages. The high-voltage on-board electrical system is switched o .

All work on the drive system (including a er dis- connecting the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually) may only be carried out by a quali ed specialist workshop.

Switching on the power supply or the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach

of children.

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog-

nized. R The brake pedal is not depressed.

180 Driving and parking

Vehicles with central display Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen

# To switch on the power supply: press button 1 once. You can, for example, activate the windshield wipers.

The power supply is switched o again if the fol- lowing conditions are met: R You open the driver's door.

R You press button1 twice more. # To switch on the vehicle: press button1

twice. Indicator and warning lamps go on in the driv- er's display.

The vehicle is switched o again if one of the fol- lowing conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes

and the transmission is in position j or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button1 once.

Starting the vehicle

Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog-

nized. # Shi the transmission to position j or i. # Depress the brake pedal and press button1

once. R The vehicle is started.

Driving and parking 181

R The display appears in the driver dis- play: the vehicle can be driven.

# If the vehicle does not start: switch o non- essential consumers and press button1 once.

# If the vehicle still does not start and the dis- play message Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual also appears in the driver display: start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 182).

% You can switch o the vehicle while driving. To do this, press button1 for about three sec- onds or by pressing button1 three times within three seconds. The transmission shi s to neutral i automatically. When you press button1 again, the vehicle starts again and you can engage drive position h again. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driv- ing tips" (/ page 183).

Observe any information regarding display mes- sages that can be displayed on the driver display.

Starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message appears in the driver display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.

# Make sure that marked space2 is empty. # Remove SmartKey1 from the key ring. # Place SmartKey1 in marked space2 on

the symbol. The vehicle will start a er a short time.

When you remove SmartKey1 from marked space2, the vehicle can be driven. For fur- ther engine starts however, SmartKey1 must be located in marked space2 on the symbol during the entire journey.

# Have SmartKey1 checked at a quali ed spe- cialist workshop.

If the vehicle does not start: # Place SmartKey1 in marked space2 and

leave it there. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle

using the start/stop button. % You can switch on the power supply or the

vehicle with the start/stop button. Observe any information regarding display mes- sages that can be displayed on the driver display.

Breaking-in notes R In certain driving and driving safety systems,

the sensors adjust automatically while a cer- tain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered or a er repairs. Full sys-

182 Driving and parking

tem e ectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are

either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking e ect and grip a er several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking e ect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Notes on acceleration increase % Acceleration increase is not available for all

models. % This function is an on-demand feature

(/ page 29). With the activation of the function, a higher maxi- mum power is available for the vehicle and the acceleration characteristics are improved. The maximum speed is not changed by this. Due to the increased power, there may be changes in the electric range.

Notes on driving

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the oor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always su cient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose oor mats and do not place oor mats on top of one another.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect footwear

Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers

There is a risk of an accident. # Always wear suitable footwear so that

you can operate the pedals safely.

& WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched o while driving

If you switch o the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may a ect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch o the vehicle while driv-

ing.

Driving and parking 183

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the in uence of alcohol and drugs while driving

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can a ect your re exes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- dent are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or

allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating

If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.

# Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head- room clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be dam- aged. # Observe the signposted headroom clear-

ance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the

permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.

# Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occu-

pied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change. You should bear the following in mind: R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and

towing capacity. Also observe the technical data in the printed Operator's Manual. R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place

heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 119). R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling

away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.

Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking e ect is limited on salt-treated roads. Therefore, observe the following notes: R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and

brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R Maintain a much greater safe distance to the

vehicle in front

184 Driving and parking

To remove salt build-up: R Brake occasionally while paying attention to

the tra c conditions R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end

of the journey and when starting the next jour- ney

Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precipi- tation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R Reduce speed R Avoid tire ruts R Avoid sudden steering movements R Brake carefully

% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 381).

Notes on driving through water on the road sur- face Water which has entered the vehicle can damage the drive system, electrics and transmission. Observe the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the

lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at walking pace at most; water can oth-

erwise enter the vehicle interior. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi-

cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.

The braking e ect of the brakes is reduced a er fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the tra c conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

Function of rear axle steering % This function is available on demand

(/ page 29).

The rear axle steering is an electromechanical auxiliary steering on the rear axle which adjusts the steering of the rear wheels according to the position of the front wheels, depending on the speed. This results in greater maneuverability and improved driving stability, e.g. when cornering. Rear axle steering has the following characteris- tics: R Reduced steering e ort and turning radius

resulting in reduced parking e ort R Improved driving stability, e.g. when cornering R More direct steering resulting in improved

handling of the vehicle

Observe the notes on snow chains and snow chain mode (/ page 382).

Driving and parking 185

ECO display function

The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driv- ing style on the driver display depending on the situation. This enables you to check the e ciency of your driving style and adjust it if necessary. The ECO Display menu shows a ball2 that will roll forwards or backwards on a stylized road in the direction of travel according to the driving charac- teristics. Above and below the road, lines mark the area for an e cient driving style3. Ball2 will light up in green if it is rolling within these lines. Outside the lines, the ball will light up in orange.

The ECO display assesses the following criteria for an economical driving style: R Coasting at the right time R Consistent speed R Moderate acceleration

The overall assessment of your driving style "from start" is indicated using stars1. It starts with ve empty stars, which you can ll one a er the

other if you drive e ciently. When all ve stars are lled, a glow appears in the background. % You can call up the ECO Display function via

the Classic menu (/ page 288).

Recuperative brake system

Function of the recuperative brake system Depending on the selected recuperation level, the electric motors are operated as an alternator when in overrun mode and during braking in order to charge the high-voltage battery while driving. As soon as you release the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is in motion, recuperation in overrun mode is initiated.

The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the vehicle is braked when coasting and the more electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage bat- tery. The regenerative brake system has the following characteristics: R Supports braking with electronically controlled

brake force boosting R Converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into

electric energy

% If you brake hard, the mechanical brake is also used. This means that the maximum recuperative energy cannot be recovered. The more you drive and brake in an anticipatory manner, the more e ciently energy can be recuperated.

System limits The braking e ect of the electric motor during recuperation in overrun mode may be reduced or may not be available at all in the following situa- tions: R When the high-voltage battery condition of

charge increases

186 Driving and parking

R If the high-voltage battery is not yet at a nor- mal operating temperature R When driving at speeds close to zero R In transmission position i R During and a er ESP intervenes

In these cases, the desired deceleration is set by the brake control system. Also brake with the service brake if necessary.

Manually setting recuperative deceleration You can use the steering wheel paddle shi ers to manually adjust the intensity of recuperation in overrun mode.

% When the vehicle is started again, the follow- ing recuperation level is set: R h: if h was selected previ-

ously. R h: if a recuperation level other than

h was selected previously.

The following recuperation levels are available: R h Intelligent and anticipatory recupera-

tion with ECO Assist (/ page 188) R hq No recuperation: the vehicle coasts,

rolls freely R h Normal recuperation R h Increased recuperation: increased

deceleration in overrun mode # To increase recuperation: brie y pull paddle

shi er1. # To reduce recuperation: brie y pull paddle

shi er2. # To select h: pull and hold paddle shi er 1 or2.

The driver's display shows the currently selected recuperation level next to the transmission posi- tion display.

Driving and parking 187

ECO Assist

ECO Assist function ECO Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for you paying attention to your surroundings and does not relieve you of your responsibility pertain- ing to road tra c law. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

& WARNING Risk of accident if ECO Assist does not provide su cient deceleration

ECO Assist only brakes your vehicle when you take your foot o the gas pedal. If vehicles are detected late, e.g. a er tight curves, or if you do not react immediately to the ECO Assist display, the deceleration may not be su cient. # React promptly to the ECO Assist recom-

mendation and take your foot o the gas pedal.

# Adjust your speed to the driving condi- tions and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.

# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.

ECO Assist is active only in h (/ page 187). ECO Assist analyzes data for the vehicle's expec- ted route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, use minimal energy and recuperate as much as possi- ble. If the system has detected an event ahead and the vehicle is approaching the event, ECO Assist calculates the optimized speed pro le based on the distance, speed and available route information. If ECO Assist detects a route event ahead and you release the accelerator pedal, intelligent recuper- ation starts in overrun mode. If ECO Assist has detected a vehicle ahead or a stationary vehicle, it can brake your vehicle to a standstill. This may be the case, for example, at the end of a tra c jam or if the detected vehicle ahead stops in front of you.

If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not su cient, you must also brake with the service brake. At a very low driving speed, e.g. in a parking garage or in play streets, there is no display and thus no adjustment.

1 "Foot o the accelerator" recommendation 2 Route event ahead

% ECO Assist can also be shown in the head-up display.

If a route event that requires an adjustment of your driving style is detected ahead, correspond-

188 Driving and parking

ing symbol2 and the symbol (gray) are displayed. If you release the accelerator pedal, the symbol turns green and recuperation in overrun mode is initiated. The ECO Assist display is hidden again in the fol- lowing cases: R You do not react to the ECO Assist recommen-

dation for a long time. R ECO Assist cannot identify any further recom-

mendations from the route ahead.

The following route events can be detected by ECO Assist, depending on the vehicle equipment: 3 Roundabout 4 S-curve 5 Sharp curve 6 T-intersection 7 Downhill gradient 8 Vehicle in front 9 Speed limit

ECO Assist also reacts to other intersections or junctions if you activate the turn signal indicator in good time. % On roads with a right-hand lane, vehicles driv-

ing in the lane to your le are also recognized as vehicles ahead of you.

To enable ECO Assist to react to a speed limit or to future route events, the speed adaptation func- tions of Active Distance Assist must be active (/ page 235).

System limits If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with

greater accuracy. The basic function is also availa- ble without active route guidance. Not all informa- tion and tra c situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data. % ECO Assist is available a er driving o , as

soon as the sensor check is completed. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient

illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c,

direct sunlight or re ections. R If the windshield is dirty in the vicinity of the

multifunction camera. R If the multifunction camera is fogged up, dam-

aged or obscured. R If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to

dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because they are obscured. R If the digital road map of the navigation sys-

tem has incorrect or outdated information.

Driving and parking 189

R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road- works or in adjacent lanes. R If the radar sensors are dirty or obscured. R When you drive on roads with steep uphill or

downhill gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as

bicycles or motorcycles.

Activating or deactivating ECO Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving # Activate or deactivate the function.

Function of the haptic accelerator pedal

The haptic accelerator pedal features an addi- tional point of resistance to help you drive as e - ciently as possible in the; drive program.

Range maximization

Range maximization function The range maximization function enables a maxi- mum range gain. To achieve this, the function par- tially or completely switches o convenience sys- tems that are not relevant to driving and activates e ciency-enhancing driving functions. The range maximization function controls the restrictions of the following function groups: R Climate control

- Restriction of air-conditioning functions and deactivation of windshield, rear win- dow and mirror heaters

R Interior - Switching o ambient lighting, displays

and certain charging functions R Seating comfort

- Deactivation of the steering wheel heater, seat heating and ventilation and deactiva- tion of the massage function

R ECO drive functions

- Changing to the; drive program, acti- vation of the ECO Assist and the recupera- tion level h

If necessary, you can deactivate the restrictions of individual function groups again. This reduces the maximum range gain by the value speci ed for the function group. If you switch on a deactivated function while range maximization is activated, all restrictions of the corresponding function group are removed and the maximum range gain is reduced accord- ingly. For example, if you switch on the seat heat- ing again, all restrictions of the "Seating comfort " function group are deactivated. If you change the drive program or the recuperation level, the maxi- mum range gain is reduced by the range gain of the ECO drive functions. The speci ed range gain for the ECO driving func- tions can only be achieved if you observe the driv- ing recommendations and instructions displayed and drive without kickdown.

190 Driving and parking

Activating/deactivating range maximization Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 EQ 5 Range # Activate or deactivate Maximum Range.

All function groups concerned are activated or deactivated.

or # Individually activate or deactivate the individ-

ual subsystems of the four function groups Cli- mate Control, Interior, Seat Comfort or ECO Driving Functions.

DYNAMIC SELECT button Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT button

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

You can switch between the drive programs with the DYNAMIC SELECT button (/ page 192).

Depending on the drive program selected, the fol- lowing vehicle characteristics will change: R Drive R Suspension (/ page 258)

- Suspension and damping - Vehicle level (speed-dependent) R Steering R ESP

R Sound of the drive system in the vehicle inte- rior R Pressure point in the haptic accelerator pedal

% In drive program;, an additional pressure point is activated in the haptic accelerator pedal. R 1st pressure point: at approx. 60% pedal

travel (only in;) R 2nd pressure point: transition to kickdown

(always available)

Available drive programs = (Individual) R The following vehicle characteristics are indi-

vidually adjustable: - Drive - Suspension - Steering - ESP

- Sound of the drive system in the vehicle interior

C (Sport) R Sporty and dynamic driving characteristics R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry

road surface and a clear stretch of road

A (Comfort) R Comfortable driving style R Recommended for all road conditions R Best balance between e ciency and perform-

ance for all driving situations

Driving and parking 191

; (Eco) R Economical setting of vehicle functions R Recommended for all road conditions R Additional 1st pressure point in the haptic

accelerator pedal indicates an e cient, eco- nomical driving style

The ESP settings in the drive programs; andA are designed for stability. Therefore, choose one of these driving programs, especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occu- pied.

Selecting the drive program

# Press the DYNAMIC SELECT button1 on the le or right. The drive program selected appears in the driver's display .

Con guring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia sys- tem)

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting drive program I # Select= Individual. # Select and set a category.

Switching the reset display on/o # Activate or deactivate Request at Start. % This function must be activated for each user

pro le separately. The drive program for the respective user pro le of the last driver is only stored if this function is activated.

Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. % The prompt appears only if the previously

active settings deviate from the standard set- tings.

192 Driving and parking

Function o : the next time the vehicle is started theA drive program is set automatically.

Displaying vehicle data

Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Vehicle.

The vehicle data is displayed.

Calling up the fuel consumption indicator

Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Consumption.

The current and average fuel consumption is displayed.

Transmission DIRECT SELECT lever

Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the trans- mission position. The current transmission posi- tion is displayed in the driver's display.

Driving and parking 193

j Park position k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive position

Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT

SELECT lever upwards past the rst point of resistance.

Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT

SELECT lever up or down to the rst point of resistance.

Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.

If you want the transmission to remain in neutral N even if the vehicle is switched o : # Start the vehicle. # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral

i. # Release the brake pedal. # Switch o the vehicle. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the Smart-

Key in the vehicle, the transmission remains in neutral i.

Engaging park position P # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle

(/ page 210). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle

comes to a standstill.

# When the vehicle is stationary, press button j. Park position is only engaged when the trans- mission position display j is shown in the driver's display. If no transmission position dis- play j appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch the vehicle o in transmission posi-

tion h or k. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is

at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position h or k.

% To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while stationary and engage transmission position h or k again.

% If you have engaged park position j or switched o the vehicle and no transmission position display is displayed, secure the vehi- cle from rolling away (/ page 215).

194 Driving and parking

Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT

SELECT lever down past the rst point of resistance.

Function of the 4MATIC The exible all-wheel distribution of the 4MATIC means the drive is always ideally distributed between both axles. Depending on the situation, only the front axle or only the rear axle can be driven, or the drive can be distributed continu- ously between both axles. This means that recuperation can be used even more e ectively and the range of the vehicle can be increased (/ page 186). Together with ESP and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insu cient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or tra c conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for main- taining a safe distance from the vehicle in front,

for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum e ect

of the exible all-wheel distribution can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.

Charging the high-voltage battery Notes on charging the high-voltage battery

* NOTE High-voltage battery damage due to leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of time

Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural self- discharge. Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if the vehicle is idle for several months. This can damage the high-voltage battery. # To avoid damage, please observe the fol-

lowing recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.

* NOTE Accelerated aging of the high-volt- age battery

As a result of its basic characteristics, the storage capacity of, and the amount of energy available from, the high-voltage battery decreases over the course of its life. Due to this, both the maximum electrical range that can be achieved by the vehicle and its maxi- mum electrical output can be impaired. The following factors could accelerate the aging of the high-voltage battery: R Frequently fully charging (charge level

100%) the high-voltage battery, especially when this process is not directly followed by a journey R Frequent rapid charging with direct current

(mode 4) R Leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods

at high ambient temperatures # To avoid accelerated aging, please

observe the following recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.

Driving and parking 195

Recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery: R Every six months, when the outside tempera-

ture is above 50 F (10 C), park the vehicle overnight with a condition of charge below 20%. R Only charge the high-voltage battery with

direct current (mode 4) if necessary. R Charge the high-voltage battery on average to

a condition of charge of 80%. Beyond a condi- tion of charge of 80%, the charging time is considerably prolonged. R If leaving the vehicle idle for extended periods,

park the vehicle with the high-voltage battery condition of charge at between 30% and 50%. Do not keep the high-voltage battery continu- ously connected to power supply equipment. R If leaving the vehicle idle for extended periods

of time avoid, if possible, high ambient tem- peratures. R Check the high-voltage battery's condition of

charge every six weeks (/ page 208).

R Charge the high-voltage battery if the condi- tion of charge is below 20%. R Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the

vehicle is le idle for an extended period. Oth- erwise, the condition of the vehicle's high-volt- age battery cannot be monitored.

You can contribute to reducing the vehicle's energy consumption in the following ways: R An anticipatory driving style (/ page 186) R Reduced use of electrical consumers R Having the vehicle regularly maintained

The charging time of the high-voltage battery may change over the course of its life. You can charge the high-voltage battery with both alternating current (mode 2 or 3) and direct cur- rent (mode 4).

1 Socket for charging with alternating current 2 Socket extension for charging with direct cur-

rent

% When using a CCS (Combined Charging Sys- tem) charging cable to charge with direct cur- rent, both areas of the vehicle socket are cov- ered by the charging cable connector.

196 Driving and parking

Charging options for the high-voltage battery (mode 2, 3 or 4): R Charging through recuperation while the vehi-

cle is in motion R Charging with alternating current when sta-

tionary: - At a mains socket (mode 2) - At a wallbox or charging station (mode 3) R Charging with direct current when stationary:

- At a fast charging station (mode 4)

Depending on the country-speci c vehicle equip- ment and your vehicle's charging cable, single phase AC charging is also possible. Observe the di erent grid requirements of your current location when charging. Only use charging cables which conform to the grid requirements. Consult a quali ed electrician or your local grid operator if you have any questions. It is recommended that you charge the high-volt- age battery at a wallbox or charging station due to the improved charging performance and better charging e ciency o ered.

Stowing the charging cable Always stow the vehicle charging cable in the charging cable bag provided and attach its spring hook to the tie-down eye in the trunk or the cargo compartment. Otherwise, the charging cable is not su ciently secured.

System limits The power output of the high-voltage battery may be impaired by the following: R High or low outside temperatures R Electrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle

being switched on, e.g. operating the air con- ditioning system R Extended periods without charging

The charging time of the high-voltage battery may be increased by the following: R High or low outside temperatures R Extended periods without charging R The maximum available charge current of the

charging facility

R The settings of the charging process in the multimedia system (/ page 209)

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at the mains socket (mode 2)

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incor- rectly installed component parts

Connecting the charging cable to a mains socket using incorrectly installed component parts could cause a re or an electric shock, for example. # Only connect the charging cable to a

mains socket that: R Has been properly installed and R Has been inspected by a quali ed electri-

cian # For safety reasons, only use the charging

cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitabil- ity for high-voltage charging of your vehi-

Driving and parking 197

cle. Purchase these parts at an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center and obtain advice there.

# Never use a damaged charging cable. # Do not use: R Extension cables R Extension reels R Multiple sockets # Never use socket adapters to connect

the charging cable to the mains socket. The only exception being if the adapter has been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-volt- age battery of an electric vehicle.

# Observe the safety notes in the operat- ing instructions for the socket adapter.

Only the following charging cables may be used: R The charging cable supplied with the vehicle. R A charging cable that has been approved for

the vehicle.

The charging process can vary depending on the power supply equipment. Shorter charging times can be achieved in the fol- lowing ways: R Charging at a wallbox. R Charging at a charging station.

When doing so, always observe the local informa- tion. Do not leave the charging cable controls hanging loose from a mains socket. Do not li the controls by the following compo- nent parts: R The charging cable connector. R The mains plug.

When charging, protect the charging cable control element from excessive heat such as direct sun- light. Otherwise, the charging process may be canceled.

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incor- rectly installed component parts

Connecting the charging cable to the vehicle using incorrectly installed components could cause a re or an electric shock, for example. # Only connect the charging cable to a

wallbox if: R The wallbox has been properly installed R The wallbox has been inspected by a quali-

ed electrician R The charging cable is not damaged # Do not extend the charging cable. # Do not use adapters. # Observe the safety notes in the operat-

ing instructions for the wallbox.

198 Driving and parking

& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to dam- aged components

Connecting the charging cable to a charging station using a damaged component part could cause a re or an electric shock, for example. # For charging stations with a preinstalled

charging cable: R Perform a visual check of the charg-

ing station for obvious malfunctions, such as massive damage to the hous- ing or charging cable.

# For charging stations without a preinstal- led charging cable: R For safety reasons, only use charging

cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle. R Never use damaged charging cables. R Do not extend the charging cable. R Do not use adapters.

# Make sure to observe the safety informa- tion on the charging station.

Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card or via Plug & Charge. Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging station and the notes on Mercedes me Charge (see the vehicle's Digital Operator's Manual). The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absor- bed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of di erent levels of charging losses and is descri- bed as recharge e ciency. Charging losses occur, for example, due to heat that builds up when charging or from auxiliary consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge e - ciency can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a fast charging station (mode 4)

& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to dam- aged components

Connecting the charging cable to a charging station using a damaged component part could cause a re or an electric shock, for example. # For charging stations with a preinstalled

charging cable: R Perform a visual check of the charg-

ing station for obvious malfunctions, such as massive damage to the hous- ing or charging cable.

# For charging stations without a preinstal- led charging cable: R For safety reasons, only use charging

cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle. R Never use damaged charging cables. R Do not extend the charging cable.

Driving and parking 199

R Do not use adapters. # Make sure to observe the safety informa-

tion on the charging station.

Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card or via Plug & Charge. Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging station and the notes on Mercedes me Charge (see the vehicle's Digital Operator's Manual). The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absor- bed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of di erent levels of charging losses and is descri- bed as recharge e ciency. Charging losses occur, for example, due to heat that builds up when charging or from auxiliary consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge e - ciency can be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Setting the maximum permissible charging cur- rent for charging at a mains socket

* NOTE Overloading the mains socket due to excessive charging current

If the charging current is too high, the fuse could be tripped or the external mains supply could overheat. # Ensure that the external mains supply

has been designed to handle the charg- ing current provided.

# For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitabil- ity for high-voltage charging of your vehi- cle. Purchase these parts at an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center and obtain advice there.

# Check the maximum charging current using the charging capacity shown in the driver's display.

The charging cable supplied is set to a country- speci c maximum charging current value. When charging abroad, the maximum value may exceed the permitted value for that country. # Before charging at a mains socket, have the

maximum permissible charging current for the relevant mains socket or the building inspec- ted by a quali ed electrician.

# When abroad, observe the country-speci c laws when charging.

If you have questions concerning the charging current or if there is a malfunction, please contact a quali ed specialist workshop.

Overview of the charging cable control panel

The charging cable control panel shows the cur- rent status of the charging process.

200 Driving and parking

1 Supply voltage indicator 2 Charging process indicator 3 Temperature monitor indicator 4 Safety system indicator

Supply voltage indicator1 Display Meaning

Lights up white The supply voltage is connected.

Charging process indicator2 Display Meaning

Flashes green The high-voltage bat- tery is charging.

Temperature control indicator3 Display Meaning

Lights up red The green LED ashes simultaneously: over- temperature the charging performance is reduced. The green LED does not ash: overtemper- ature the charging process is stopped.

Flashes red Overtemperature at the mains plug the charging process is stopped.

Safety system indicator4 Display Meaning

Flashes red Charging cable mal- function cannot carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operat- ing unit.

Lights up red White LED is o : power supply malfunc- tion cannot carry out the charging proc- ess, replace the mains socket. White LED is on: vehi- cle malfunction can- not carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operating unit.

When all four displays light up, the charging cable operating unit performs a self-test.

Driving and parking 201

If temperature monitor3 indicates a malfunc- tion, it may help to protect the charging cable from direct sunlight. To reset the charging cable operating unit: if safety system4 indicates a charging cable mal- function or a vehicle malfunction, rst reset the charging cable operating unit. To do this, discon- nect the charging cable from the vehicle and from the mains socket and wait for approximately ve seconds. If the malfunction persists a er the charging cable is reconnected, charging at the mains socket is not possible. The charging cable must be replaced or the vehicle plug must be checked at a quali ed specialist workshop, depending on the indicator.

Functions of the indicator lamp on the vehicle socket

The socket ap is centrally locked and unlocked together with the vehicle.

The color and signaling of status display1 have the following meanings: Locking status R Lights up white: vehicle socket unlocked;

insert or remove charging cable R Flashes white: disconnection or malfunction

during locking or unlocking

Condition of charge R Lights up blue: charging process completed R Flashes blue: charging; active energy ow R Lights up orange: charging paused R Flashes orange: connection is being estab-

lished R Flashes red (for approx. 90s): malfunction in

vehicle; charging not possible

% Vehicles with active ambient lighting: when the charging sequence is activated, the condi- tion of charge is also accompanied by ambi- ent lighting (/ page 155).

Starting the alternating current charging process (mode 2/3)

& DANGER Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket

The charging process uses high voltage. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock.

202 Driving and parking

# Only use an undamaged charging cable. # Avoid mechanical damage such as crush-

ing, abrading or driving over the cable. # Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced

at a quali ed specialist workshop as soon as possible.

# Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket.

* NOTE Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charging cable con- nector

During the charging process, the charging cable and charging cable connector can heat up within their permissible limit values. The permissible limit values are in uenced by the following factors: R The power supply system and the charging

cable are not damaged R The instructions for handling the charging

cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed

# If the charging cable or charging cable connector becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked.

* NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket ap is open

# Always keep the socket cover and the socket ap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.

# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket ap. This can otherwise result in damage

which may prevent the socket ap from being opened again.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due to incorrect handling

Do not use excessive force (maximum 67.4 lbf (300 N)) to insert the charging cable connec- tor into the vehicle socket to the stop. You

may otherwise damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts. # If you feel there is increased resistance,

pull the charging cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.

Requirements: R The transmission is in position j. R The vehicle is unlocked or the distance

between the SmartKey and the vehicle does not exceed 3 (1 m). R The vehicle has not been started. The

display in the driver's display is o . R The charging cable is not taut.

Driving and parking 203

# Open socket ap1 via the EQ module of the multimedia system (/ page 298).

or # Press the center of the rear section of socket

ap1. Socket ap1 swings open and status display 2 lights up white.

% When the vehicle is started (the display is lit in the driver's display), socket ap1 cannot be opened.

% Only upper connection3 is required for the charging cable connector.

# To charge at a mains socket, insert the mains plug into the mains socket of the external power source as far as it will go.

# Insert the charging cable connector into vehi- cle socket connection3 to the stop. If the wallbox/charging station is not equipped with a charging cable, insert the plug of the vehi- cle's charging cable into the wallbox/charging station socket to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted. Status display2 ashes orange and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged, blue.

% When the charging sequence for the ambient lighting is activated, the ambient lighting lights up for approximately 30 seconds as with sta- tus display2 (/ page 155). When Sound Experience is activated, di erent situations, for example the charging cable

connector being inserted and removed or the beginning of the charging process, is accom- panied by selected sounds. For information on Sound Experience, please refer to the Digi- tal Operator's Manual.

When the charging cable is connected to the vehi- cle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved. At the start of the charging process, the condition of charge display is shown in the driver's display with a charging prediction. The charging predic- tion refers to the time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged. % When the vehicle is switched on, a lightning

symbol appears next to the condition of charge display in the driver's display during the charging process.

% Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process.

% If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the mains supply, the high-volt- age battery will be recharged automatically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).

204 Driving and parking

Ending the alternating current charging process (mode 2/3)

Requirements: R The distance between the SmartKey and the

vehicle does not exceed 3 (1 m).

# Press charging interruption button2. The charging process is ended. Status display 1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.

# Press and hold button3 on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.

% If you cannot remove the charging cable con- nector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, con- tact a quali ed specialist workshop.

% Status display1 indicator lamp remains lit for some time a er charging cable connector has been removed and then goes out.

# Close the socket ap. # Remove the charging cable connector from

the mains socket, or from the socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehi- cle's charging cable safely in the vehicle (/ page 195).

Starting the direct current charging process (mode 4)

& DANGER Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket

The charging process uses high voltage. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock. # Only use an undamaged charging cable. # Avoid mechanical damage such as crush-

ing, abrading or driving over the cable. # Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced

at a quali ed specialist workshop as soon as possible.

# Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket.

Driving and parking 205

* NOTE Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charging cable con- nector

During the charging process, the charging cable and charging cable connector can heat up within their permissible limit values. The permissible limit values are in uenced by the following factors: R The power supply system and the charging

cable are not damaged R The instructions for handling the charging

cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed

# If the charging cable or charging cable connector becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked.

* NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket ap is open

# Always keep the socket cover and the socket ap closed when there is no

charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.

# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket ap. This can otherwise result in damage

which may prevent the socket ap from being opened again.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due to incorrect handling

Do not use excessive force (maximum 67.4 lbf (300 N)) to insert the charging cable connec- tor into the vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts. # If you feel there is increased resistance,

pull the charging cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.

Requirements: R The transmission is in position j.

R The vehicle is unlocked or the distance between the SmartKey and the vehicle does not exceed 3 (1 m). R The vehicle has not been started. The

display in the driver's display is o . R The charging cable is not taut.

# Open socket ap1 via the EQ module of the multimedia system (/ page 298).

206 Driving and parking

or # Press the center of the rear section of socket

ap1. Socket ap1 swings open and status display 2 lights up white.

% When the vehicle is started (the display is lit in the driver's display), socket ap1 cannot be opened.

# Remove socket cover4 from the lower con- nection of vehicle socket3.

% The CCS charging cable connector requires both vehicle socket connections3.

# Insert the charging cable connector into vehi- cle socket3 to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted. Status display2 ashes orange and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged, blue.

% When the charging sequence for the ambient lighting is activated, the ambient lighting lights up for approximately 30 seconds as with sta- tus display2 (/ page 155).

When Sound Experience is activated, di erent situations, for example the charging cable connector being inserted and removed or the beginning of the charging process, are accompanied by selected sounds. For infor- mation on Sound Experience, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual.

When the charging cable is connected to the vehi- cle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved. At the start of the charging process, the condition of charge display is shown in the driver's display with a charging prediction. The charging predic- tion refers to the time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged. % When the vehicle is switched on, a lightning

symbol appears next to the condition of charge display in the driver's display during the charging process.

% Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process.

% If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the mains supply, the high-volt- age battery will be recharged automatically as

needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).

Ending the direct current charging process (mode 4)

Requirements: R The distance between the SmartKey and the

vehicle does not exceed 3 (1 m).

Driving and parking 207

# Press charging interruption button2. The charging process is ended. Status display 1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.

# Press and hold button3 on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.

% If you cannot remove the charging cable con- nector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the pro- cedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a quali ed specialist work- shop.

% Status display1 indicator lamp remains lit for some time a er charging cable connector has been removed and then goes out.

# Insert socket cover4 into the lower vehicle socket connection.

# Close the socket ap.

Function of the condition of charge display in the driver's display % The data shown in the illustration is example

data.

1 Range at current condition of charge 2 Current condition of charge of the high-volt-

age battery 3 Maximum condition of charge (depending on

the setting) 4 Time remaining until completely charged (until

the selected maximum condition of charge is reached)

5 Condition of charge recommended by Range Assistant to reach the next destination

6 Dynamic condition of charge display 7 Current charging capacity

% Speci ed remaining range1 may vary due to di erent factors, e.g. driving style or topogra- phy.

When the vehicle is connected to the mains sup- ply and is switched o , the driver's display shows the condition of charge display for approximately two minutes. % The value of current charging capacity7 can

di er from the display on the charging station. At a charging capacity of 10 kW or higher, the value in the condition of charge display is rounded o and shown without a decimal place.

The value in4 varies depending on the setting of the charging process. It displays the charging pre- diction, e.g. the time at which the selected condi- tion of charge will be reached or the condition of charge at the pre-selected departure time.

208 Driving and parking

Con guring the charging settings

Multimedia system: 4 5 EQ 5 Charging Options

Setting the charging program # Select Home, Work or Standard.

Unlocking the charging cable (mode 3 or 4) When the function is active, the charging cable is unlocked when the maximum charge level is reached. # Select Home or Work. # Activate or deactivate Unlock Charging Cable.

Activating or deactivating location-based charging # Select Charge at Home or Charge at Work. # Activate or deactivate Select Based on Loca-

tion.

When the function is activated, the vehicle's cur- rent position is saved as one of the selected options. When the address is reached again, the charging program is automatically switched over as soon as parking position P is engaged.

Activating or deactivating ECO charging # Activate or deactivate the function.

The ECO Charging function limits the charging voltage at charging stations to conserve the vehi- cle's battery.

Setting the departure time The set departure times are used for the vehicle's pre-entry climate control and for predictions regarding the approximate state of charge and range at the time selected. The charging process always starts immediately, irrespective of the next departure time. # Select Departure Time. The following charging times can be selected: R Individual charging times R One Week Profile

Setting an individual departure time # Select Add New Time and set a new depar-

ture time. or # Select and adapt an existing departure

time.

Setting the repeat days # Select Add New Time and set a new depar-

ture time. # Mark the relevant weekdays for which the

departure time will apply and con rm with a.

or # Select and edit existing repeat days.

Setting a break in the charging process Up to four breaks in the charging process can be set during which the vehicle is not charged, even if it is connected to a charging station. # Select Charging Pauses. # Select Add New Time and then set and save

the times for the beginning and end of the break.

# Activate or deactivate the charging breaks that have been set.

Set charging breaks can be edited with the button or deleted with theE button.

Driving and parking 209

Parking Parking the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insu ciently secured vehi- cle rolling away

If the vehicle is not securely parked su - ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the

front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving.

# Apply the parking brake. # Switch the transmission to position j.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users.

R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach

of children.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it roll- ing away

# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away.

* NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lowering

The vehicle can lower because of temperature di erences or longer non-operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body. # When stopping the vehicle and when

driving o , make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body.

% If you park the vehicle for a long period, observe the following notes: R Make sure the high-voltage battery has a

su cient state of charge, especially at very low outside temperatures. In this way you can avoid any problems when the vehicle is subsequently started. R If possible, avoid parking spaces in direct

sunlight.

Observe the notes on charging the high-volt- age battery (/ page 195).

210 Driving and parking

Vehicles with central display Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen

# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal.

# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving.

# Apply the electric parking brake.

# Engage transmission position j in a station- ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 194).

# Switch o the vehicle by pressing button1. # Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still oper-

ate the side windows and the panoramic slid- ing sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.

Garage door opener

Programming buttons for the garage door opener

& WARNING Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door

When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, per- sons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement.

Driving and parking 211

# Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's move- ment.

Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing feature R Doors which conform to the current U.S.

safety standards

Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.

Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the

garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started.

% The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on.

# Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)

# Press and hold button1,2 or3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp4 ashes yellow.

% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi- cator lamp ashes yellow.

# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp4 continues to ash yellow.

# Point remote control5 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1,2 or3.

# Press and hold button6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp4 lights up green continu-

ously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp4 ashes green. Program-

ming was successful. Additionally, syn- chronization of the rolling code with the door system must be carried out.

# If indicator lamp4 does not light up or ash green: repeat the procedure.

# Release all of the buttons.

212 Driving and parking

% The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.

Synchronizing the rolling code

Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage

door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are

located outside the range of movement of the door.

# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.

# Press previously programmed button1,2 or3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com- pleted.

% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.

Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote

control5 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control5. # Hold remote control5 at various angles from

a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# Hold remote control5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear- view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button6 on remote control5 again before transmission ends.

# Angle the antenna line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote control.

% It is possible that older garage doors cannot be operated using the remote control in the inside rearview mirror even a er you have successfully performed the measures descri-

bed above. If this is the case, contact the HomeLink Hotline.

% Support and additional information on pro- gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink Hotline on

1-800-355-3515 R On the Internet at https://

www.homelink.com/mercedes

Opening or closing the garage door

Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to

operate the door. # Press and hold buttons1,2 or3 until the

door opens or closes. # If indicator lamp4 ashes yellow a er

approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes.

Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons1 and3.

Indicator lamp4 lights up yellow.

Driving and parking 213

# If indicator lamp4 ashes green: release buttons1 and3. The entire memory has been deleted.

Electric parking brake

Function of the electric parking brake (applying automatically)

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children le unattended in the vehicle

If children are le unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. R operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position.

R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach

of children.

The electric parking brake is applied if the trans- mission is in position j and one of the following conditions is ful lled: R The vehicle is switched o . R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat

belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 215).

In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-

tionary.

R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing

the vehicle to a standstill. R In addition, one of the following conditions

must be ful lled: - The vehicle is switched o . - The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the

seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

- There is a system malfunction. - The power supply is insu cient. - The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy

period.

When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.

Function of the electric parking brake (releasing automatically)

The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are ful lled: R The driver's door is closed.

214 Driving and parking

R The vehicle has been started. R The transmission is in position h or k and

you depress the accelerator pedal or you shi from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground. R If the transmission is in position k, the tail-

gate must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat

belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be ful lled: - You shi from transmission position j.

or - You have previously driven at speeds

greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).

When the electric parking brake is released, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out.

Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually

Applying

# Push handle1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica- tor lamp lights up in the driver's display.

% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red F (USA) or ! (Can- ada) indicator lamp is lit continuously.

Releasing # Switch on the vehicle. # Pull handle1.

The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica- tor lamp in the driver's display goes out.

Emergency braking # Press and hold handle1.

As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed and the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp ashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- still, the electric parking brake is applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver display.

Driving and parking 215

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle

If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a noti cation in the multimedia system when you switch the vehicle on. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been

damaged. R The force of the impact.

The following situation can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, for example, in a

two-story garage.

% Disarm the tow-away alarm in order to pre- vent inadvertent activation. If you disarm the tow-away alarm, collision detection will also be deactivated. You can permanently deactivate collision detection via the multimedia system (/ page 216).

% If the battery is severely discharged, the func- tion for detecting a collision on a parked vehi- cle is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start.

System limits Detection may be restricted in the following situa- tions: R The vehicle is damaged without impact, for

example, if an outside mirror is torn o or the paint is damaged by a key R An impact occurs at low speed R The electric parking brake is not applied

Setting collision detection on a parked vehicle

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/Close 5 Vehicle Protection # Activate or deactivate the function via Colli-

sion Notification. % A maximum of three incidents can be regis-

tered. Up to 15 photos are taken for every incident. In the event of another incident, the

photos of the rst incident will be overwritten if they have not been deleted already.

Activating or deactivating the collision photos function Note possible legal restrictions in some countries regarding automatic recording of the vehicle sur- roundings. # Activate or deactivate Take photos.

Transferring the collision photos with the Mercedes me app # Select Upload to Mercedes me. # Select Upload Automatically. # Scan the generated QR code on the central

display with the Mercedes me App. The encrypted collision photos will then be uploaded to Mercedes me.

% Any device that can scan QR codes can be used to view the collision photos in the Mercedes me App.

Copying the collision photos to a USB ash drive # Connect a USB ash drive .

216 Driving and parking

# Select Manage Collision Photos. # Select Copy (USB).

All collision photos are copied to the USB ash drive.

% To ensure secure operation, only use with FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devi- ces.

Deleting collision photos # Select Manage Collision Photos. # Select Delete.

All collision photos will be deleted.

Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneuver- ing the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road tra c law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,

for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the tra c conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these sys- tems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or tra c condi- tions.

Information on vehicle sensors and cameras

Some driving and driving safety systems use cam- eras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.

1 Multifunction camera 2 Cameras in the outside mirrors 3 Front radar 4 Front camera

Driving and parking 217

5 Corner radars 6 Ultrasonic sensors 7 Rear view camera

& WARNING Risk of accident due to restric- ted detection performance of vehicle sen- sors and cameras

If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors or

cameras clear of any obstructions and clean.

# Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 359). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional

license plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or a er an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a quali ed specialist work- shop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the windshield and rear window repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop. % The rear view camera can extend and retract

automatically for the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image in the display.

Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems R ABS (/ page 219) R BAS (/ page 219) R ESP (/ page 220) R ESP Crosswind Assist (/ page 221) R EBD (/ page 221)

R STEER CONTROL R HOLD function (/ page 221) R Hill Start Assist (/ page 223) R Valet service mode (/ page 223) R Beginner driver mode (/ page 224) R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 224) R Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 246) R Tra c light view (/ page 250) R AIRMATIC (/ page 258)

Driving Assistance package % The availability of some functions or sub-func-

tions of the Driving Assistance Package is equipment- or country-speci c. The functions of your Driving Assistance Package may di er from the functions listed here. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, Active Blind Spot Assist, Active Brake Assist, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are also available without the Driv- ing Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality.

218 Driving and parking

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 228) R Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 233) R Route-based speed adaptation (/ page 234) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 242) R Active Steering Assist (/ page 236) R Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 238) R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 239) R Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 235) R Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

(/ page 252) R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 255) R PRE-SAFE Impulse Side (/ page 58)

Parking Package % The availability of individual functions is coun-

try and equipment-dependent. R Rear view camera (/ page 260) R Surround view camera (/ page 262) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 266) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 270)

R Remote Parking Assist (/ page 275) R Memory Parking Assist (country-dependent)

(/ page 282)

Functions of ABS

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, for instance, at maximum full-

stop braking or if there is insu cient tire trac- tion, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road con- ditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

System limits R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 3 mph

(5 km/h). R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a

malfunction has occurred and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously in

the instrument cluster a er the vehicle is star- ted.

Function of BAS

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System)

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. # Depress the brake pedal with full force in

emergency braking situations. ABS pre- vents the wheels from locking.

The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

Driving and parking 219

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Function of ESP

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is deactivated

If you deactivate ESP, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP should only be deactivated in the

following situations.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) can moni- tor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations within physical limits: R When pulling away on wet or slippery roads. R When braking.

R In strong side winds when you are driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).

If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The drive system output is adapted according

to the situation.

ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn- ing lamp lights up continuously on the driver dis- play: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R Vehicles with trailer hitch: Stabilization of the

vehicle/trailer combination is no longer active. R Crosswind Assist is no longer active. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.

% When ESP is deactivated, you are still assis- ted by ESP when braking.

If the ESP warning lamp ashes on the driver display, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current

road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is

necessary when pulling away.

Deactivate ESP in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel.

% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.

If the ESP warning lamp lights up continu- ously, ESP is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 484) R Display messages (/ page 420)

220 Driving and parking

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if they

spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel

or wheels with traction.

In uence of drive programs on ESP

The drive programs enable ESP to adapt to dif- ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP

mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT button (/ page 192).

Function of ESP Crosswind Assist

ESP Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the lane: R ESP Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle

speeds above approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individual

brake application on one side.

Activating/deactivating ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Multimedia system: 4 5 5y

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

# Select ESP.

# Select On or Off.

ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn- ing lamp lights up continuously in the driver dis- play. Observe any information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the driver display.

Function of EBD

Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char- acterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure

on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, espe-

cially on bends.

HOLD function

HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand- still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in tra c.

Driving and parking 221

The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibil- ity for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.

System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a su cient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%.

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle

If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or in

the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by

depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it.

Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on

the driver's side is fastened. R The vehicle has been started. R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva-

ted. R The transmission is in position h, k or i.

Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal, and a er a short

time quickly depress further until the display appears in the driver's display.

# Release the brake pedal.

Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or

# Depress the brake pedal until the display disappears from the driver's display.

The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-

ted. R The transmission is shi ed to position j. R The vehicle is secured with the electric park-

ing brake.

In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's

door is opened. R The vehicle is switched o . R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insu cient.

In addition, the Brake Immediately message may appear in the driver's display and a horn tone may sound at regular intervals.

222 Driving and parking

# Immediately depress the brake pedal rmly until the warning message disappears. The HOLD function is deactivated.

# Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Function of Hill Start Assist

Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions: R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released.

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away

A er a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swi ly move your foot from the brake

pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not

leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.

Valet service mode

Function of the valet service mode In valet service mode, the vehicle acceleration is limited to reduce the risk of damage to and improper use of the vehicle when it is handed over to third parties. Valet service mode is characterized by the follow- ing: R The maximum speed that can be driven is limi-

ted to 50 mph (80 km/h). R Drive programsB and= are not availa-

ble. R ESP cannot be deactivated. R Pro les that are still logged in are logged out

and unprotected pro les are secured.

Activating or deactivating valet service mode

Requirements: R For activation: the vehicle is stationary.

R For deactivation: park position j is engaged.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Apps 5 Valet service mode # Activate or deactivate the function.

If valet service mode is activated, an indicator lamp in the driver's display lights up.

% Alternatively, valet service mode can be acti- vated or deactivated via the Mercedes me connect App. Further information on Mercedes me connect (/ page 339)

% Valet service mode is protected from deacti- vation by third parties only in combination with Mercedes me connect. If the vehicle is connected to Mercedes me connect, only the pro le that activated the mode or the estab- lished main user can deactivate it again.

% Valet service mode remains active even fol- lowing a change of pro le or a er the vehicle is switched on or o , and must be deliberately deactivated by the authorized user.

Driving and parking 223

Beginner driver mode

Function of the beginner driver mode In beginner driver mode, the vehicle acceleration is limited to increase safety for inexperienced drivers. Beginner driver mode is characterized by the fol- lowing: R The maximum speed that can be driven is limi-

ted to 75 mph (120 km/h). R Drive programsB and= are not availa-

ble. R ESP cannot be deactivated.

Activating or deactivating beginner driver mode

Requirements: R For activation: the vehicle is stationary. R For deactivation: park position j is engaged.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Apps 5 Beginner driver mode # Activate or deactivate the function.

If beginner driver mode is activated, an indica- tor lamp in the driver's display lights up.

% Alternatively, beginner driver mode can be activated or deactivated via the Mercedes me connect app. Further information on Mercedes me connect (/ page 339)

% Beginner driver mode is protected from deac- tivation by third parties only in combination with Mercedes me connect. If the vehicle is connected to Mercedes me connect, only the pro le that activated the mode or the estab- lished main user can deactivate it again.

% Beginner driver mode remains active even fol- lowing a change of pro le or a er the vehicle is switched on or o , and must be deliberately deactivated by the authorized user.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function of ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection % The microsleep detection subfunction is only

available in combination with the driver cam- era.

ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto- nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in con- centration on the part of the driver are detected, the system suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-res- ted and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for ade- quate recuperation. You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver

is warned earlier and the attention level detec- ted by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accord- ingly.

If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra- tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the driver's display. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect

224 Driving and parking

increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again a er a minimum of 15 minutes.

The following information is displayed in the driv- er's display: R The length of the journey since the last break R The attention level determined by ATTENTION

ASSIST: - The more segments2 of the circle dis-

played, the higher the detected attention level.

- Fewer segments2 are displayed in the circle as the attention level decreases.

R Microsleep detection1 status:

- Deactivated: display1 is hidden. - Activated but not operational: display1

is gray. - Activated and operational: display1 is

green.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If the system, which uses the driver camera, detects indicators of microsleep, the ATTENTION ASSIST Nodding Off Take a Break! warning mes- sage appears in the driver's display and a warning tone sounds simultaneously. This warning mes- sage must be con rmed by Touch Control. It is recommended that you take a break immediately. If a warning is given in the driver's display, the multimedia system o ers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga- tion to this rest area. If you restart the vehicle, ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection is automatically activated. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.

System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. The microsleep detection function is available at a speed of 12.5 mph (20 km/h) and above. Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approx-

imately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road sur-

face or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high corner-

ing speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis-

tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. R If the clock is set to the incorrect time. R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre-

quently in active driving situations.

Driving and parking 225

Microsleep detection also does not function when the driver camera cannot detect the driver's eyes, for example as a result of the following factors: R The driver's eyes are covered due to the steer-

ing column position, for example. R Poor ambient light. R Some types of eyeglasses or sunglasses. R The driver's line of vision is outside the driver

camera's eld of vision.

Also observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed in the driver's display. The tiredness and alertness assessment of ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection is reset and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations: R You switch o the vehicle. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the

driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 ATTENTION ASSIST

Setting the sensitivity # Tap the current setting. # Select Standard or Sensitive.

Activating/deactivating the microsleep warning # Activate/deactivate Microsleep Warning.

Speed control cruise control

Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal a er overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maximum design speed, or

up to the speed recommended by Range Assis- tant. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 217). MercedesAMG vehicles: Cruise control is availa- ble up to a maximum speed of 155 mph (250 km/h).

Displays in the driver's display Rh (gray): cruise control is selected but not

yet active, or temporarily passive. Rh (green): cruise control is active.

A stored speed appears under theh display and is indicated in the speedometer.

System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Increase recuperation in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the electric motor's braking

226 Driving and parking

e ect to charge the high-voltage battery. This relieves the load on the brake system and pre- vents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situa- tions: R In tra c situations which require frequent

changes of speed, e.g. in heavy tra c, on winding roads R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the

drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R When visibility is poor

Operating cruise control

& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed

If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the tra c situation

before calling up the stored speed.

Requirements: R Cruise control is selected. R ESP must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 15 mph

(20 km/h). R The transmission is in position h.

Steering wheel control panel for cruise control J Adopts the stored/detected speed Deactivates cruise control M Activates cruise control N Deactivates cruise control 1 Control panel to increase/decrease speed

Activating cruise control # PressM.

Driving and parking 227

Activating cruise control # PressM orN on control panel1.

The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.

or # PressJ.

The last stored speed is called up and main- tained by the vehicle. If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.

% When you switch o the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted.

Increasing/decreasing the stored speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards

from the bottom of control panel1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph

(1 km/h). # To decrease the stored speed: swipe down-

wards from the top of control panel1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph

(1 km/h). or

# Brie y pressM orN on control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or decreased to the following values depending on the unit: R mph: the next value ending in 5 R km/h: the next value ending in 0

or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # PressM on control panel1. Adopting a detected speed If cruise control is activated and Tra c Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is displayed in the driver display: # PressJ.

The maximum permissible speed shown by the tra c sign is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed.

Deactivating cruise control # Press.

Deactivating cruise control

# PressN. % If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP inter-

venes, cruise control is deactivated.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free- owing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is maintained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package:

15 mph (20 km/h) - 100 mph (160 km/h) R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

15 mph (20 km/h) - 130 mph (210 km/h)

The adjustable set speed can vary due to the fol- lowing factors: R The stored speed limit (e.g. winter tire limit)

228 Driving and parking

R The maximum speed recommended by range monitoring

Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the

selected drive program (energy-saving, com- fortable or dynamic) (/ page 191) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the

turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

- Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles)

- Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (country- dependent)

% In the DYNAMIC SELECT menu, the driving style of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can be set. Depending on which drive pro- gram is selected, the driving characteristics can be geared towards energy economy, com-

fort or dynamic performance. In the Active Distance Assist menu, the driving style can be permanently set to Comfort or Dynamic (/ page 235).

Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driving Assistance Package: if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving o again within 30 seconds. If a criti- cal situation is detected in the surrounding area when driving o , such as a person in the vehicle path, a visual and acoustic warning is given indi- cating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 217).

Display in the driver display in the Assistance menu

1 Vehicle in front 2 Distance indicator 3 Set speci ed distance

Vehicle detected in front1 is highlighted in green. It may also be in the lane to the le of your vehicle in situations where it is not permitted to overtake on the right, for example on highways.

Permanent status display R (gray): Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC selected but not yet active

Driving and parking 229

R (green speedometer, white vehicle): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speed set R (green): Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC active and vehicle detected

The stored speed is shown under the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedome- ter. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the status display is grayed out. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. When the set speci ed distance is increased or decreased, the display brie y appears under the vehicle in the permanent status display. % On highways or high-speed major roads, the

green vehicle symbol is displayed cycli- cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away.

% If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive

mode. The Suspended message appears in the driver display.

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare,

in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R The windshield in the area of the camera is

dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R In parking garages or on roads with steep

uphill or downhill gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as

bicycles or motorcycles.

In addition, on slippery roads, braking or acceler- ating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.

& WARNING Risk of accident from accelera- tion or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel- erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis-

tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is con-

siderably faster or slower than the cur- rently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no

longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.

# Always carefully observe the tra c con- ditions and be ready to brake at all times.

# Take into account the tra c situation before calling up the stored speed.

230 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insu - cient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceler- ation. If this deceleration is not su cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita-

ble distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take

evasive action.

& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a di erent lane or when

changing lanes

R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta- tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex tra c conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing tra c

As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the tra c conditions

carefully and react accordingly.

Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in position h. R All the doors are closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been

successfully completed. R Snow chain mode is not active (/ page 382).

J Adopts the stored/detected speed Deactivates Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC 1 Increases/decreases the speed K Increases/decreases the speci ed distance H Activates/deactivates Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC

Driving and parking 231

# To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the respective button with only one nger or swipe on the control panel.

Activating/deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # PressH.

Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # To activate without a stored speed: on control

panel1 pressM on the upper section or N on the lower section orJ. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

or # To activate with a stored speed: pressJ.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The last stored speed is called up and main- tained by the vehicle. If the stored speed has been deleted, the cur- rent vehicle speed is stored.

Increasing or reducing the speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards

from the bottom of control panel1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph

(1 km/h). # To decrease the stored speed: swipe down-

wards from the top of control panel1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph

(1 km/h). or # Brie y pressM on the upper section or N on the lower section of control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h).

or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # PressM on the upper section of control

panel1.

Adopting the limit speed shown in the driver's dis- play # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

# PressJ. The limit speed displayed in the driver's dis- play is adopted as the stored speed. The vehi- cle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.

Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

and remove your foot from the brake pedal. # PressJ. or # Depress the accelerator pedal brie y and

rmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.

Reducing or increasing the speci ed distance from the vehicle in front # PressK.

Theh display appears. The speci ed dis- tance is reduced by one level. If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level.

232 Driving and parking

Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat

If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.

# Press. % If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP inter-

venes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.

Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If a change in the speed limit of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed limit is automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 235).

The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the tra c sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permit- ted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the driver display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the tra c sign. If you are driving on German highways and there is no speed limit, the system uses the speed stored for a stretch of road with no speed limit as the set speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on a stretch of road with no speed limit, the rec- ommended speed of 80 mph (130 km/h) is adop- ted. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. The maximum permissible speed does not take the road condition and current weather and tra c conditions into account. Adjust your speed accordingly, when necessary.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 217).

System limits The system limits of Tra c Sign Assist apply to the detection of tra c signs (/ page 246). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maxi- mum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed

The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h)

Driving and parking 233

R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer # Ensure that the driven speed complies

with tra c regulations. # Adjust the driving speed to suit current

tra c and weather conditions.

Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa- ted, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an energy-saving, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restric- tions ahead are taken into account. Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in the multimedia system (/ page 235). The following route events are taken into account: R Curves R Roundabouts

R T-intersections R Turns and exits R Tra c jams ahead (only with Live Tra c )

Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi- cator is switched on and one of the following sit- uations is detected: R Turning o at intersections R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down

lanes

The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, roundabouts and tra c lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill. If a corresponding route event is detected while route guidance is active, the rst speed adjust- ment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is con rmed and further speed adjustment is activa- ted.

Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched o

before the route event and it is therefore assumed that the route event is not relevant to the driver. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or

brake pedal during the process.

System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road tra c regula- tions and driving at a suitable speed. In di cult conditions, the speed selection made by the system may not always be suitable. This applies to the following situations, for example: R Unclear roads R Road narrowing R Varying maximum permissible speeds in indi-

vidual lanes, for example at toll stations R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice

234 Driving and parking

In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation

Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc- tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol- lowing situations: R If the driver does not follow the calculated

route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed

speed limitations # Adapt the speed to the tra c situation.

Setting Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC driving styles

Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-

ted.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving 5 Active Distance Assist

Selecting a driving style # Select DYNAMIC SELECT based , Dynamic or

Comfort.

Setting speed adaptation # Select For curves etc..

When these functions are active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead.

% When one of the following systems is active, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control

R Variable limiter

Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 231).

% Further information on speed adaptation (/ page 234).

Function of Active Stop-and-Go Assist Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you when in traf- fic jams on multi-lane roads with separate road- ways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds and with moderate steering maneu- vers. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist auto- matically maintains a safe distance from the vehi- cle in front and vehicles cutting in. Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 217).

Driving and parking 235

Active Stop-and-Go Assist activates automatically when all of the following conditions are met: R You are in a tra c jam on a freeway or high-

speed major road. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated

and active (/ page 231). R Active Steering Assist is activated and active

(/ page 238). R You are traveling no faster than 35 mph

(60 km/h).

When Active Stop-and-Go Assist is active the status display appears in the driver display.

System limits The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 236).

Active Steering Assist

Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of

moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference. % Depending on the country, in the lower speed

range Active Steering Assist can use the sur- rounding tra c as a reference. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving away from the center of the lane.

If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.

Permanent status display in the driver display Gray: activated and passive Green: activated and active Red, ashing: prompt to the driver to

actively con rm or transition from active to passive status, system limit detected

% During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as enlarged and ashing. Once the system is passive, the

symbol is shown as gray in the driver display.

Contact detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter- vene at any time to correct the course of the vehi- cle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, an optical warning is given rst. Display1 appears in the driver display. If the driver still does

236 Driving and parking

not steer the vehicle, or gives no con rmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable period, an emergency stop is initi- ated (/ page 238). The warning is not issued or is stopped as soon as the system detects that the driver has touched the steering wheel. Touch detection may be limited or inoperative in the following situations: R The driver is wearing gloves. R There is a steering wheel cover on the steering

wheel.

If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 217).

System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor- que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steer-

ing intervention is not su cient to keep the vehi- cle in the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,

fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c,

direct sunlight or re ections. R Insu cient road illumination. R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or

covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. R No, or several, unclear lane markings are pres-

ent for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or intersections. R The lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-

ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too

short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R The road is narrow and winding.

R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers.

The system does not provide assistance in the fol- lowing conditions: R On very tight curves and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At roundabouts or toll stations. R When actively changing lane without switching

on the turn signal indicator. R When the tire pressure is too low.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steer- ing Assist unexpectedly stops functioning

If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehi- cle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering

wheel and observe the tra c carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying attention

to tra c conditions.

Driving and parking 237

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steer- ing Assist unexpectedly intervenes

The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steer- ing interventions. # Steer according to tra c conditions.

Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist

Requirements: R ESP is activated, but is not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-

ted.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving # Select Act. Steering Asst. .

Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist

Depending on vehicle equipment, Active Emer- gency Stop Assist uses touch sensors or detects steering movements when monitoring the steering

wheel. If the system detects that the driver is no longer holding the steering wheel, it can initiate an emergency stop, if necessary. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: the accelerator and brake pedal are monitored as well as the steering wheel. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Active Steering Assist: if Active Steering Assist is deactivated, the accelerator and brake pedal are monitored as well as the steering wheel. A warning is issued when the steering wheel is not being held or when a pedal is not depressed, and the vehicle is in danger of leaving the lane.

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, visual warning1 is issued. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no con r- mation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. Also observe the instructions on the contact detection of Active Steering Assist (/ page 236). Active Emergency Stop Assist issues the following warnings in order: R Display message1 appears in the driver dis-

play. R In addition to display1 a warning tone

sounds. R The Beginning Emergency Stop message

appears in the driver display, a continuous warning tone sounds, the vehicle no longer accelerates, and there is a slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt. R The vehicle speed is reduced in increments

until it is at a standstill. Sharp brake impulses are also produced.

238 Driving and parking

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Active Steering Assist: depending on the country, a lane change to the adjacent right-hand lane is carried out, if possible. % It is only possible to change across one lane

and only into the right-hand lane, and not onto the hard shoulder.

When automatic braking is initiated, Active Dis- tance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Depend- ing on the country, the hazard warning light sys- tem is switched on. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park-

ing brake. R The vehicle is unlocked. R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the

Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.

Before automatic braking is initiated, you can can- cel Active Emergency Stop Assist by steering.

You can cancel the intervention by Active Emer- gency Stop Assist a er automatic braking is initi- ated by one of the following actions: R Accelerating or braking: the emergency stop is

canceled, but the warning message, warning tone and power steering remain active R Steering: power-assisted steering is canceled,

the warning message and warning tone remain active and the vehicle continues to be braked

% Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an emergency stop a maximum of three times within one driving cycle. Subsequently, Active Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are deactivated for that driving cycle.

System limits Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: Active Emergency Stop Assist is inactive in the fol- lowing cases: R Active Lane Keeping Assist has reached a sys-

tem limit. R Active Lane Keeping Assist is not operational

(gray status display) or deactivated (white sta- tus display) (/ page 255).

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Active Steering Assist: if Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect lane markings, Active Emergency Stop Assist is not active. For the detection of vehicles and other obstacles, observe the system limits of the following func- tions: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 228) R Active Steering Assist (/ page 236) R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 239)

Active Lane Change Assist

Function of Active Lane Change Assist Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes and is activated by indicat- ing brie y. For this, the following conditions must be ful lled: R You are on a freeway or high-speed major

road. R The vehicle speed is between approximately

45 mph (70 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h).

Driving and parking 239

R The neighboring lane is separated by a broken lane marking. R No vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adja-

cent lane. R Active Lane Change Assist is selected in the

multimedia system. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active

Steering Assist are switched on and active.

Display in the driver display in the Assistance menu

1 Green arrow: lane change initiated 2 Red arrow: lane change canceled

When Active Lane Change Assist is available, the display appears along with green arrows in the driver display. If the system has been activa- ted but is not currently available, the display

appears along with gray arrows in the driver dis- play. If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adja- cent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins a er the driver has indicated brie y. The lane change is shown to the driver with a ashing green arrow next to the steering wheel symbol. Green arrow1 is dis- played in the appropriate adjacent lane in the Assistance menu in the driver display. The Lane Change to the Left message, for example, also appears. If a lane change is not possible directly a er the driver has activated the turn signal indicator because an obstacle has been detected, for example, the arrow will also ash in green next to the steering wheel symbol and the neigh- boring lane will continue to be monitored. When the lane becomes free, a lane change will be car- ried out and the Lane Change to the Left mes- sage, for example, appears in the driver display. If the green arrows stop ashing, the lane change must be activated again.

240 Driving and parking

Active Lane Change Assist can be canceled in var- ious situations, including the following: R Change in the surrounding conditions (e.g.

detected obstacle). R The driver steers with too much force or in the

opposite direction. R The driver moves the turn signal indicator in

the opposite direction. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active

Steering Assist is deactivated. R The vehicle cannot make the lane change as

planned.

Cancellation of Active Lane Change Assist is dis- played as follows: R The arrow in the selected direction of travel

turns red. R A corresponding message will also appear in

the driver display. R In certain circumstances a warning tone

sounds.

& WARNING Risk of accident when changing lane to an occupied adjacent lane

Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that

the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users.

# Monitor the lane change.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops functioning

If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guaran- tee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque. # Always monitor the lane change and

keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the tra c conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary.

System limits The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 236). The system may also be impaired or may not func- tion in the following situations: R The sensors are damaged, covered or dirty

(/ page 217). R The exterior lighting shows a defect. R The system does not detect a suitable road,

for example, in tight curves. R The vehicle is on a construction site.

% The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven a er the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process, and no arrows are displayed next to the Active Steering Assist symbol.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 217).

Driving and parking 241

Selecting Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving # Select the function.

Active Brake Assist

Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following func- tions: R Collision warning R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and

Active Steering Assist: Evasive Steering Assist

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedes- trians or to reduce the e ects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli- sion, a warning tone sounds and theL dis- tance warning lamp lights up.

In the Assistance menu, an insu cient distance 1 to the vehicle in front is displayed in red. If you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front is also highlighted in red. When the system detects a risk of collision, red radar waves2 appear in front of the vehicle. % Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: depending on the

country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.

% Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warn- ing Support is activated, the Active Brake Assist warning is also accompanied by ambi- ent lighting (/ page 155).

If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warn- ing tone occur simultaneously with the braking application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa- tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak- ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maxi- mum full-stop braking if necessary.

If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, pop up1

242 Driving and parking

appears in the driver display and then automati- cally goes out a er a short time. If the autonomous braking function or the situa- tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant pro- tection (PRE-SAFE) may also be initiated.

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly iden- tify objects and complex tra c situations. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: R Give a warning or brake without reason R Not give a warning or not brake

Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a su ciently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c

situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if neces- sary.

The individual subfunctions are available in the fol- lowing speed ranges:

Collision warning Collision warning can assist you in the following situations from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) with an intermittent warning tone and theL warning lamp. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi- cles, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and cyclists ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph

(70 km/h) when approaching crossing pedes- trians and cyclists.

R At speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists.

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph

(120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi- cles, pedestrians and cyclists. R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph

(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph

(70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists.

Autonomous braking function If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approx- imately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations:

Driving and parking 243

Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and stationary vehicles. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph

(70 km/h) when approaching crossing pedes- trians and cyclists.

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph

(120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi- cles, pedestrians and cyclists. R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph

(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead.

R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists.

Situation-dependent braking assistance If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approx- imately 4 mph (7 km/h), situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene in the following situations. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and stationary vehicles. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph

(70 km/h) when approaching crossing pedes- trians and cyclists. R At speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists.

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph

(120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi- cles, pedestrians and cyclists. R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph

(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph

(70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists.

Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with

kickdown. R Releasing the brake pedal.

244 Driving and parking

Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake applica- tion when one of the following conditions is ful l- led: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle R There is no longer a risk of collision R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of

your vehicle

Reaction to oncoming road users (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Active Brake Assist can also react to detected oncoming road users: R Reaction up to speeds of approximately

62 mph (100 km/h) R Warning for oncoming road users through

acoustic warning and warning lamp R Autonomous braking application in order to

reduce the severity of an accident

Evasive Steering Assist

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva- sive Steering Assist

Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog- nize objects or complex tra c situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not su cient to avoid a collision. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c

situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if neces- sary.

# End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.

# Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.

Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac- teristics: R Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehi-

cles. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if

it detects a swerving maneuver. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement

during a swerving maneuver. R Assistance during swerving and straightening

of the vehicle. R Reaction from a speed of approximately

12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx- imately 68 mph (110 km/h).

The steering support of Evasive Steering Assist can be canceled at any time by counter steering.

System limits Full system performance is not yet available for a short time a er switching on the vehicle or a er driving o . As long as the functions are restricted, the warning lamp can also be shown in the driver display. Depending on the environmental conditions, it may take a few minutes before full system performance is available.

Driving and parking 245

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the func- tions are restricted, e.g. due to activation of another driving system, the display message appears in the driver display. If the system is unavailable due to dirty or dam- aged sensors or due to a malfunction, or if the functions are restricted, the warning lamp appears in the driver display. The system may be impaired or may not function, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare,

in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or

covered. (/ page 217) R If the sensors are impaired due to interference

from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar re ections in a parking garage. R If a loss of tire pressure or a malfunctioning

tire has been detected and displayed. R In complex tra c situations where objects

cannot always be clearly identi ed.

R If pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range. R If road users are hidden by other objects or

are located close to other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist

cannot be distinguished from the background. R If a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as

such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. R On curves with a tight radius.

Setting Active Brake Assist

Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision Avoidance 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting.

Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave

Active Brake Assist activated.

# Select Off. The distance warning function, the autono- mous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist are deactivated. The system is switched on again the next time the vehicle is started.

% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the multi- function display.

Tra c Sign Assist

Function of Tra c Sign Assist % This function is available on demand

(/ page 29). Tra c Sign Assist detects tra c signs with the multifunction camera and compares this with information in the digital navigation map. It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and over- taking restrictions in the driver's display and in the head-up display. The system can issue a warn- ing when you exceed the maximum permissible speed.

246 Driving and parking

In some countries, the system can provide you with further functions and can warn you when you are approaching pedestrian crossings or when you are about to drive past stop signs or red lights unintentionally. The camera also detects and analyzes tra c signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). Tra c Sign Assist portrays only selected signs in the driver's display. Actual tra c signs and speed limits have priority over tra c signs and speed limits shown in the driver's display. Also observe the following information: R Select a speed adapted to the tra c, sur-

roundings and weather conditions R Observe actual tra c signs R Observe applicable tra c rules and regula-

tions

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 217).

Displays in the driver's display

1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction

The system can show up to two tra c signs in the driver's display simultaneously. The system always prioritizes displaying speed limits. Up to one traf- fic sign with a maximum permissible speed can be shown in the head-up display. If two speed signs are shown in the driver's display, for example when speed limits are detected, the value of le - hand speed limit1 is transmitted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC for adoption and is shown in the head-up display.

Examples of tra c signs which can be displayed

Tra c Sign Assist can detect and display following tra c signs1: R Speed limits R End of the speed limit R Overtaking restrictions R Play streets R Recommended speeds

Driving and parking 247

Tra c Sign Assist can detect following additional signs3 and, if necessary, analyze the relevance of the restrictions using other vehicle sensors: R When wet R Slippery road surfaces R In fog R Temporary restrictions R Exits R Restrictions for vehicle/trailer combinations

Tra c Sign Assist also uses data from the digital street map in the navigation system. When you leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on a freeway access or exit road for example, or a er you turn at an intersection, the display in the driv- er's display can thus be updated without a tra c sign having been detected. Depending on vehicle equipment and country, the system can also display speed restrictions up to 550 yds (500 m) ahead in the driver's display and in the head-up display. The driver's display can also show the distance to an upcoming lower limit speed. For this purpose, information from the digi- tal road map of the navigation system is used. The

Assistance menu can also display a dynamic visu- alization of the speed limits ahead. If Tra c Sign Assist cannot determine the cur- rently applicable maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the driver's display:

Tra c Sign Assist is not available in all countries. If the vehicle is in a country where Tra c Sign Assist is not supported, this is displayed continu- ously. % Also observe the information on display mes-

sages in Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 420).

Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can set the warning to visual only (the tra c sign

ashes three times in the driver's display) or vis- ual and acoustic, including a warning tone.

Additional functions of Tra c Sign Assist (coun- try-speci c) Warning for no-entry signs: Tra c Sign Assist can warn you if you drive the wrong way down a sec- tion of road, for example on freeway access roads or one-way streets. Warning at pedestrian crossings: if you approach pedestrian crossings, provided that pedestrians are in the danger zone or are moving towards it, Tra c Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h). Warning at stop signs: Tra c Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) if you are about to drive past a stop sign unintentionally. For this to be possible, the signs must be clear, for example if the system detects more than one stop sign, or a stop sign can be con rmed using the digital navigation map. No warning can be issued if several di erent signs are detected. Warning at red lights: Tra c Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph

248 Driving and parking

(70 km/h) if you are about to drive through a red light unintentionally. The following conditions must be ful lled: R Several tra c lights have been detected. R All tra c lights detected are red. R At least one of the red tra c lights detected is

on the front passenger side beside the vehi- cle's own lane. R The tra c lights are in the following sequence

(from top to bottom): red, yellow, green.

% If the function is available, you can activate or deactivate the warnings at pedestrian cross- ings, stop signs and red lights in the Tra c Sign Assist menu under Further Warnings (/ page 249).

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insu cient illu-

mination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray.

R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, direct sunlight or re ections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc-

tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or covered. R If tra c signs are di cult to detect, e.g.

because they are dirty, covered, faded, cov- ered with ice, damaged, badly positioned, poorly lit or twisted. R Active tra c signs with LED displays may not

be detected correctly or at all due to technical factors, such as transmission frequency. R If the information on the navigation system's

digital map is incorrect, incomplete or out of date. R If signs or the road layout is ambiguous, e.g.

tra c signs in roadworks, at exits and ramps, in neighboring lanes or parallel roads. R If signs do not conform to the standard. R If signs or road layouts are speci c to the

country and deviate from the route guidance in the navigation system, e.g. at or beyond construction sites.

R A er sharp turns and tight curves, when tra c signs are outside the camera's eld of vision. R If you overtake vehicles with tra c signs

which are a xed or attached to them.

Setting Tra c Sign Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist

Activating or deactivating the speed warning # Activate or deactivate Speed Limit Warning.

Activating or deactivating further functions of Traf- fic Sign Assist # Switch Further Warnings or Additional Acous-

tic Warning on or o .

Setting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warn- ing is issued when exceeded. # Set the desired speed under Warning Thresh-

old.

Driving and parking 249

Tra c light view

Information about the tra c light view The tra c light view supports the driver when waiting in front of a red light by displaying the camera image on the central display. The camera image is displayed when the driver is the rst vehi- cle in front of the red light and faded out when the vehicle drives o .

Displaying tra c light view

Requirements: R The Traffic Light View option is switched on. R A tra c light view is available.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Light View % This function is not available in all countries. If the vehicle is in rst position at a tra c light, the camera image with tra c light view is shown on the central display. When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is faded out.

# ActivateD or deactivateE Traffic Light View.

Using other available functions # SelectZ. # Select On Request or Automatic.

If On Request is set and a tra c light view is available, the Tap Here for Traffic Light View message is displayed. The camera image is shown a er con rmation of the message. When Automatic is set, the camera image is automatically displayed when the tra c light view is available.

Tra c Light Information service

& WARNING Risk of an accident or injury due to distraction, incorrect or missing data

The tra c light information display is an aid and cannot replace the observation of the actual driving situation.

# Keep the actual tra c situation con- stantly in view when approaching a traf- fic light and when changing lanes.

# Avoid looking at the Instrument Display and Head-up Display for a long time.

The tra c light icon and countdown of remaining time 1 until the next green phase are shown in the driver display.

Example view on the driver display

The display is hidden about ve seconds before the tra c lights change to green.

250 Driving and parking

% The display also goes out in the following cases: R When turning o before the intersection

into a cross or side street R When turning before the intersection

% The direction arrows are displayed depending on the following functions: R A turn signal is set R A lane is recommended during active

route guidance

If neither function is active, the remaining time until the next green phase for the lane straight ahead is displayed.

% Use of the tra c light information service requires the regular transmission of vehicle positions and driving directions to Mercedes- Benz. The data is immediately anonymized by Mercedes-Benz and forwarded to the provider of the tra c light information service. The vehicle positions and driving directions are deleted a er a very short time (a few sec- onds) and are not permanently saved.

If you do not want to transmit the vehicle positions and driving directions, you have the following options: R You deactivate the service in the

Mercedes me portal. R You have the service deactivated at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. % This tra c light information service is only

available in certain cities and regions. The function is supported under the following con- ditions: R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia sys-

tem featuring navigation and a communication module with an activated, integrated SIM card. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me

Portal. R The vehicle has been connected with the user

account. R The navigation services option is available,

subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The tra c light data service is within the

scope of the navigation service.

The current vehicle position and the direction of travel are transmitted via the communication module and aligned with the data from the tra c light data service provider. The provider gathers data from tra c lights which transmit their chang- ing phases. When the vehicle approaches an inter- section with networked tra c lights, data is trans- mitted to the vehicle. A set turn signal le or right and lane recommen- dations during active route guidance are taken into account for the display. The service is for information purposes only and is not linked to any other vehicle functions, systems or components. Please note that the displayed data is not available in all tra c areas and may be incorrect. Certain light signal systems automatically adapt their switching times to the current tra c situa- tion. This can lead to a sudden change in the countdown display. The driver display is shown a er selecting the Assistancemenu . If another menu is selected, the tra c light countdown is not displayed.

Driving and parking 251

Also observe the following notes: R Select a speed adapted to the tra c, sur-

roundings and weather conditions R Observe actual tra c signs R Observe applicable tra c rules and regula-

tions

Please observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility. You could otherwise fail to rec- ognize dangers.

System limits The display does not appear in the following situa- tions, for example: R There is no tra c light data available. R The time remaining until the next green phase

is less than ten seconds. R Emergency vehicles or local public transport

are located in the vicinity of the intersection. R The data transmission from the vehicle has

been interrupted. R Light signal systems are located in a construc-

tion site area or are being maintained.

R The light signal system is malfunctioning. R The subscription to the service has expired.

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist

Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 (40 m) behind and 10 (3 m) next to your vehicle. The system can detect vehicles traveling from speeds of approximately 8 mph (12 km/h) and issue a warning if they move into the monitoring range. Status display in the driver display Gray: the system is activated but inopera-

tive. Green: the system is activated and opera-

tional.

Driver display in the Assistance menu

If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx- imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle enters the monitoring range immediately a erwards, the warning lamp in the corresponding outside mirror lights up red. In the Assistance menu, the lamp in outside mirror1 also lights up red, and the lane in which the vehicle is detected is hatched out. If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds once and the warning lamp ashes red in the corresponding outside mirror. Red radar

252 Driving and parking

waves2 are displayed next to your vehicle in the assistance graphic. If the turn signal indicator remains on, the display in the outside mirror ashes for all other detected vehicles, but no further warning tone sounds. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 217).

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist

Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly di erent speed. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c

situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.

Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants attempting to leave a sta- tionary vehicle about approaching vehicles.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning

The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly di ering speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the

tra c situation when opening the doors and make sure there is su cient clear- ance.

If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up in the correspond- ing outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant pulls the door handle on the side of the warning, a warning tone sounds twice and the ambient lighting in the respective door

and the warning lamps in the corresponding out- side mirror ash red. Vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant: the visual warning begins as soon as the hand of a vehicle occupant moves in to the area of the door. % Vehicles with ambient lighting: the Warning

Support of the ambient lighting can be activa- ted and deactivated (/ page 155).

% The warning assistance can di er depending on the equipment and may vary according to the setting.

The exit warning is only available when Blind Spot Assist is activated and up to a maximum of three minutes a er the vehicle has been switched o . The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror ashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi- tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi- cle occupants.

Driving and parking 253

System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in particular: R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured R In poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or

snow R If there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or

motorbikes R If the road has very wide or narrow lanes R If vehicles are not driving in the middle of their

lane

Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is su cient distance to the side for other tra c or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving along- side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro- longed time. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are not operational when reverse gear is engaged.

Additionally, the exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R When the sensors are covered by adjacent

vehicles in narrow parking spaces R When people approach the vehicle R In the event of stationary or slowly moving

objects

Function of the brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist % The brake application function is only availa-

ble for vehicles with a Driving Assistance Package.

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correct- ing brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa- ble in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h).

& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist

A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your-

self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application.

# Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist

Active Blind Spot Assist does not react in the following situations: R If you overtake vehicles at a high speed. R If vehicles approach and overtake you at a

greatly di erent speed.

Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings or intervene in such situations.

254 Driving and parking

# Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp ashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, display 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the driver's display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro- priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

System limits Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur especially in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are

located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate signi cantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP

or Active Brake Assist. R ESP is deactivated. R A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is detec-

ted.

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision Avoidance # Select Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot

Assist. # Select On or Off.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction camera (/ page 217) and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. The system can guide you back into your lane through a course-correcting steering intervention and addi- tionally warns you with vibration pulses in the steering wheel. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h).

Driving and parking 255

The system can intervene in the following situa- tions: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane

marking. R One of your front wheels goes over a lane

marking.

If you activate the turn signal indicator, a steering intervention does not occur on the corresponding side. If you leave the lane without activating the turn signal indicator, but danger of a collision with a moving obstacle is detected in your lane, a steer- ing intervention does not occur. Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Driving Assis- tance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, a steering intervention will occur regardless of the turn signal indicator.

Display1 will appear in the driver display and a warning tone will sound in the following situations: R A steering intervention by Active Lane Keeping

Assist lasts longer than approximately ten sec- onds. R The system carries out two or more steering

interventions within approximately three minutes without any steering intervention from the driver.

In the Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, you can set the sensitivity of the system and set the level of support. Additionally, you can set whether the system should react to discontinuous lane

markings or only continuous lane markings (/ page 258).

Status displays for Active Lane Keeping Assist White: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deac-

tivated. Yellow: there is a malfunction. Please also

observe the display messages. Gray: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activa-

ted, but not operating. Green: Active Lane Keeping Assist is acti-

vated and operating. If the system is operational on only one side, the lane marking is shown in green on the corre- sponding side.

Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has gui- ded you back into your lane with a course- correcting steering intervention. The sta- tus display will ash if there is also a hap- tic warning in the steering wheel. The lane marking is shown in red only on the side for which there is a warning. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack- age: if both lane markings are simultane-

256 Driving and parking

ously shown in red in the status display, Active Lane Keeping Assist has initiated an emergency stop (/ page 238).

Active Lane Change Assist display in the "Assis- tance" menu

If the front wheel of the vehicle drives over a detected lane marking, this will be highlighted red in the Assistance menu in the driver display. % Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warn-

ing Support is activated, the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning is also accompanied by ambient lighting (/ page 155).

System limits In the following situations, no lane-correcting steering intervention occurs but rather a warning in the steering wheel, depending on the situation: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-

erate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as

ESP, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates of acceler- ation. R When ESP is deactivated. R If transport equipment, for example a trailer or

bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been cor- rectly established. R If a loss of tire pressure or a malfunctioning

tire has been detected and displayed.

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient

illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, the

sun or re ections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc-

tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or covered. R If there is dirt on the bumper in the area of the

radar sensors, or if they are damaged or cov- ered. R If there are no lane markings, or several

unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov-

ered. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too

short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes

branch o , cross one another or merge.

Driving and parking 257

R If the road is very narrow and winding.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 217).

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Switch the function on or o .

Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be activated and deactivated via quick-access. % A er starting the vehicle, the settings are

country-speci c.

Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist

Setting the sensitivity # SelectZ. # Select Early, Med. or Late.

The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started. % The standard setting for this function is

dependent on the country.

Activating or deactivating assistance on discontin- uous lane markings # Select Advanced Support.

The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started. % The standard setting for this function is

dependent on the country.

% This function must be activated in vehicles without Driving Assistance Package, so that Emergency Stop Assist is fully available. Further information on Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 238)

AIRMATIC

Function of AIRMATIC AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with varia- ble damping for improved driving comfort. The all- round level control system ensures the best possi- ble suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce energy consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level. AIRMATIC includes the following components and functions: R Air suspension with automatic all-round level

control R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with

constant damping force adjustment)

258 Driving and parking

R A comfortable suspension setting in drive pro- gramsA and; R A rmer, sporty suspension setting in drive

programC R Lowering the vehicle above 75 mph

(120 km/h) in order to reduce energy con- sumption When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to the normal level. R Increased vehicle level for greater ground

clearance, selected via the multimedia system

Setting the vehicle level

& WARNING Risk of accident because vehi- cle level is too high

Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can dri outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. # Choose a vehicle level which is suited to

the driving style and the road surface conditions.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi- cle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the

vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle rst rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly a erwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered a er being locked.

# When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

* NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering

Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered. # Make sure that there are no obstacles

such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.

Requirements: R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle is not moving faster than 25 mph

(40 km/h). R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/

bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h).

Driving and parking 259

Multimedia system: 4 5 5y

Raising the vehicle # Select .

The indicator lamp lights up continuously. The vehicle is raised to high level +1.

Your selection is saved. High level +1 set remains stored even a er the vehicle has been switched o . The vehicle is lowered again in the following situa- tions: R When driving faster than 31 mph (50 km/h). R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/

bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h).

GPS-based raising If the function is activated, it is possible to save the vehicle position when the vehicle level is raised. # Con rm the prompt.

The position of the vehicle is stored. When the previously stored position is reached again, a

prompt appears in the Zero Layer as to whether the vehicle level should be raised again.

% Settings for GPS-based raising (/ page 260)

Lowering the vehicle # Select .

The indicator lamp goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the normal level.

% Use the normal level in trailer operation. High level driving is not permitted in trailer opera- tion on public roads.

Setting GPS-based raising of the vehicle Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 5 GPS-based Raising # Select Store Positions on Request, Always

Save Positions or Delete All Saved Positions.

Rear view camera

Function of the rear view camera The rear view camera monitors the area behind your vehicle. When you engage reverse gear, the image from the rear view camera is automatically shown in the central display. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and park- ing remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuver- ing area while maneuvering and parking. % The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a

mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.

260 Driving and parking

Camera Views menu (top view) 1 Parking Assistance menu 2 Rear view camera with top view 3 Wide-angle view 4 Activates/deactivates Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC (/ page 269) 5 Warning display of Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC (/ page 266)

6 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 (0.5 m), 3.3 (1.0 m), 5 (1.5 m) and 9.9 (3.0 m) from the rear area

7 Path marking the course the tires will take with the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

8 Driven surface depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

9 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 (0.3 m) from the rear area

% When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes7 are displayed in green (/ page 270).

Wide-angle view

System limits If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys- tem Inoperative message appears in the central display.

Driving and parking 261

The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater

than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). R The tailgate is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy

rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at

night or if light is shining into the camera. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fogged

up. Observe the notes on cleaning the rear view camera (/ page 359). R The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam-

aged. In this case, have the camera and its position and setting checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. R The detection range is limited by additional

vehicle attachments at the rear, such as a license plate bracket or bicycle rack.

Also observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 217). % Do not use the rear view camera in these

types of situations. You could otherwise injure

others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

% The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

360 camera

Function of the surround view camera The surround view camera is a system that con- sists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The cameras assist you when you are parking, for example, or at exits with reduced visibility. The surround view camera includes the following cameras and evaluates their images: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors

The cameras are only an aid and may show a dis- torted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsi- bility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking.

262 Driving and parking

Menu overview Camera Views

1 Menu Parking Assistance 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with image from the rear view cam-

era 4 3D view, le -hand side of the vehicle 5 3D view, right-hand side of the vehicle 6 3D auto view

7 To activate/deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 269)

8 To set the GPS activation point (/ page 266) 9 To switch between standard and wide-angle

view

% In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is shown (/ page 266).

Function of the guide lines

1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 (0.5 m), 3.3 (1.0 m), 5 (1.5 m) and 9.9 (3.0 m) from the rear area

2 Path marking the course the tires will take with the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

3 Driven surface depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 (0.3 m) from the rear area

Driving and parking 263

% When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes and guide lines are displayed in green instead of yellow (/ page 270).

Top view with image from the front or rear view camera If you have activated the function, the image from the rear view camera is automatically displayed on the central display when reverse gear is selected .

1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 266)

2 Your vehicle from above 3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take

at the current steering angle

3D view, le /right-hand side of the vehicle

* NOTE Risk of accident due to objects being severely distorted in the display or not displayed at all

Due to the projection of the cameras, objects in the 3D views may be severely distorted when displayed or not displayed at all. # Make sure that there are no persons,

animals or objects etc. in the maneuver- ing area while maneuvering and parking.

1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 266)

In the 3D view, le -/right-hand side of the vehi- cle, the virtual camera moves to the respective side of the vehicle. When you change the trans- mission position, the view is automatically adap- ted.

3D auto view % The area behind the vehicle is not displayed

as a mirror image as is usual in the 3D views.

1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 266)

2 Guide lines

In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to the standard perspective, facing forward from the

264 Driving and parking

rear above the roof. The view changes automati- cally when approaching obstacles. If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to 3D view with free rotation. You can turn, tilt and zoom the views by touch.

Wide-angle view

1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 266)

2 To switch between standard and wide-angle view

System limits If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys- tem Inoperative message appears on the central display. The surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater

than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). R The doors are open. R An outside mirror is not completely folded out. R The tailgate is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy

rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at

night or if light is shining into the camera. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fogged

up. R If cameras or vehicle components in which the

cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

% Do not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. The eld of vision and other functions of the cam- era system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket, bicycle rack). % The contrast of the display may be impaired

by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

See the notes on cleaning the surround view cam- era (/ page 359).

Driving and parking 265

Calling up the surround view camera views using the button

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button 1 may also be located at a di erent position in the center console.

# Press button1. # Select the Camera Views menu.

# In the multimedia system, select the desired view (/ page 262).

Selecting a view for the surround view camera (reverse gear) # Engage reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia sys-

tem (/ page 262).

Surround view camera with GPS - managing acti- vation positions Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera

Renaming an activation position % You can determine activation positions in the

Camera Views menu. (/ page 262) # Select an activation position. # Select. # Enter a name and con rm.

The activation position is saved under the new name.

Deleting an activation position # Select Manage Activation Positions. # Select an activation position. # SelectE. # Con rm the prompt.

The activation position is deleted.

Opening the camera cover of the reversing cam- era Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera # Select Open Camera Cover. % The camera cover closes automatically a er

some time or a er the vehicle is switched on or o .

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic park- ing assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the dis-

266 Driving and parking

tance between the vehicle and a detected obsta- cle visually and audibly. The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. These must be detected beforehand by the sensors in the front or rear bumper while driving by them. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. The pas- sive side impact protection can be activated and deactivated via the multimedia system. In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must rst travel a dis- tance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be shown. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surround- ings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneu- vering area while maneuvering and parking in/ exiting parking spaces.

Displays in the central display

Vehicles with surround view camera

Vehicles with rear view camera

As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera- tional, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue. 1 Operational, front and rear 2 Operational, all around 3 Operational, all around and obstacle detected

The color of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: > 3.3 (1 m) (no obstacles detected) R Yellow: approx. 3.3 (1 m) - 2.2 (0.7 m) R Orange: approx. 2.2 (0.7 m) - 1.2 (0.4 m) R Red: < 1.2 (0.4 m)

Vehicles with surround view camera: the boun- dary line shi s dynamically depending on the position and distance of the obstacles detected. Depending on the distance to the obstacle detec- ted, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multime- dia system. In the Warn Early setting, the system warns you from a distance of 3.3 (1 m), in the standard setting only from 1.2 (0.4 m).

Driving and parking 267

Vehicles with surround view camera Vehicles with rear view camera

If you are not in the Camera & Parking menu and an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected, pop- up window1 appears in the driver's display: R Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: when

driving no faster than 8 mph (12 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when driv-

ing no faster than 11 mph (18 km/h).

Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 3.3 (1.0 m) in front2 and 2.2 (0.7 m) on sides3 can also be displayed in the head-up dis- play.

Vehicles with active ambient lighting and Parking Package with remote parking functions When Warning Support is activated, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display is also accompanied by ambient lighting. If an obstacle is detected, the ambient lighting lights up in the same color as the display in the central display. The ambient lighting which accompanies the Park- ing Assist PARKTRONIC display is only intended to

268 Driving and parking

accentuate the display in the central display and does not replace it. More information on ambient lighting: (/ page 155) % A display message for the ambient lighting

does not occur in the area of the driver's dis- play or in the rear passenger compartment.

% Depending on the selected setting, other functions may supersede the ambient lighting e ects of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. In this case, the ambient lighting e ects of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC do not occur.

System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. per-

sons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.

overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks. R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehi-

cle from the side. R Objects placed next to the vehicle.

Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the fol- lowing situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch it o . R You open the doors.

A er the engine is restarted, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a new warning can be issued. Also observe the system limits of the following systems: R Rear view camera (/ page 260) R Surround view camera (/ page 262)

Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; the system otherwise cannot function properly (/ page 217).

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds then goes out, and the symbol appears in the driver's display, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is work- ing at a di erent location.

If a warning tone also sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and

observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 359). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deacti-

vated due to a malfunction: restart the vehi- cle. If the problem persists, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi-

cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. ower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could other- wise be damaged.

Driving and parking 269

Requirements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears. # Press= in the central display.

If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not lit or the symbol appears in the instrument cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically

activated when the vehicle is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.

Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking

Setting the volume or pitch of the warning tones # Set the desired level under Volume or Tone

Pitch.

Activating/deactivating audio fadeout # Select Audio Fadeout.

The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced during a Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tone.

or # Switch Audio Fadeout When in R on or o .

The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced when reverse gear is engaged.

Setting the time of the warnings # Select Time of Warning. # Set the time for the warning.

Active Parking Assist

Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the rear view camera and sur- round view camera. When you are driving for- wards up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist o ers the following func- tions: Vehicles with rear view camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Backing up into parking spaces perpendicular

to the road

Vehicles with surround view camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the

road (optionally either forwards or reverse) R Parking in parking spaces that can only be

detected as such due to markings (for exam- ple at the roadside)

270 Driving and parking

R Exiting a parking space parallel to the road R Exiting a parking space perpendicular to the

road (optionally either le or right)

Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub- stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, ani- mals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. If Active Parking Assist is available, the mes- sage appears in the driver display. When the sys- tem detects parking spaces, appears. The arrows show on which side of the road free park- ing spaces are located. These are then shown on the central display. When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the calcu- lated path of your vehicle. When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the procedure is assis- ted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes. To start the parking procedure, press thec button (/ page 272).

Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the fol- lowing situations: R You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. R You press thec button again. R You begin steering. R You engage transmission position j. R ESP intervenes. R You open the driver's door.

System limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available. Also observe the system limits of the following systems: R Rear view camera (/ page 260) R Surround view camera (/ page 262)

Objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist, such as overhang- ing loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calcu- lating the parking procedure. In some circumstan-

ces, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely or brake too late. Certain environmental conditions, such as snow- fall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identi ed as such or be measured incor- rectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detec- tion range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these

objects.

There is a danger of collision! # In these situations, do not use Active

Parking Assist.

Driving and parking 271

Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable parking spaces, e.g. parking spaces in which parking is not permitted or parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,

packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes

beyond the vehicle. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or

uphill gradient. R When snow chains are installed. R Directly a er a tire change or when spare tires

are installed. R If the tire pressure is too low or too high. R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. a er

bottoming out on a curb. R On steep inclines of more than approximately

15%.

Parking with Active Parking Assist

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button 1 may also be located at a di erent position in the center console.

# Press button1.

# Select Parking Assistance menu2.

Parking spaces3 detected by the system are shown in the central display.

272 Driving and parking

When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle path4 into currently selected parking space5 also appears. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi-

cle. # If necessary, select another parking space.

# Vehicles with surround view camera: to change the parking direction, tap the selected parking space again.

# To start the parking procedure: press button 1 again. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.

The turn signal indicator is switched on automati- cally when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c conditions. If neces- sary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road

users.

# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

On completion of the parking procedure, the Active Parking Assist Finished display message appears. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When

required by legal requirements or local condi- tions: turn the wheels towards the curb.

% You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro- cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa- ble, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be canceled.

Driving and parking 273

Immediate parking via the Camera Views menu

# Select the Camera Views menu. # When the vehicle is stationary and in transmis-

sion position k, and symbol6 appears in the camera image: press button1 again. The parking procedure is initiated for the detected parking space.

% The parking space and parking direction can- not be changed in immediate parking.

% This function can be deactivated in the Park- ing menu.

Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist

Requirements: R The vehicle is equipped with a surround view

camera. R The vehicle has been parked with Active Park-

ing Assist. # Start the vehicle. # Press button1.

# Select Parking Assistance menu2. # If necessary, change direction of exit3. # To start exiting the parking space: press but-

ton1 again. # If necessary, change the transmission posi-

tion. Observe any messages displayed in the driver display and central display. The vehicle moves out of the parking space.

274 Driving and parking

The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when exiting a parking space begins and switched o when it is completed. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c conditions. If neces- sary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. A er the parking space has been exited, a warn- ing tone and the Active Parking Assist Fin- ished: Take Control of Vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again. If you do not react to the prompt to take control of the vehicle, the system will brake the vehicle to a standstill.

Pausing Active Parking Assist You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the following actions, for example: # Depressing the brake pedal # Opening the front passenger door, a rear door

or the cargo compartment

# Applying the electric parking brake or activat- ing the HOLD function

# To resume the parking or exiting procedure: gently depress the accelerator pedal.

% If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start the parking or exiting procedure.

Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist.

Automatic braking function of Active Parking Assist Persons or objects detected in the maneuvering range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exit- ing procedure is resumed. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no lon-

ger in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist.

Remote Parking Assist

Function of Remote Parking Assist % Remote Parking Assist is an additional func-

tion of Active Parking Assist. Comply with local tra c laws and regulations when using Remote Parking Assist on public roads. If it is required to turn the wheels toward the curb, you cannot use Remote Parking Assist. Please note that you can only use Remote Parking Assist if you have a valid driving license and are in a t state to drive.

Remote Parking Assist parks your vehicle or exits the parking space while you are outside of your vehicle. You can monitor the maneuvering and parking procedure on your mobile phone. With Remote Parking Assist, you can carry out all the parking procedures of Active Parking Assist. You can also position the vehicle directly in front of a garage or a driveway entrance and then use Remote Parking Assist to enter or exit a parking space.

Driving and parking 275

Remote Parking Assist manages pulling away, braking and steering. While Remote Parking Assist is active, the vehicle is locked. Remote Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and park- ing remains with you. Interrupt or terminate the parking procedure if necessary. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneu- vering range. Make sure to also pay attention to other vehicles.

System limits If the system detects a malfunction or a system limit during the maneuvering or parking proce- dure, the procedure will be canceled: R The vehicle is brought to a standstill. R Transmission position j is selected and the

electric parking brake is applied automatically. R The vehicle is switched o . R The vehicle remains locked.

If the parking maneuver is canceled, a corre- sponding message is displayed on the mobile phone.

Depending on the situation, you can then take control of the procedure, maneuver the vehicle back to the starting position or manually take con- trol of the vehicle. The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 270). Certain environmental conditions, such as snow- fall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately or to connection problems with the mobile phone. Only use Remote Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. During the parking procedure, you should not stand more than approx. 10 (3.0 m) away from the vehicle. At greater distances, the procedure will be interrupted and a corresponding message will be displayed on the mobile phone. If you move closer to the vehicle, you will be able to continue the procedure.

Operating Remote Parking Assist

Requirements: For the Remote Parking Assist function, you require a mobile phone and the current Remote Parking Assist App for your vehicle type.

% A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz- mobile.com/

The following operating systems are supported: R Android R Apple iOS

& WARNING Danger due to insu cient view of the vehicle surroundings

If you maneuver, park or exit a parking space with the vehicle using Remote Parking Assist, observe the following: # Make sure that you have the best view

possible of the vehicle and the vehicle's surroundings.

# Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the path of your vehicle.

# Make sure that you maintain a suitable distance to the vehicle and that neither you nor other road users could be endangered.

276 Driving and parking

# Be aware of the vehicle's surroundings at all times and identify possible dangers.

# If necessary, cancel the parking proce- dure.

No persons or pets are permitted to remain in the vehicle during the parking procedure. Observe the system limits at all times. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure. Always make sure that others can access their vehicles. # Activate the "Remote Parking Assist" service

e.g. via the Mercedes me homepage. # Authorize the mobile phone using the Remote

Parking Assist App in the vehicle (/ page 279).

Selecting the parking maneuver in advance while inside the vehicle # Stop the vehicle and select transmission posi-

tion j.

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button 1 may also be located at a di erent position in the center console.

# Press button1.

# Select Parking Assistance menu2. # For further information on Remote Parking

Assist: select3. # If necessary, select another parking space4

or select5 to drive straight ahead into a garage, for example.

# If necessary, change parking direction6.

Driving and parking 277

% Alternatively, you can begin parking with Active Parking Assist (/ page 272) and con- tinue with the Remote Parking Assist from any vehicle position. To do this, stop the vehicle during the parking procedure and select transmission position j.

# Switch o the vehicle and exit it with the SmartKey.

Starting the parking procedure without selecting in advance # Stop the vehicle and select transmission posi-

tion j. # Switch o the vehicle and exit it with the

SmartKey.

Starting the parking procedure while outside the vehicle # Unlock the vehicle.

Carrying out a parking procedure with Remote Parking Assist % Keep the vehicle key with you during the park-

ing procedure. You can cancel the parking

procedure and bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing a button on the SmartKey.

% On completion of the parking procedure, the vehicle is locked.

If you have started the parking procedure as described above, the vehicle is ready to connect to your mobile phone for a limited time. # Start the Remote Parking Assist App on the

mobile phone and connect to the vehicle. # Follow the instructions of the Remote Parking

Assist App.

% The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when starting parking and switched o when it is completed.

% If the connection between the vehicle and the mobile phone is interrupted while a parking maneuver is being performed, the maneuver can be continued if the connection is re- established within a short time.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road

users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or

cancel the parking procedure with Remote Parking Assist.

# A er ending the parking procedure, ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and the trunk are closed. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Canceling the parking procedure You can cancel the parking procedure of Remote Parking Assist at any time and bring the vehicle to a standstill.

278 Driving and parking

# Cancel the parking procedure in the Remote Parking Assist app.

or # Press a button on the vehicle SmartKey. or # Pull a door handle.

Authorizing/de-authorizing a mobile phone for Remote Parking Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking

Authorizing a new mobile phone In order to be able to use the Remote Parking Assist function, you must authorize your mobile phone. You can authorize up to ten mobile phones. # Select Remote Parking Assist. # Select Authorize a New Device.

Remote Parking Assist is ready to connect. # Start the Remote Parking Assist app and addi-

tionally start the authorization process. A connection prompt is displayed.

# Scan the QR code on the central display. The mobile phone is authorized.

De-authorizing mobile phones # Select Remote Parking Assist. # Select Deauthorize Devices. # To de-authorize a mobile phone: select a

mobile phone. The mobile phone is deleted from the device list.

# To de-authorize all mobile phones: select Deauthorize All Devices. All mobile phones are deleted from the device list.

Maneuvering assistance

Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If the system detects an obstacle in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is brie y reduced to approximately 1 mph (2 km/h).

A risk of collision may occur in the following situa- tions, for example: R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and

brake pedals. R If the driver engages an incorrect gear. R If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal

with too much force.

Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If the vehicle was stationary and the transmis-

sion position was changed to k or h. R If the vehicle has rolled less than approx-

imately 3.3 (1.0 m) since being at a stand- still. R If the detected obstacle is less than approx.

3.3 (1.0 m) away.

Drive-away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 282). If a critical situation is detected, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parking menu:

Driving and parking 279

% If Drive Away Assist is not available, the same symbol appears in gray. If the Camera & Park- ing menu is not open on the central display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear.

Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substi- tute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, ani- mals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range.

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi- ted detection performance of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden- tify objects and tra c situations. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c

situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec- essary, provided the tra c situation per- mits and that it is safe to take evasive action.

System limits The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 270). On uphill gradients, the performance of Drive Away Assist is restricted.

Function of cross tra c warning The cross tra c warning can warn you of crossing tra c when you are exiting a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. The cross tra c warning is active under the fol- lowing conditions: R Warning for Cross Traffic, Rear: the vehicle is

driving in reverse at a speed slower than approx. 6 mph (10 km/h). R Warning for Cross Traffic, Front: the vehicle is

driving forwards at a speed slower than approx. 6 mph (10 km/h) and the camera

image is shown in the central display (/ page 266).

The Warning for Cross Traffic, Front can be deac- tivated or activated in the Maneuvering Assis- tance menu (/ page 282). If a critical situation is detected, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parking menu:

Warning for Cross Traffic, Rear: the vehicle can be automatically braked if cross tra c is detec- ted. % If the cross tra c warning is not available, the L symbol appears in gray. If the Camera & Parking menu is not opened in the central display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear.

The cross tra c warning is only an aid and not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and park-

280 Driving and parking

ing remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range.

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi- ted detection performance of the cross tra c warning

The cross tra c warning cannot always clearly identify objects and tra c situations. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c

situation; do not rely on the cross tra c warning alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec- essary, provided the tra c situation per- mits and that it is safe to take evasive action.

System limits The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 270). If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible.

In the following situations, the cross tra c warn- ing is not available: R On inclines

Maneuvering brake function The maneuvering brake function can prevent colli- sions with pedestrians when the vehicle is back- ing up at slow speeds. If the rear view camera detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill. The maneuvering brake function can intervene under the following conditions: R The vehicle is backing up at a speed slower

than 6 mph (10 km/h). R The camera image is shown in the central dis-

play (/ page 266).

Depending on the country, you can activate and deactivate the maneuvering brake function in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 282). If the maneuvering brake function is triggered, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parking menu:

% If the maneuvering brake function is not avail- able, the same symbol appears in gray.

The maneuvering brake function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur- roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneu- vering range.

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi- ted detection by the maneuvering brake function

The maneuvering brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function. In these cases, the function may brake unnec- essarily or not brake at all.

Driving and parking 281

# Always pay careful attention to the tra c situation; do not rely on the maneuvering brake function alone.

# Be ready to brake.

System limits Observe the system limits of the following func- tions: R Active Parking Assist (/ page 270) R Surround view camera (/ page 262) R Rear view camera (/ page 260)

The maneuvering brake function is not available in the following situations: R On inclines

Activating/deactivating the maneuvering assistant Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking % This function is available on demand

(/ page 29). # Select Maneuvering Assistance.

# Activate or deactivate the desired maneuver- ing assistant.

Memory Parking Assist

Function of Memory Parking Assist Memory Parking Assist can park your vehicle using a previously stored parking space. You can store parking procedures with a total distance of up to 550 yds (500 m) (110 yds (100 m) per park- ing or exiting procedure). During parking or exiting, the system can travel a previously stored path of up to approximately 110 yds (100 m) to or out of the desired parking space, for example, from the driveway entrance into the garage. Within a radius of approx. 165 yds (150 m), only one parking or exiting procedure can be recorded. Only use Memory Parking Assist on private prop- erty. Use on public roads, e.g. in public parking spaces, is not permitted. Memory Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and park-

ing remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range.

System limits Observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist (/ page 270).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Memory Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detec- tion range, the following situations may arise: R Memory Parking Assist may steer too

early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these

objects.

This result in a collision. # In these situations, do not use Memory

Parking Assist.

Objects located above or below the detection range of Memory Parking Assist may not be detected during the parking procedure.

282 Driving and parking

Drawbars of parked trailers, among other objects, that protrude into the parking space may not be detected. Do not use Memory Parking Assist in the following situations, for example: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,

packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes

beyond the vehicle. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or

uphill gradient. R When snow chains are installed.

Recording a parking procedure using Memory Parking Assist

Requirements: R The entire route is, for example, within your

own property and not on public roads. R The system needs reference points in the sur-

roundings to orient itself, such as fences, walls or trees. Therefore, a er starting the vehicle, a certain distance must rst be driven. If not enough reference points are

detected in the surrounding area, no new route can be recorded.

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button 1 may also be located at a di erent position in the center console.

# Press button1. The Camera & Parking view opens in the cen- tral display.

# Select Memory Parking Assist menu2. # Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the desired

starting point of the assisted parking proce- dure, e.g. a driveway entrance.

# To start recording: press3.

% If not all conditions for a recording are met, symbol3 is grayed out.

Driving and parking 283

# Park the vehicle in the desired parking space. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h).

# To end recording: stop the vehicle and press 3 again. The recording is stored.

% In the Memory Parking Assist settings you can delete and rename stored parking proce- dures.

Parking with Memory Parking Assist

Requirements: R A parking procedure has been recorded. # Press button1.

The Camera & Parking view opens on the cen- tral display.

# Select the Memory Parking Assist menu2. # Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the starting

point of the stored parking procedure. # To start the parking procedure: press6. # Select the stored parking procedure from the

list.

# Follow the instructions on the central display. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.

% The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You are responsible for select- ing the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# A er completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Exiting a parking space with Memory Parking Assist

Requirements: R The exiting procedure was recorded together

with the respective parking procedure and stored separately within one driving cycle. R The vehicle was parked using Memory Parking

Assist. # Press button1.

The Camera & Parking view opens in the cen- tral display.

# Select Memory Parking Assist menu2.

284 Driving and parking

Starting the exiting procedure # Press6. # Con rm the saved exiting procedure. # Follow the instructions on the central display.

The vehicle drives the recorded route.

% The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You are responsible for select- ing the turn signal indicator in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Take control of the vehicle a er the exiting procedure has been completed.

Setting Memory Parking Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking 5 Parking Assistance 5 Memory Parking Assist

Renaming a recording # Select Manage Lanes. # Select next to the desired recording. # Enter a name and con rm with OK.

Deleting a recording # Select Manage Lanes. # SelectE next to the desired recording. # Con rm the message prompt with Yes.

Deleting all recordings # Select Manage Lanes. # Select Delete All Lanes. % Alternatively, you can delete all data in Mem-

ory Parking Assist by resetting the multimedia system (/ page 320).

Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for at towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys- tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guar- anteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side.

Observe the following information: R Permitted towing methods (/ page 372) R The notes on towing the vehicle with both

axles on the ground (/ page 373)

Driving and parking 285

Notes on the driver display

& WARNING Risk of accident if the driver display fails

If the driver display has failed or is malfunc- tioning, function restrictions in systems rele- vant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at

a quali ed specialist workshop.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a quali ed specialist workshop.

The driver display shows the following basic infor- mation: R Speed and power meter level R Range according to average consumption, per-

sonal driving style or high-consumption driving style R Condition of charge of the high-voltage battery R Warning and indicator lamps

Additional functions available to you include the following: R Di erent menus, e.g. for assistance and navi-

gation R Status displays for the driving systems R Display messages

The menu contents and settings can be individu- ally adapted and set.

Notes on the range The range in general R All ranges shown are assumptions based on

various calculation bases. The actual range achieved may di er from the range displayed. R Outside temperatures, climate control set-

tings, vehicle interior temperatures, road con- ditions, driving style etc. directly in uence the achievable range. R Pay attention to the charging prompts at all

times.

Range according to personal driving style R Your previous individual consumption will be

taken into account when the range is being calculated. R While the navigation system or commuter

route is active, additional information about the route ahead can be included in the range calculation. R When the trip computer From Reset is reset,

the data on the previous driving style will also be deleted and calculated afresh from this point on.

286 Driver display

Range with low consumption R The maximum range shows the range potential

when consumption is low, e.g. as a result of economical driving or having the air condition- ing system turned o .

Range with high consumption R The minimum range shows the range when

consumption is high, e.g. as a result of a sporty driving style or having the air condition- ing system turned on. R This range is determined based on past and

current consumption gures. R When the trip computer From Reset is reset,

the data on the previous driving style will also be deleted and calculated afresh from this point on.

Electrical consumption R The consumption gures From Start and

From Reset take into account all active con- sumer equipment when it comes to the drive system's operational readiness.

Operating the driver display

& WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor- mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and com- munications equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the driver display.

Scrolling on the menu bar

1 Back button 2 Main menu button 3 Touch Control

The content on the driver display is controlled using the control elements on the le side of the steering wheel. Touch Control3 is used to navi- gate in a vertical and horizontal direction by swip-

Driver display 287

ing with one nger. Con rm the selection by pressing the Touch Control. % To operate Touch Control3 in the most

e ective way, use the tip of your thumb if pos- sible. You can also set the sensitivity of the Touch Control on the central display .

# Brie y press main menu button2. # Select a menu by swiping to the le or right

on Touch Control3. # Press Touch Control3 to con rm.

Driver display menus Notes on menus on the driver display

& WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor- mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and com- munications equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the tra c situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the driver display. The following menus can be called up via the menu bar on the driver display: R Understated R Sport R Classic R Navigation R Assistance R Service

In some of these menus, you can choose between di erent display content on the center display area.

In most of the menus, you can use Options to con gure further settings for the menu-speci c display content. % You can nd further information about the

possible settings and selections in the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Head-up Display Function of the Head-up Display

The Head-up Display projects various content into the driver's eld of vision, for example. You can use the Head-up Display menu bar to select di erent contexts, e.g.: R Minimal R Sport R Standard R Augmented reality R ECO display R Settings R Head-up Display on/o

288 Driver display

% Depending on the equipment, the functions may di er from the description and images in this Operator's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not availa- ble in all equipment variants.

The following image shows an example of the Head-up Display. You can choose what content is displayed (/ page 291).

Head-up Display content with navigation (9x3)

1 Navigation instructions 2 Navigation instructions (distance to the next

route event) 3 Steer Assist status

4 Current speed 5 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise

control) 6 Detected tra c signs (Tra c Sign Assist)

When you receive a call, the 6 Call Waiting message will appear on the Head-up Display and the driver display.

Head-up Display with navigation and augmented reality (10x5)

1 Navigation instructions 2 Augmented reality navigation instructions

3 Navigation status displays, such as remaining distance to the destination, expected time of arrival

4 Active Lane Keeping Assist status 5 Steer Assist status 6 Current speed 7 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. Active

Distance Assist DISTRONIC) 8 Detected tra c signs (Tra c Sign Assist) 9 ECO Assist

When you receive a call, the 6 Call Waiting message will appear on the Head-up Display and the driver display.

System limits Visibility is particularly in uenced by the following conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light R Wet road surfaces R Objects on the display cover

Driver display 289

R Polarization in sunglasses

Function of the Head-up Display with augmented reality % Augmented reality is only available in connec-

tion with the 10x5 Head-up Display. The Head-up Display with augmented reality proj- ects content into the driver's eld of vision, such as: R Information from and visualization of the navi-

gation system R Information from and visualization of the driver

assistance systems, e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Information from the menus of the driver dis-

play

Head-up Display with augmented reality (example)

1 Marker of the detected vehicle in front (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC)

2 Change-of-direction arrows for the route (nav- igation)

3 Status line for driver assistance systems

The marker of the detected vehicle in front and the change-of-direction arrows for the route are dynamic displays. The vehicle marker stays with the vehicle in front, and Active Distance Assist regulates your speed based on this. The change- of-direction arrows point the way calculated by the navigation system.

System limits The marker of the detected vehicle in front may be inaccurate or may not be applied to the cor- rect vehicle in some situations. Always pay atten- tion to the actual driving situation. Route guidance with augmented reality is not available in some situations, e.g. in the event of poor satellite reception or roads that have not been digitized. Visibility is in uenced by conditions including the following: R Driver camera and multifunction camera

recording R The extent to which the windshield in the area

of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured

Further system limits of the Head-up Display (/ page 288).

290 Driver display

Operating the Head-up Display

Selecting display content of the Head-up Display via the menu bar of the driver display # Press the main menu button on the le . # To select the menu bar of the Head-up Dis-

play: swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Control.

Switching between display contents on the Head- up Display # Swipe right or le on the le -hand Touch Con-

trol. The Head-up Display shows a preview of the selected display contents a er each swipe.

# Press the a button to con rm the desired content.

Switching back to the driver display # Press theG or button.

Setting the position and brightness # On the menu bar of the Head-up Display,

select Settings by swiping to the le or right. # Press the le -hand Touch Control.

The current position and brightness settings will be displayed graphically on the Head-up Display as well as on the driver display.

# To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.

# To adjust the brightness: swipe to the right or le on the le -hand Touch Control. The settings con gured for position and brightness will be saved automatically.

# Press theG or a button to exit the set- tings.

% Vehicles with augmented reality function: when the position is adjusted, the status bar will be moved upwards and the display sec-

tion reduced. This may slightly a ect the area on which the augmented reality content is dis- played.

Selecting the Head-up Display with augmented reality # Press the main menu button on the le . # To select the menu bar of the Head-up Dis-

play: swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Control.

# To select the Head-up Display with augmen- ted reality: swipe to the le or right on the le - hand Touch Control to activate the desired content.

Switching the Head-up Display on/o

Driver display: 4

Switching on # Swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Con-

trol.

Driver display 291

# Press a on the le -hand Touch Control.

Switching o # Swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Con-

trol. # Select Head-up Display by swiping on the le -

hand Touch Control. # Press a on the le -hand Touch Control.

Overview of status displays on the driver's dis- play The status displays for the driving and driving safety systems can be found in display sections 1 to4.

% The number, position and presentation of the status indicators on the driver's display depend on which systems are activated or deactivated. Y Pedestrian detection (only on assistant dis-

play) Active Parking Assist available

(/ page 272)

Active Parking Assist has detected a park- ing space (/ page 272)

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 269)

h Cruise control (/ page 226) Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 228) Speci ed distance for Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 228) Active Brake Assist switched o

(/ page 246) Active Brake Assist impaired or not func-

tioning (/ page 246) Active Steering Assist (/ page 236) Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 239) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 255) Z Active Blind Spot Assist (only on assistant

display) (/ page 254) Haptic accelerator pedal

(/ page 188, 190) HOLD function (/ page 221)

292 Driver display

_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 150) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 152)

Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 235) Slippery road surface warning

Vehicles with Tra c Sign Assist: Detected instruc- tions and tra c signs (/ page 246) Acoustic presence indicator inoperative (/ page 432)

Driver display 293

Overview and operation Notes on the MBUX multimedia system

& WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor- mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and com- munications equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Depending on the equipment, the scope of func- tion and product designation of your MBUX multi- media system may di er from the description and

images in this Operator's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not avail- able in all equipment variants.

* NOTE Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the central display

The surface of the central display is very dark. If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface can become very hot. # If the central display has been exposed

to direct sunlight, allow it to cool down before touching it for a long time.

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system

Vehicles with central display 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX

multimedia system MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experi- ence. Operating Touch Control

2 Central display with touch functionality Home screen overview Operating the touchscreen

3 Control panel with: Fingerprint sensor

294 MBUX multimedia system

Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or o a Switches sound on or o Adjusts the volume

Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX

multimedia system Operates Touch Control

2 Central display with touch functionality for the driver Home screen overview Operates the touchscreen

3 Front passenger display with touch functional- ity Home screen overview Operates the touchscreen

4 Control panel with: Fingerprint sensor Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or o a Switches sound on or o Adjusts the volume

Further operating options: R Conducting a dialog with the MBUX Voice

Assistant. R Operating functions contact-free with the

MBUX Interior Assistant. The interaction then follows intelligently, reac- tively or with hand or head movements. R If the vehicle is equipped with a driver camera,

functions can be triggered via "Look & Answer".

% You can nd further information about opera- tion as well as about applications and serv- ices in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Anti-the protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against the . Further information on protection against the can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Zero Layer

Function of the Zero Layer The Zero Layer provides you with dynamic content from the MBUX multimedia system and is used to quickly access and control the applications you use. When you select on the central display, the digital map with the applications appears in the lower display area. Compared to the home screen with a classic menu, the steps required to call up the applications are reduced. You can switch between the Zero Layer and the home screen with a classic menu. The applications can be hidden from the display area and shown again.

MBUX multimedia system 295

The Zero Layer provides the following modules and applications: R EQ module and navigation module

The EQ module is always shown on the digital map. In the expanded view, charging settings and navigation functions are o ered. R Entertainment (media, radio) and telephone

When the lower display area is shown, the entertainment sources are always displayed. A mobile phone must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system for the phone to be displayed. R Active applications

The lower display area shows an active mas- sage program, for example. R Suggestions

Suggestions are displayed on the lower display area based on context and your user behavior. These are, for example, dialed phone num- bers, active massage programs or vehicle functions. R Online voice applications

In the lower display area, context-dependent services that can be executed via voice are available for direct access.

The applications are rst displayed in a reduced view. By tapping on them, you can operate them or open the associated menu (expanded view). A long press on a suggestion opens a context menu in which further functions are available. The suggestion function can be switched on and o completely or for individual options

Overview of the Zero Layer

Digital map and user-speci c applications (exam- ple)

1 EQ module (reduced view) 2 Enters a destination 3 Calls up the Control Center 4 Calls up user pro le settings 5 Content sharing menu 6 Status line 7 Suggestions

Requirement: suggestions are activated (/ page 313).

8 Active application, e.g. massage program

296 MBUX multimedia system

9

Press brie y: displays all applications and the global search (/ page 298) Press and hold: calls up the home screen with classic menu

A Entertainment sources (media, radio) and telephone Requirement for phone: the mobile phone is connected to the MBUX multimedia system.

The Zero Layer shows the digital map and the user-speci c applications. The following user-speci c applications are dis- played in the lower display area: R Suggestions7 R Active applications8 R Entertainment sources and telephoneA R Online voice applications

The lower display area can be hidden and shown (/ page 298).

Information about entertainment sources You can operate the applications in the reduced view or in the menu (expanded view) (/ page 298). Examples: R Control a media source, e.g. pause/play, next

track, set a station R Select tracks from the current playlist or sta-

tions from the station list R Select a media source

The media source must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system. If Entertainment is activated in the sugges- tions, suggestions are o ered for the currently played media source. Suggestions are also made for online digital services, e.g. Spotify or TuneIn Radio, as well as for categories, e.g. genre, artist and mood. The selections depend on the suggested appli- cation.

Information about the telephone To use the functions, your mobile phone must be connected with the MBUX multimedia system.

Requirement for suggestions: the Calls & Mes- sages and In-Car Office options are activated in the suggestions. Examples: R Answer a call and calling a missed call

The missed calls are displayed for the mobile phone currently connected to the MBUX multi- media system. R Display contacts and call list and calling a

contact R Use voice functions R Suggest contacts

The contacts are suggested for the mobile phone connected to the MBUX multimedia system. No contacts are suggested for a mobile phone that is linked to another user pro le. R Write messages to contacts (suggestion) R Connect a device via the device manager (sug-

gestion) R In-Car O ce Call to-do list (suggestion)

MBUX multimedia system 297

In-Car O ce can also remind you of birthdays, for example.

Information about active applications The following functions are available: R Operating massage programs R Operating an ENERGIZING COMFORT program R Making heating settings R Raising or lowering the vehicle level

Suggestions for convenience and vehicle func- tions as well as navigation Requirement: the Comfort, Vehicle and Naviga- tion options are activated in the suggestions. R Operating massage programs

For example, the multimedia system suggests a program at a certain time. R Operating an ENERGIZING COMFORT program R Opening and closing the tailgate

Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with trunk lid convenience closing. R Opening and closing the convenience doors

Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with convenience doors. R Setting the vehicle level R Activating/deactivating Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC R Selecting previous destinations and destina-

tions from favorites

Information on online voice applications Requirement: the Online Voice Services option is activated in the suggestions. The suggested voice applications are made availa- ble online and are based on your previous voice inputs. Examples: R What will the weather be like tomorrow? R Play the messages. R Start Geoquiz. R Open the garage door.

Calling up and operating the Zero Layer

Calling up the Zero Layer When the vehicle has been switched on, the Zero Layer is displayed with the digital map. Navigation is active. # From another application: press the but-

ton on the right side of the steering wheel. or # Tap on.

Operating applications in the reduced view (exam- ples) # Media: to play the previous or next track, tap

or . # To answer a call or call a missed call: tap on

the contact. A er the connection has been established, the call functions are available.

# To end a call: tap on the contact again. # To answer a message: tap on a message and

write the message or dictate via voice recogni- tion.

298 MBUX multimedia system

# To start a massage program: tap on the appli- cation and start the massage program.

# To select a previous destination: tap on the application and select one of the previous destinations.

# To select a destination from the favorites: tap on the application and select the destination.

Hiding and showing the display area with applica- tions # To hide: pull the applications down. # To show: pull the bar above upwards. or # Select. or # Press the button on the steering wheel

on the right.

EQ module (expanded view)

1 Sets the charging program (/ page 209) 2 Current condition of charge of the high-volt-

age battery 3 Maximum condition of charge (depending on

the setting) 4 Sets the next charging break (to use a less

expensive tari )

5 Sets the departure time 6 Opens the socket ap 7 Activates or deactivates ECO charging # Tap on the EQ module (/ page 296).

The charging settings are displayed. Additional EQ and navigation functions are available in the lower menu bar: R Symbol

Enters a destination R Route

Shows charging stops and the destination R Range

Switches range maximization on or o (/ page 191). R SymbolZ

Makes settings for View, Messages & Acoustic Signals and Route

# To close the menu: selectG.

MBUX multimedia system 299

Navigation module (expanded view)

Example: navigation module with active route guidance

1 Arrival time at charging stop, type of charging station

2 Charging stop shows the charging time rec- ommended by the navigation with Electric Intelligence as well as charge levels on arrival and onward journey for an optimal travel time

3 Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time

4 Searches for an additional charging station # Tap on the EQ module (/ page 296). # Select Route in the lower menu bar.

Operating a menu in the lower display area (exam- ple: active massage program)

1 Selects a massage program 2 Starts/stops a massage program for the

driver 3 Starts/stops a massage program for the front

passenger 4 Sets the massage program intensity for the

driver or front passenger # Tap on the application.

The expanded view of the application is dis- played.

# To close the menu: selectG.

300 MBUX multimedia system

Opening and closing the context menu for a sug- gestion # Press and hold on a suggestion.

The context menu opens and shows the No Longer Suggest option, for example.

# To close: swipe downwards.

Removing a suggestion from the display area # Swipe the suggestion upwards.

Showing all applications

# Press brie y. Available applications1 are displayed. The global search is available.

Switching between Zero Layer and home screen with classic menu # Long press on.

The home screen with classic menu is shown. # To return to the Zero Layer: press and hold on .

Home screen overview

1 Status line 2 Calls up user pro le settings and switches

user 3 Uses the global search 4 Calls up the Control Center (pull down) 5 Calls up favorites 6 Displays in the status line

MBUX multimedia system 301

7 Calls up applications 8 Quick-access to application 9 Global menu G Calls up previous menu Press and hold: switches between home screen and Zero Layer Previous track or previous radio station Next track or next radio station

% During a telephone call, the call duration is displayed in global menu9.

The following functions are called up in the Con- trol Center: R Noti cations Center R Content sharing menu R Favorites R Vehicle quick-access

Content sharing menu in the Control Center

Example: Content sharing menu 1 Calls up a menu 2 Central display with active content (cover dis-

play) 3 Front passenger display

4 Displays animation for content sharing 5 Bluetooth headphones connected to

the front passenger display on the right

To share content, drag a display and drop it over another display. To control media playback, tap a display. % If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX high-

end Rear Seat Entertainment System and MBUX rear tablet, the following is displayed under2 and3: R The rear display R The MBUX rear tablet

302 MBUX multimedia system

Operating the MBUX multimedia system

Using Touch Control

1 Shows the home screen 2 Touch Control

=9: swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate) a Press (con rm)

3G Returns to the previous display 4 6 Makes or accepts a call 5 ~ Rejects or ends a call 6 Increase volume: swipe upwards

Reduce volume: swipe down

8 Switches o the sound: press 7 Calls up favorites (press brie y) or adds

favorites (press and hold) 8 Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant

You can navigate through menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control2 using a single- nger swipe, for example: # To enter a character: select a character using

the keyboard and press on Touch Control2. # To select a menu option: scroll in a list and

press Touch Control2. # To move the digital map: swipe in any direc-

tion.

Using the touchscreen

Example: control elements for vehicles with a central display

1 Fingerprint sensor 2 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or

o 3 Switches the mute function on/o

MBUX multimedia system 303

4 Adjusts the volume Press or q or swipe over the button

Example: control elements for vehicles with an MBUX Hyperscreen

1 Adjusts the volume Press , or q.

2 Fingerprint sensor

3 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or o

4 Switches the mute function on/o # To select a menu item or entry: tap on a sym-

bol or an entry. # To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly

with one nger. # To reduce the map scale: tap with two ngers. # To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a

button. # To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, le or

right. # To use handwriting to enter characters: write

the character with one nger on the touchscreen.

# To zoom in and out of the map: move two n- gers together or apart.

# To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two ngers together or apart.

# To turn the digital map: turn counter-clockwise or clockwise using two ngers.

# To move the digital map: touch the touchscreen and move your nger in any direction.

# To save the destination in the digital map: touch the touchscreen and hold until a mes- sage is shown.

# To call up the home screen: swipe up with three ngers in an application.

# To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the nger to the le or right.

# To call up a global menu in the applications: touch the touchscreen and hold until the Options menu appears.

Function of the MBUX Voice Assistant

& WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor- mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and com- munications equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you could be distracted from

304 MBUX multimedia system

the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control sys- tem: R Observe the legal requirements for the coun-

try in which you are driving. R If you use the voice control system in an emer-

gency your voice can change and your tele- phone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnecessarily delayed. R Familiarize yourself with the voice control sys-

tem functions before starting the journey. Using the MBUX Voice Assistant, vehicle func- tions and various areas of the MBUX multimedia system can be operated by voice input. The MBUX

Voice Assistant is operational approximately half a minute a er switching on the ignition and can be operated from all seats. Further information and examples of voice commands can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. You can use the MBUX Voice Assistant to operate the following functions depending on the vehicle equipment: R Telephone R Text message and e-mail R Navigation R Radio, media, TV R Vehicle functions R Online functions

Full functionality of the voice control system is only available for you with activation of online voice control.

Conducting a dialog

Starting a dialog # Say "Hey Mercedes" to activate the MBUX

Voice Assistant. Voice activation must be switched on in the multimedia system.

or # Press the button on the multifunction

steering wheel. A blue line appears in the MBUX multimedia system. The dialog can be started.

For the dialog with the MBUX Voice Assistant, you can use complete sentences of colloquial lan- guage as voice commands. Voice activation can also be directly combined with a voice command, e.g. "Hey Mercedes, how fast can I drive?".

Calling up help # For information about the MBUX Voice Assis-

tant: say "Hey Mercedes, what can you do?" # Digital Operator's Manual: "Show me the

Operator's Manual". The full extent of the Dig- ital Operator's Manual is available when the vehicle is stationary.

MBUX multimedia system 305

Operating functions (examples) # To operate the navigation: "Search for an

Asian restaurant, but not Japanese, in South London."

# To operate the phone: "Call my father." # To change the system language to English

(short command): "Change language to Eng- lish".

# To operate the radio: "Show me the list of radio stations."

# To operate media: "Switch on random play- back."

# To operate vehicle functions: "Switch the seat heating to level 2."

# To operate online functions: "What's the time in Sydney?"

# To ask a question about the vehicle: "Do I have Blind Spot Assist?"

Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant

& WARNING Risk of injury from the cam- era's laser radiation

This product uses a classi cation 1 laser sys- tem. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and

repairs carried out by a quali ed special- ist workshop.

This product complies with the requirements of the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with exception of the variations according to the FDA Laser Notice No. 50 from 24. June 2007. % The camera records image data for the appli-

cations, for example body, head and hand detection. The camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No image data is saved in the process. The data is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehi- cle.

% The MBUX Interior Assistant is automatically activated whenever the engine is started. You can set the functions individually or switch the Interior Assistant on or o . The most recently active settings are stored in your user pro le. If you switch o the Interior Assistant, for example, this setting will be adopted in your user pro le. However you do not change any other active user pro le in which the Interior Assistant is switched on.

The MBUX Interior Assistant detects the presence of the front vehicle occupants using a 3D laser camera. The Assistant interprets natural hand, head and body movements contextually or upon the explicit request of the vehicle occupants. The Assistant can thus automatically trigger vehicle interior functions and assist appropriately to the situation. The Assistant recognizes driver and front passenger interactions.

306 MBUX multimedia system

Cameras1 are located in the overhead control panel. The Assistant supports vehicle and infotainment functions at three interaction levels: R INTELLIGENT

The Assistant recognizes vehicle occupants automatically and activates functions. R REACTIVE

The Assistant recognizes the natural body lan- guage of a vehicle occupant and carries out functions automatically, appropriate to the sit- uation. R CONTACTLESS

The vehicle occupant actively requests a func- tion using a hand movement or pose.

The Assistant o ers functions for the following: R SAFETY

The Assistant supports vehicle occupants with the use of restraint systems. R COMFORT

The Assistant enhances comfort by automat- ing functions inside the vehicle and supporting natural interaction with the vehicle. R INFOTAINMENT

Operating options or information are highligh- ted and/or shown on the central display as your hand approaches. The vehicle occupants can carry out a favorite function with a hand pose.

System limits, display messages and notes for recti cation The error messages are shown on the central dis- play.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The camera in the overhead control panel may

heat up due to operating conditions. As a result the camera may switch o temporarily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures. Do not touch or cover the camera. Wait until the camera has cooled down and is available again. The Interior Assistant Unavailable Further Information to Follow message appears. You receive a message when the camera is available again. R The camera is covered, dirty, fogged up or

scratched. Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera cover. The Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual message appears. Clean the outside of the camera cover with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use micro-

MBUX multimedia system 307

ber cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning. R A vehicle occupant is very large. Clothing

being worn (gloves, hat, scarf, color of cloth- ing) or objects carried on a person, for exam- ple a watch with a large face, are a ecting the camera view. Or the detection range of the camera is restricted. The Interior Assistant availability for the driver is limited, see Operator's Manual mes- sage appears. Keep the camera's eld of vision clear. Objects in the detection range of the camera can restrict the camera view. Please make sure, that no objects hang on the inside rear- view mirror, for example. R The MBUX Interior Assistant is faulty.

The Interior Assistant Not Available. Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealer. message appears. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Anticipatory exit warning (SAFETY/reactive)

Requirements: R The vehicle is equipped with Active Blind Spot

Assist with exit warning. R Active Blind Spot Assist is activated

(/ page 255). R The vehicle is equipped with active ambient

lighting or ambient lighting.

% Observe the information on the system limits of Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 252).

The function can warn vehicle occupants about a possible collision with an approaching vehicle or bicycle when they exit the vehicle. As soon as the driver or front passenger moves their hand towards the door handle, depending on the vehicle equipment, the following warnings are issued: R The active ambient lighting or ambient lighting

ashes red. R The warning lamp in the outside mirror also

ashes red for one of the front doors.

R When the door is opened, a warning tone sounds.

% The visual warning is thus already given before the door is opened.

% Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 252) and on ambient lighting (/ page 155).

Switching the reading light and search light and on or o

Requirements: R For the reading light: the driver's and front

passenger's hand movement takes place under the inside rearview mirror. R For the search light: the function is available in

the vehicle when it is dark. R The front passenger seat is not occupied or a

child is sitting in a child restraint system. R The hand movement is made by the driver in

the interaction area above the front passenger seat.

308 MBUX multimedia system

Switching the reading light on and o

Carrying out operation of the reading light for the driver and front passenger

# Move your hand up and down vertically under the inside review mirror. The reading light is switched on or o .

Switching the search light on and o

Interaction area for activating the search light

# To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand. The search light is switched on automatically for the driver.

# To switch o : take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched o again.

Automatic preselection of the outside mirror (COMFORT/reactive)

Until now, to set the outside mirror the desired mirror had to be selected using a preselection button in the driver's door. With the MBUX Interior Assistant, the mirror to be set is preselected automatically by the natural movement of your head to the le or right. When the hand touches the button for adjusting the out- side mirror, the LED under the button of the pre- selected mirror side lights up. Use the button to set the position of the active outside mirror. % Preselection of the outside mirror using but-

tons is still possible. Further information on adjusting the outside mirrors (/ page 159).

% The driver camera is also used for this appli- cation.

MBUX multimedia system 309

Calling up favorites with the V pose (INFOTAIN- MENT/contactless)

Requirements: R At least one favorite has been saved in the

favorites list. R The favorite has been connected with the

MBUX Interior Assistant. R The area for detecting the favorites pose (V

pose) is above the center console in front of the central display. R The V pose is held for a brief time.

The V pose makes it easier to call up favorites. The front vehicle occupants can associate their own favorite with the V-pose. Some examples include a navigation destination, a radio station or a massage program for a seat. If the vehicle is equipped with a front passenger display, the front passenger can link the V-pose directly to a favorite on the front passenger dis- play. If the front passenger performs the V-pose as described, the favorite will open on the front passenger display.

% If a favorite has not yet been saved and con- nected with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the multimedia system will assist you.

Implementation of the V-pose above the stowage compartment of the center console at the height of the central display

# Position your hand above the stowage com- partment of the center console at the height of the central display. The back of your hand is

facing upwards. In doing so, your index and middle nger are spread to form a V. With your other ngers bent inwards.

# Brie y hold the V pose. The favorite is called up.

Function of the driver camera

The driver camera is located in the driver display. The driver camera detects the following character- istics: R Head position R Viewing direction R Eyelid closure characteristics R Driver's face

% The driver camera records image data for applications such as ATTENTION ASSIST and facial recognition, for example. The camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No image data is saved in the process. The data is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehi- cle.

310 MBUX multimedia system

The driver camera is automatically activated each time the vehicle is opened with the SmartKey.

The driver camera must be set up for face detec- tion before use. Teaching-in biometric data (/ page 313).

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The camera is covered or dirty, fogged up or

scratched. R The driver's face and/or eyes are covered. R The driver is wearing glasses that block infra-

red.

Display messages In the following situations display messages may be shown: R The driver camera is inoperative.

The camera is faulty. The Driver Camera Inoperative See Opera- tor's Manual message appears.

R The driver camera cannot capture the position of your head. The Change the steering wheel/ seat posi- tion until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen. message appears. R The view of the driver camera is reduced or

restricted. The Driver Camera View Currently Restricted See Operator's Manual message appears.

Notes on care Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 360).

Switching the driver camera on or o

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Intelligent Assistance # Select On or Off. When the driver camera is switched o , the fol- lowing functions are not available or limited: R The MBUX augmented reality Head-up Display

(/ page 288)

R The microsleep detection of ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 224) R The facial recognition

This function serves as sensor input for authentication and unlocking of the user pro- le and protected applications (/ page 313).

R Multimodality This function activates the MBUX Voice Assis- tant with eye control, e.g. for the con rmation of a display message by voice. R The mirror preselection (/ page 159)

This function allows the natural movement of the head to the le or right to automatically preselect the outside mirror to be adjusted.

Information on users, suggestions and favorites

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur- ing adjustment of the driver's seat a er calling up a driver pro le

Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjust- ment of the driver's seat to the position saved

MBUX multimedia system 311

under the user pro le. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driv-

er's seat is being adjusted using the mul- timedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trap- ped, stop the adjustment process immedi- ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the cen-

tral display. or # b) Press a memory position button or a

seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stopped.

The driver's seat is equipped with an access pre- venter. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set a er calling up the driver's pro le.

User pro les and user-speci c content Prerequisites for the vehicle owner: R You have a Mercedes me user account. R You have a Mercedes me PIN. R You have agreed to the terms of use. R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user

account.

% If one of the pre-requisites listed is missing or if no user pro le has been selected, the data described in the following section will be saved in the vehicle as the standard setting. Standard settings can be changed by all vehi- cle users.

User pro les save personal settings. If the vehicle is used by several people, a person can change their pro le settings without changing the settings of other users. If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX high end Rear Seat Entertainment System, the occupants in the rear passenger compartment can log in as Mercedes me users from their seats. The Multi- seat Pro le Management allows three pro les to

be used simultaneously. A user pro le can only be activated simultaneously on one display. % Some settings apply to the entire vehicle and

are displayed in all user pro les, e.g. ambient lighting and the current navigation settings. These initially belong to the driver, but can also be changed by the other vehicle occu- pants in their user pro le.

You can individualize a user pro le in the vehicle using the set-up assistant or using the settings in your user pro le. Some settings, e.g. the Mercedes me PIN and a pro le photo are made in the Mercedes me app or in the Mercedes me Por- tal. User-speci c content and applications with per- sonal data are protected by di erent levels of security. To access protected content, the Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors can be used. % The security level is set by the multimedia sys-

tem and calculated from the combination of all sensor inputs. Some security levels cannot be turned o .

312 MBUX multimedia system

% When a user pro le is activated, the following personalized comfort systems, for example, can be adjusted or their settings loaded: R Seat R Ambient light R Outside mirrors R Blinds R Climate control settings

If the user pro le is activated when driving then the driver's seat position will not be adjusted.

Depending on the vehicle equipment you can, as a user, save the following settings, for example: R Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror set-

tings R Climate control R Ambient lighting R Radio (including station list) R Suggestions and favorites

Suggestions The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then makes suggestions regarding navigation des- tinations, phone numbers and music preferences. The requirements for that are the selection of a user, your consent to the recording of data and su cient collected data.

Favorites Favorites o er you quick access to frequently used applications. 100 favorites are available in total.

Con guring users, suggestions and favorites

Requirements: R To use the set-up assistant: the vehicle is sta-

tionary.

Multimedia system: 4 5f 5 Change User

Adding a user # Select f Add User .

A QR code is loaded.

# Scan the displayed QR code with the Mercedes me app or any QR code scanner on a mobile device. If the Mercedes me app is not yet installed on your mobile device, you will be directed to the store of your mobile device.

# Follow the directions in the app. The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. This automatically creates your user pro le in the vehicle. If only your user pro le is available, it will be loaded automatically. If more than one user pro le is available, you will be directed to the user selection. When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up assistant starts automatically a er user selec- tion.

Selecting user options # Select Settings. # Select Suggestions. # Select Allow All Suggestions. or

MBUX multimedia system 313

# Switch the options on or o individually. If an option is switched on and su cient data has been gathered, suggestions based on your user behavior will be o ered to you.

# For intelligent multimodality: select Multimo- dality. If the option is active, the MBUX Voice Assis- tant can be activated in certain situations.

# To switch the learning function o for 24 h: switch on Deactivate 24h Intelligent Learn- ing.

# To delete cumulated suggestions: select Reset Suggestion History and con rm Ja (Yes).

Protecting user-speci c content and applications If you add a new user, access protection is already activated for the user pro le. The Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are available for access. Biometric sensors must be taught in in the vehicle. The authentication process then takes all taught-in and available sensors into account.

The following user-speci c content and applica- tions are protected, for example: R User selection and user pro le settings R Biometric sensors

The teaching-in of biometric sensors is protec- ted. R Suggestions

The data and determination of the most prob- able navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations, contacts and messages are protected. R ENERGIZING COACH

The recorded health data and their evaluation are protected. R Mercedes me connect store

The purchase of services is protected. # Switch Protect Content on or o . # Switch Access Protection on or o . % When access protection is switched o , your

user pro le can be accessed and changed from every vehicle seat.

% Access protection is switched on or o on a vehicle-speci c basis.

Teaching in, editing and deleting biometric data The biometric data models are saved in the sen- sors in the vehicle. If recognition has been taught- in, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for authentication on the multimedia system. # Select Protect Content. # Select Facial Recognition, Fingerprint Recog-

nition or Voice Recognition. % If necessary, authenticate yourself on the mul-

timedia system.

Authenticating using face recognition # Close the driver's door or fasten the driver's

seat belt. # Look at the driver display for about ve sec-

onds. Your face is scanned. A message in the driver display shows whether facial recognition was successful or not. You can unlock your user pro le and protected applications with the facial scan.

314 MBUX multimedia system

Authenticating using ngerprints # Place and li your nger several times on the

ngerprint sensor under the touchscreen (/ page 294). The nger is scanned. If the scanning proce- dure is successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user pro- le and protected applications with your nger

print.

Authenticating using voice recognition # Speak the sentence shown on the central dis-

play and follow the Voice Assistant's instruc- tions. If the voice recognition was successful, a mes- sage appears on the central display. You can unlock your user pro le.

% Avoid background or disturbing noises during voice recognition.

Deleting biometric data # Tap onE , for example, behind Facial Rec-

ognition. # Select Yes.

Teaching in the vehicle SmartKey for pro le selec- tion # Select Protect Content. # Select SmartKey Recognition. # Have the SmartKey ready and follow the set-

up assistant's prompts. The user pro le is linked to the selected SmartKey. If you open the vehicle with the SmartKey, the light, mirror and seat settings for your user pro le are pre-activated. The SmartKey you are currently using for unlock- ing is used. The SmartKey is only stored for the driver and for one user pro le.

Selecting a user % When you call up your driver pro le, the driv-

er's seat and the steering wheel can be set. You can cancel the setting process with the following actions: R Press Tap Here to Cancel message on the

central display. R Press one of the seat operating buttons in

the driver's door.

# Select Change User. # Select a user. # When requested to do so, authenticate with

the Mercedes me PIN or a taught-in biometric characteristic. The user pro le is loaded and activated.

% If you select Continue Without Selecting a User, no speci c settings for the user pro le are loaded.

Adding favorites from categories # Select. # Select. # Select r. # Select W Create New Favorite. # Select the category. # Select a favorite.

Linking favorites with the MBUX Interior Assistant V pose # Select. # Select.

MBUX multimedia system 315

# Select r. # Select Driver or Passenger. # Select the category. # Select a favorite.

System settings Overview of the system settings menu

In the system settings menu, you can make set- tings in the following menus and control ele- ments: R Display

- Display brightness

- Screensaver for the front passenger dis- play (vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen)

R Control elements: - Keyboard language and handwriting recog-

nition - Sensitivity of the Touch Controls - Haptic operation for the touchscreen R MBUX Voice Assistant

R MBUX Interior Assistant R Tone

- Entertainment - Navigation and tra c announcements - Telephone - Voice ampli cation R Data protection R Connectivity:

- Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, NFC R MBUX rear tablet child-proof lock R Time & date R Language R Units for distance R System PIN R So ware update R System reset

Overview of so ware updates

Important so ware updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data.

Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. The multimedia system displays a corresponding message when a so ware update is available. If the Automatic Online Update option is active, so ware updates are downloaded automatically. If the option is deactivated, you will be informed of new so ware updates once. The so ware updates are available for downloading for a limited period of time. Carrying out a so ware update: R You can start so ware updates via the com-

munication module. R You can start so ware updates via a Wi-Fi hot-

spot. R You can start map updates from an external

medium.

% Online so ware updates cannot be performed via external Wi-Fi hotspots that are encrypted using TKIP.

316 MBUX multimedia system

% To complete so ware updates via the commu- nication module, the vehicle must be connec- ted with the Internet and a Mercedes me user account.

% To complete so ware updates via Wi-Fi, the vehicle must be connected to an external Wi- Fi hotspot.

A so ware update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required

for installation R Installation of the downloaded so ware

update R Activation of the downloaded so ware update.

% It may be necessary to restart the MBUX mul- timedia system a er completion of a so ware update.

% While some so ware updates are being down- loaded, the multimedia system cannot be operated and the vehicle functions may be restricted.

% Some so ware updates require a safe vehicle status for the installation to be completed.

They can only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with the vehicle switched o .

For so ware updates requiring a safe vehicle sta- tus: when the last installation step is reached, a message appears on the central display a er the vehicle is switched o . Follow the step-by-step instructions on the central display to complete the installation. There are so ware updates that can only be installed when the vehicle is safely parked, there are no more people in the vehicle and the vehicle is locked.

Availability of the driver and central display During the installation of so ware updates, it is not possible to use the vehicle, central display and driver display. You may receive the following display message when an installation is running:

% The display message does not appear every time a so ware update is installed.

In rare cases, an error can occur during the instal- lation. The multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If it is not possible to restore the previous version, the display message shown above appears every time the vehicle is started.

Failure of the driver display If the driver display fails or there is a malfunction, you may not recognize limitations in the functions of systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired. Drive on carefully and have the

MBUX multimedia system 317

vehicle checked at a quali ed specialist workshop immediately (/ page 440). Further information about so ware updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedes- benz.com.

Failure of the central display If the central display fails or the display message shown above is shown continuously, several sys- tems such as the rear view camera, PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer available. Drive on carefully and consult a specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Front passenger display failure (only vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen) If the front passenger display has failed or a dis- play message appears permanently, functions and systems are no longer available via the front passenger display. Visit a quali ed specialist work- shop.

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

Requirements: R The Wi-Fi function is activated on the multime-

dia system and the communication device to be connected. R The communication device to be connected

supports at least one of the types of connec- tion described. The connection types shown depend on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of con- nection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

% Some functions may rst need to be activated on the communication device being connec- ted. More detailed information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.

% The use of the vehicle data tari by external devices is not available in all countries.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth % The availability of the functions is dependent

on the country. # Select Wi-Fi.

The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched on.

When the Wi-Fi function is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with external hot- spots or make it available as a hotspot for external devices. When the Wi-Fi function is switched o , it is not possible to establish a hotspot connection. When the Wi-Fi function is switched o , no con- nection can be established with the MBUX rear tablet. % The data volume can be purchased directly

from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.

% The use of the vehicle data tari by external devices is not available in all countries.

318 MBUX multimedia system

Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot # Select MBUX Hotspot. # Select one of the following connection

options.

Connecting using a QR code Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the device being connected. Alternatively: the device being connected has an integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's operating instructions). # Scan the QR code shown.

The Wi-Fi connection is established.

Connecting using NFC # Activate NFC on the device to be connected. # When the NFC icon is displayed in the MBUX

Hotspot menu, hold the device to be connec- ted to the NFC interface.

# Follow the instructions on the device. The Wi-Fi connection is established.

Connecting using a security key # Select the vehicle from the device to be con-

nected. The vehicle is displayed with the MBUX XXXXX network name.

# Enter the security key which is shown in the central display on the device to be connected.

# Con rm the entry.

Generating a new security key # Select the hotspot name MBUX XXXXX in the

MBUX Hotspot menu. # Con rm the prompt with Yes.

A new security key is generated.

A connection will be established with the newly created security key. % When a new security key is generated, all

existing Wi-Fi connections are then discon- nected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re- established, the new security key must be entered.

Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the multimedia system. The data tari of the mobile communication device via Purchased Plan is used for the data connection. % This function is country-dependent. % With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are

encrypted via TKIP, online so ware updates cannot be carried out via the external Wi-Fi hotspot.

# Select the Connect to the Internet option in the Internet and Bluetooth menu.

Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi % The Wi-Fi function on the mobile phone and

Internet access via Wi-Fi must be activated (see the manufacturer's operating instruc- tions).

# Select Search for Access. # Select the network. # Log in to the Wi-Fi network. or

MBUX multimedia system 319

# Select the mobile phone with the Wi-Fi symbol.

System language

Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the lan- guage for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language a ects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English.

Setting the language Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Language

Setting the system language A list of the available system languages is shown. # Select a language.

The system language is switched to the selec- ted language.

Resetting the multimedia system (reset function)

& WARNING Risk of accidents due to failure of the central display functions

While the multimedia system is being reset, its functions such as the rear view camera are not available. # Only reset the multimedia system when

the vehicle is stationary.

Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. R Some settings can only be reset when the

vehicle is stationary.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset When resetting the system, personal data and set- tings are deleted, for example: R Connected devices R Individual user pro les R Biometric data

R Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connec- tion

% The data used and saved in the multimedia system by the driver assistance systems is deleted.

% Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset must be in the cradle while the system is reset.

# Select Reset. A query appears asking if the system should really be reset.

# Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. The multimedia system is restarted a er the system reset.

% Due to data protection, as well as the function of individual driving systems and driving safety systems, it is a requirement to carry out a complete system reset before selling the vehi- cle or transferring it to a third party, or a er use as a hire car.

320 MBUX multimedia system

Drive system settings Calling up the energy ow display

Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Energy Flow.

The energy ow in the vehicle is displayed.

Navigation and tra c Notes on navigation

Route guidance with augmented reality

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display

The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. # Always keep an eye on the actual tra c

situation. # Avoid extended observation of the cam-

era image.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information

The additional information from the augmen- ted reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation. # Always keep an eye on the actual tra c

situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers.

Switching navigation on

Multimedia system: 4

# Alternatively, press the button on the steering wheel on the right (/ page 303). The Zero Layer with the digital map is dis- played.

Navigation overview

Digital map and user-speci c applications

1 Navigation module (reduced view) or EQ mod- ule (reduced view) Route guidance active: Navigation module shows in the reduced view the information relevant to the route, e.g. the next charging stop, the destination and a traf- fic delay ends the current route guidance Tapping opens the navigation module in the expanded view with the Route Route guidance not active:

MBUX multimedia system 321

EQ module is shown in the reduced view Tapping opens the EQ module in the expan- ded view with the charging functions

2 Enters a destination 3 Calls up the Control Center in the status line 4 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or

arrow) 5 Display area with entertainment sources,

phone, active applications and suggestions 6 Searches for POIs, e.g. charging stations w and parking facilities j, as well as sets map orientation and map type

7 Navigation window shows the next maneuver (zoomed out view) or the route monitor (zoomed in view) For example, with active route guidance, route sections of the route list, displays for upcom- ing driving maneuvers, lane recommendations . Switches o navigation announcements Switches on navigation announcements

The following map orientations6 are available: R 2D and to the north

R 2D and direction of travel R 3D and direction of travel R Map with complete route

% If the map is moved, the map switches between 3D direction of travel and 2D north orientation.

The following map types6 are available: R Daytime display R Night-time display R Satellite map

Navigation module (expanded view)

1 Arrival time at charging stop, type of charging station

2 Charging stop shows the charging time rec- ommended by the navigation with Electric Intelligence as well as charge levels on arrival and onward journey for an optimal travel time

322 MBUX multimedia system

3 Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time

4 Searches for an additional charging station

EQ module (expanded view)

1 Sets the charging program (/ page 209) 2 Current condition of charge of the high-volt-

age battery

3 Maximum condition of charge (depending on the setting)

4 Sets the next charging break (to use a less expensive tari )

5 Sets the departure time 6 Opens the socket ap 7 Activates or deactivates ECO charging

Overview of the toll system Debiting of toll charges at freeway toll gates is facilitated with an electronic payment system. The toll system uses RFID (Radio Frequency Iden- ti cation) for data transfer between the control unit and the toll station. The toll system is switched o at the factory. The control unit is in the vehicle glove box. To register and activate the control unit, the fol- lowing steps are required: R You activate the toll system in the settings of

the MBUX multimedia system. R In the Mercedes me app, register the unit

identi cation number of the control unit and activate the toll system.

Registration and activation of the toll system can take up to 24 hours.

When the toll system is activated, the number of vehicle occupants is rst transmitted manually and is preset with one person. The number of vehicle occupants can be transmit- ted automatically. In the process, the number of seat belts worn is determined. The toll system is operational in all states in the USA and in all provinces in Canada. % In Mexico, for example, the toll system can be

registered and activated for journeys to the USA.

Notices R Drive at the prescribed vehicle speed in the

toll lane. R Only a er registration and activation of the toll

system will the toll be debited automatically. R Mercedes-Benz recommends operation using

the MBUX multimedia system. Alternatively, this can also be done on the control unit in the glove box.

MBUX multimedia system 323

R For safety reasons, make the entries with the vehicle stationary. R For further information, please consult the

Mercedes me app or an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

For information on how to register and activate the toll system, see the Digital Operator's Manual.

Entering a destination

Requirements: R For online search: an Internet connection is

established. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the

Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected with the user

account and you have accepted the terms of use. Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me

R The service is available. R The service has been activated at an author-

ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Where to?

Example: entering a POI or address 1 Input line

2 Searches for a POI 3 Selects destination search, displays further

destination searches with double arrow 4 Deletes the last character entered 5 Hides the keypad 6 Switches to handwriting recognition 7 Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant 8 Sets the written language 9 Switches to digits and special characters A Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters # Enter the destination in1. The entries can

be made in any order. The search results are displayed in a list.

% Online search results for POIs may contain additional information, for example opening times and prices. The information is provided by an online map service. This online function is not available in all countries.

% You can enter a destination as a 3 word address from what3words. This option is not available in all countries.

324 MBUX multimedia system

# Hide the keyboard with a. # Select the destination in the list.

The route is calculated. % Observe the notes on the MBUX multimedia

system (/ page 294).

Calculating a route with Electric Intelligence and using settings for route guidance

Requirements: R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown. R For navigation with Electric Intelligence:

- Mercedes me connect is available. - You have a Mercedes me connect user

account and the vehicle is connected with the account.

- The "Navigation with Electric Intelligence" service is available and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. The services "Navigation with Electric Intel- ligence", "Display of charging points" and

"Mercedes me Charge" are required for optimal function.

- The Plan Charging Stops route option is switched on.

Example: detailed display 1 Saves as favorite (Plan Charging Stops is

switched on)

Calls up alternative routes (Plan Charging Stops is switched o )

2 Calculates the route and starts route guid- ance

3 Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the destination

4 Destination information, online content (e.g. weather information), 3-word address from what3words, saves destination as favorite, shares destination

A er selecting a destination, Electric Intelligence automatically and intelligently calculates the route to the destination. This is updated during route guidance. The route with Electric Intelligence con- tains the required charging stations as intermedi- ate destinations. The charging stations are deter- mined taking account of the driving distance and the estimated charging times. % When the Plan Charging Stops route option is

switched o , a route without charging stations is calculated.

# Select one of the options.

MBUX multimedia system 325

Saving a destination as a favorite # Select Favorite. # Select an option.

Calling up the route overview % When Plan Charging Stops is switched o ,

this option is available instead of the favorites function.

# Select Routes. # Select an alternative route.

Starting route guidance # Select Let's Go!.

Calling up the detailed display with destination address # Pull the bar above the Let's Go! symbol

upwards. Depending on the destination selection and availability, online content, for example rat- ings, prices and weather information, is shown. If the destination is in a di erent time zone, a message is displayed.

# To share a destination: select Share. This option allows you to scan the displayed QR code.

# To save a destination as a favorite: select Favorite and then an option.

# To call up an Internet address: if a web address is available, select www.

# To call the destination: if a telephone number is available, select Call.

Searching for POIs in the vicinity of the destina- tion shown # Select In The Vicinity. # Search using categories, enter a search entry

or search for a personal POI .

Switching on the Electric Intelligence route option # SelectZ in the navigation module

(/ page 321). # Select Route. # Activate Plan Charging Stops.

If the route has been calculated and the state of charge of the high-voltage battery is not su cient to reach the destination, charging

stations are set automatically as intermediate destinations.

Setting the condition of charge of the high voltage battery when the charging station and destination are reached # SelectZ in the navigation module

(/ page 321). # Select Route. # Select State of Charge at Destination or

State of Charge at Charging Stations. # Move the control knob to the le or right and

set the preferred condition of charge in per- cent (%). The destination or charging station along the route is reached with the set condition of charge.

To reach a charging station, the system uses the battery capacity, e.g. up to 10% residual energy content (condition of charge). You can increase this condition of charge on arrival at the charging station and destination, e.g. to 25% at the charg- ing station and 50% at the destination.

326 MBUX multimedia system

% In the event of increased energy consumption while driving, e.g. with headwind, the following options are available on the system side: R The charging station is safely reached

even at charge levels of less than 10%. R Navigation with Electric Intelligence

selects a closer charging station for the route.

% If a charging facility is available at the destina- tion, the condition of charge can be lowered below 10%. The Min. message appears on the central display. Make sure that the range monitor is switched on.

# To select a charging station provider: switch Mercedes me Charge on or o . If the option is activated, only charging sta- tions payable with Mercedes me Charge are taken into account when selecting the charg- ing station.

or # Activate All.

All charging stations known to the navigation system are taken into account when calculat-

ing routes with Electric Intelligence, regardless of the type of payment. It may be necessary to register with the pro- vider.

Switching the range monitor on or o The activated range monitoring assists with mes- sages on the driver and central display to ensure safe arrival at the destination. # SelectZ in the navigation module

(/ page 321). # Select Route. # Activate or deactivate Range Monitor.

To reach the destination with the condition of charge set by the driver, the range is perma- nently monitored when the option is switched on.

% This function is not available in all countries.

Displaying a route overview with charging station

1 Arrival time at charging stop, type of charging station

2 Charging stop shows the charging time rec- ommended by the navigation with Electric Intelligence as well as charge levels on arrival and onward journey for an optimal travel time

MBUX multimedia system 327

3 Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time

4 Searches for an additional charging station

You can in uence the route calculated by the nav- igation with Electric Intelligence using options1 and4. # Select one of the options.

Ignoring a charging station If you do not want to drive to the selected charg- ing station, it can be removed for the current route guidance. The navigation with Electric Intelli- gence tries to plan the best possible alternative charging station for the route. # Select1.

The expected charging power, the dynamic condition of charge display as well as the cur- rent condition of charge and the predicted charging target are displayed, for example.

# Select Ignore. # Select Ignore during this journey.

The charging station is removed from the cur- rent route.

% A er selecting Details, the detailed informa- tion about the charging station is displayed.

Adding a charging station If you want to drive to a charging station earlier on the route, for example, you can search for an additional charging station. If the charging station is suitable for the route, it will be accepted by the navigation with Electric Intelligence. # Select4. # Select a charging station. % You can also search for a charging station

using thew symbol on the digital map or next to Where to? .

Selecting a route type # SelectZ in the navigation module

(/ page 321). # Select Route.

The route is calculated as a fast route with a short journey time. Trailer mode is available if a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. If available, you can select online routes. Tra c announcements for the route are taken into account via Reroute Based on Trafficr.

% Trailer mode and online routes are not availa- ble in all countries and for all vehicles.

Activating a commuter route % A user pro le has been created and Allow

Destination Suggestions has been activated in the user options (/ page 313). Route guid- ance is not active.

# SelectZ in the navigation module. # Select Route. # Activate Activate Commuter Route.

The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. For the daily commuter route, tra c events on the route are also reported when driving with- out active route guidance.

# To select or delete a commuter route: selectStart or .

Avoiding or using route sections, e.g. highways or ferries # SelectZ in the navigation module. # Select Route.

328 MBUX multimedia system

# Select Avoid Options. # Activate or deactivate the avoid option.

Activating route guidance with augmented reality # SelectZ in the navigation module. # Select View. # Select Augmented Reality Video. # Activate or deactivate Augmented Reality

Video. The AR camera's video image is shown on the central display before a turning maneuver. The video image includes additional information.

Showing property information for route guidance with augmented reality Road guidance with augmented reality is activa- ted. # SelectZ in the navigation module. # Select View. # Select Augmented Reality Video.

# Activate Street Names and House Numbers. During route guidance, the activated options are shown as additional information in the camera image.

Using map functions

Multimedia system: 4

Increasing map scale # When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with

one nger on the central display. or # Move two ngers apart on the central display.

Decreasing map scale # Tap with two ngers on the central display. or # Move two ngers together on the central dis-

play.

Moving the map # When the map is displayed, swipe in any direc-

tion with one nger on the central display.

# To reset the map to the current vehicle posi- tion: select\ Center .

Selecting map orientation # Tap repeatedly on the compass symbol

on the map. The map orientations changes in this order: R The 3D map view is aligned to the direc-

tion of travel. R The 2D map view is aligned to the direc-

tion of travel. R The 2D map view is displayed so that north

is always at the top. R The map shows the complete route.

Using services

Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the

Mercedes me Portal.

MBUX multimedia system 329

R The vehicle is connected to a user account and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me R The service is available. R The service has been activated at an author-

ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Multimedia system: 4

Showing tra c information # SelectZ in the navigation module

(/ page 321). # Select View. # Select Map Symbols. # Activate Traffic Incidents and Free Flowing

Traffic. Tra c incidents, for example roadworks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages, are shown on the route.

The tra c delay is displayed for the current route. The smallest value for the display for tra c delays is a minute.

Displaying hazard warnings If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic Incidents option. # Set the option usingZ.

If the option is activated, all of the symbols are shown. If the option is deactivated, the symbols are only shown when there is a hazard warning.

The following hazards may be shown on the map: R Accidents and breakdowns R Slippery roads, fog, crosswinds and heavy rain R Hazards reported manually R Vehicle with active hazard warning light R Roadworks R Additional hazards (if available)

Displaying online map contents # SelectZ in the navigation module. # Select View. # Select Map Symbols. # Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather.

Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather symbols.

Parking service

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head- room clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be dam- aged. # Observe the signposted headroom clear-

ance.

330 MBUX multimedia system

# If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.

# Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

* NOTE Before selecting the parking option

The data is based on information provided by the respective service provider. Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the accuracy of the information provided relating to the parking garage/parking lot. # Always observe the local Information and

conditions.

% This service is not available in all countries. # SelectZ in the navigation module and

activate Parking. # Tap on j in the map. # Select a parking option.

The map shows the parking options in the vicinity.

The following information is displayed (if avail- able): R Destination address, distance from current

vehicle position and arrival time R Information on the parking garage/parking

lot For example, opening times, parking charges, current occupancy, maximum parking time, maximum access height. The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual circumstan- ces. R Available payment options (Mercedes pay,

coins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tari s R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at the parking

meter) R Services/facilities at the parking option R Telephone number

# Calculate the route (/ page 325).

Notes on the dashcam

* NOTE Before using the dashcam

You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the coun- try in which the dashcam is operated. There- fore, observe the legal requirements, in partic- ular the data protection regulations, in your country. For this reason, before using the dashcam inform yourself about the regulation details for the respective country. This function is not permitted in all countries. # Observe the country-speci c regula-

tions.

% To ensure secure operation, only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices.

MBUX multimedia system 331

% The le size and therefore the duration of sin- gle recording is limited by the limitations of the USB ash drive format. So FAT32 format- ted USB ash drives do not allow les larger than 4 GB, for example. When the le size is reached, the recording stops and you receive a noti cation.

% The following functions are available in the Gallery app: R Switching write protection on or o R Deleting video les

Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam

Requirements: R At least one USB device is connected with the

multimedia system .

Multimedia system: 4 5 Apps 5 Dashcam # Select the USB symbol. # Select the USB device.

% When USB devices contain multiple partitions, recorded video les are not always displayed in the recording list. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition.

Starting or stopping video recording with the dashcam

Requirements: R For recording and saving a video le: a USB

device is connected with the multimedia sys- tem. R The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Apps 5 Dashcam # If several USB devices are connected with the

multimedia system, select a USB device (/ page 332). If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when recording starts.

# To select a recording mode: select Loop Recording or Individual Recording. Loop Recording records several short video les. When the memory is full, recording is

continued automatically. In doing so, other les will be overwritten starting with the oldest le. Individual Recording stops recording when the memory limit is reached. An individual recording is automatically protected against being overwritten.

# To start: select Start Recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Please do not remove the storage medium. message appears. The video le is stored on the USB device.

# To end: select End Recording. % In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude

and latitude) are shown in the video image. For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater inaccuracies.

A report may appear in the following cases: R Individual Recording: the memory is full or

there are only a few minutes recording time

332 MBUX multimedia system

available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently. Change the USB device or delete a video le. R The camera is not functional, the Camera

Unavailable message appears. Have the camera checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R If the country border indication has been

switched on. R If an outdoor recording is started with the

camera app during a dashcam recording, the dashcam recording pauses and resumes auto- matically a er the camera recording is n- ished. A noti cation to this e ect is displayed.

Telephone Telephony

Notes on telephony

& WARNING Risk of distraction from operat- ing integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment inte- grated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the tra c situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

tra c situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road and tra c conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

& WARNING Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the tra c situation. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As a driver, only operate mobile commu-

nication devices when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

# As a vehicle occupant, use mobile com- munication devices only in the designa- ted area, e.g. in the rear passenger com- partment.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around

MBUX multimedia system 333

and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they cannot

be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not

protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart- ment.

Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 119) Bluetooth connection:

The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth pro le of the connected mobile phone. If the mobile phone supports all the fol- lowing Bluetooth pro les, the full range of fea- tures is available: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Pro le)

- The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.

R MAP (Message Access Pro le) - The mobile phone message functions can

be used on the multimedia system. R HFP (hands-free pro le)

- Wireless telephony is available on the mul- timedia system.

R SAP (SIM Access Pro le) - The car telephone has access to the SIM

card data and dials into the mobile phone network via the exterior antenna.

Irrespective of this, Bluetooth audio functionality can by used with any mobile radio unit.

For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manu- facturer's operating instructions. Network connection: The following cases can lead to the call being dis- connected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception sta-

tion, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the

network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into

the network with the second SIM card at the same time

The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice for improved speech quality. A require- ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice. Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may uctuate.

334 MBUX multimedia system

Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

Telephone menu overview

1 Bluetooth device name of the currently con- nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone

2 Bluetooth device name of the currently con- nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)

3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network 4 Battery status of the connected mobile phone

5 Options 6 Messages 7 Calls up my devices 8 Numerical pad 9 Starts contact search

Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel- ephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime-

dia system via Bluetooth. R Two mobile phones are connected with the

multimedia system via Bluetooth (two phone mode). - You can use all the functions of the multi-

media system with both mobile phones.

Connecting a mobile phone

Requirements: R Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone

(see the manufacturer's operating instruc- tions).

MBUX multimedia system 335

R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia sys- tem.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Phone 5Z 5 Devices 5 My Devices

Searching for a mobile phone # Select Connect New Device.

Connecting a mobile phone # Select a mobile phone.

A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If both codes match, con rm the code on the mobile phone.

Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.:

- R Accept a call - k End Call - Answering a call with a message

- i Conference - Accepting or rejecting a waiting call R Managing contacts, e.g.:

- Downloading mobile phone contacts - Managing the format of a contact's name - Deleting favorites R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.:

- Using the read-aloud function - Dictating a new message

Mercedes me app Mercedes me calls

Making a call via the overhead control panel

1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system)

Making a Mercedes me call

336 MBUX multimedia system

# Press me button1.

Making an emergency call # To open the cover of SOS button2, press it

brie y. # Press and hold SOS button3 for at least one

second.

If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.

Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 336). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general

information about the vehicle

You can nd information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from Mercedes-

Benz

Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 338).

Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center using the multimedia system

Requirements: R Access to a GSM network is available. R The contract partner's GSM network coverage

is available in the respective region. R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehi-

cle data can be transferred automatically.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Phone 5

# Call Mercedes me connect. A er con rmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown on the central display.

Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz customer center.

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center a er automatic accident or breakdown detection

Requirements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or break-

down situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on.

% This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown sit- uations under certain circumstances.

MBUX multimedia system 337

In the event an accident or breakdown is detec- ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. A er quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. # Select Call. R A er your agreement, or if the Mercedes

me connect service "Accident and Break- down Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 340). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center

takes your call and organizes the break- down and accident assistance.

You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident, an

automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls.

% In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear a er a delay in the event

of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.

% If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with Call Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be con rmed or declined. A er being declined, this will not be shown again.

Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage- ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You will then receive individual recom- mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multime- dia system reminds you a er a certain amount of

time that a service is due. A prompt appears ask- ing if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select Call.

A er your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer center takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to con rm the appoint- ment and if necessary consult about the details.

% If you select Call Later a er the service mes- sage appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time.

Transferred data during a Mercedes me call If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable targeted advice and an e cient service. The following requirements must be ful lled for the transfer of the data: R The vehicle is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is sup-

ported by the mobile phone network provider.

338 MBUX multimedia system

R The quality of the mobile connection is su - cient.

Multi-stage transfer depends on the following fac- tors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission tech-

nology. R The activated Mercedes me connect services. R The service selected in the voice control sys-

tem.

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activa- ted, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identi cation number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Con rmation of the data protection prompt R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system

R Telephone number of the communication plat- form installed in the vehicle

If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also trans- mitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data

If a call is made a er automatic accident or break- down detection using the multimedia system, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location

If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz customer center: R Current vehicle location

Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system a er the call is nished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services.

The incident-speci c data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz customer center and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz customer center. Please take note of the data pro- tection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recor- ded message immediately a er calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center. % The recorded message is not available in

every country.

Mercedes me connect

Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv- ices. You can use the following services via the multi- media system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me

button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system)

MBUX multimedia system 339

R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto- matic emergency call and SOS button)

The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break- down Management and the Mercedes-Benz emer- gency call center are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 336). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system (/ page 337). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, rst call the national emergency services using the stand- ard national emergency service telephone num- bers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 343). Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can nd these in your Mercedes me user account.

Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Por- tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Information on Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency

call system (/ page 343) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for- wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci- dent and Breakdown Management. Forward- ing the call is however not possible in all coun- tries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on

location and/or the towing away of the vehicle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter You may be charged for these services. R Addition to the emergency guide a er auto-

matic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 337)

In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur- ther vehicle data is sent which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Cen- ter and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance. R Addition to the Mercedes me connect service

Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, speci c wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes- Benz Customer Center for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.

340 MBUX multimedia system

% These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone cover- age, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the trans- ferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the informa- tion to appear in the multimedia system.

More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Por- tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data transferred during Mercedes me connect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con- nect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice con-

trol system R The activated Mercedes me connect services

You can nd out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can nd these in your Mercedes me user account.

Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu

When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and o ers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me

apps updated. You can call up the menu using Apps in the multi- media system. In the Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me

user account R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes

me user account and the vehicle R Calling up the Mercedes me services R Calling up apps such as, In-Car O ce or the

web browser depending on availability

Web browser overview

1 Search 2 To refresh/stop 3 Previous website 4 Options 5 Settings

MBUX multimedia system 341

% Under you have the following options: R Bookmarks R Browser History R Request Mobile Website R Entered URLs R Tabs

% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion.

Overview of smartphone integration

With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain functions on your mobile phone via the multime- dia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec- ted via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth

with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte- gration is only possible with an Internet connec- tion. The appropriate application must be down-

loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to the multimedia system via the USB port using a suitable cable. Apps for Smartphone Integration: R Apple CarPlay (wireless connection via Blue-

tooth also possible) R Android Auto (wireless connection via Blue-

tooth also possible)

% For safety reasons, the rst activation of Apple CarPlay or Android Auto on the multi- media system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary with the parking brake.

You can start Smartphone Integration using the My Devices menu. You can end Smartphone Integration via the My Devices or by disconnecting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia sys- tem. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting

the connection via the device manager or the connecting cable only when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehi- cle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly acces- sible. The following system information is transmitted: R So ware release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized)

The transfer of this data is used to optimize com- munication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identi er is randomly gen- erated. This has no connection to the vehicle identi ca- tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi- media system is reset (/ page 320). The following driving status data is transmitted: R Transmission position engaged R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling

and driving

342 MBUX multimedia system

R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster R Drive type

The transfer of this data is used to alter how con- tent is displayed to correspond to the driving sit- uation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction

The mobile phone uses this data to improve the accuracy of navigation, for example, when driving through a tunnel.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (eCall). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall

in no way replaces assistance provided from dial- ing 911. Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insu cient net- work coverage from the wireless service providers may result in an emergency call not being trans- mitted. eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes-Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the sys- tem relies on the transmission of data detailed in the Transmitted Data section that follows. To disable eCall, a customer must visit an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deac- tivate the vehicles communication module. Deactivation of this module prevents the activa- tion of any and all Mercedes me connect serv- ices. A er the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The vehicle must be switched on before an auto- matic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory.

% eCall can be deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is transferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system.

Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an acci- dent site in places that are di cult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically or manually. Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.

MBUX multimedia system 343

Triggering an automatic Mercedes-Benz emer- gency call

Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. R The starter battery is su ciently charged.

The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system trig- gers an emergency call automatically in the fol- lowing cases: R A er activation of the restraint systems such

as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices a er an accident R A er an automatically initiated emergency

stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist

The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted

to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers.

The SOS button in the overhead control panel ashes until the emergency call is nished.

It is not possible to immediately end an automatic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your

mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c

conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides

whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance

is sent to the vehicle immediately.

Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # To use the SOS button in the overhead con-

trol panel: press the SOS button at least one second long (/ page 336).

or # To use voice control: use the voice commands

of the MBUX Voice Assistant. The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted

to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c

conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides

whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.

344 MBUX multimedia system

If no connection can be made to the emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the central display. # Dial the local emergency number on your

mobile phone.

Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # Select on the multifunction steering

wheel. Depress button for several seconds.

Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

In the event of an automatic or manual emergency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few hundred

meters before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identi cation number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the

vehicle

R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not R Whether the emergency call was initiated

manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system

Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBUSA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-MERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clari cation purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour a er the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be deter-

mined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants

can be established.

MBUX multimedia system 345

Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu

Symbol Designation Function

6 Play Select to start or continue playback.

8 Rest Select to pause the playback.

: Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated.

9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order.

/ Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.

Additional options Select to show additional options.

5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.).

Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

346 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings Select to make settings.

Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode.

The following functions and settings are available in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with

the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth) R Playing back audio or video les

MBUX multimedia system 347

Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu

Symbol Designation Function

Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

/ Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.

Z Settings Select to have further options shown. The setting options are country-dependent.

HD HD radio Select to switch the HD Radio function on or o . This function is not available in all countries.

4 Station list Select to have the station list shown.

Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

Additional functions of TuneIn Radio % A relatively large volume of data can be trans-

mitted when using TuneIn Radio.

348 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account

Favourites Select during playback to save the station cur- rently set as a favorite.

6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback.

4 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio sta- tion.

Additional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM satellite radio o ers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% com- mercial-free music, sports, news and entertain- ment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio employs a eet of high-performance satellites to

broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is availa- ble for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

% Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.

MBUX multimedia system 349

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate child safety lock to lock channels

with adult content R Set alarm programming for music and sport

alerts R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seam-

lessly

6 Play Select to start or continue playback.

8 Rest Select to pause the playback.

Depending on the frequency band selected, di er- ent functions are available to you. Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.

Calling up TuneIn Radio

Requirements: R There is a user account at https://

www.mercedes.me. R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user

account. R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the

Mercedes me portal.

R The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. R A fast Internet connection for data transmis-

sion free of interference.

% Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.

350 MBUX multimedia system

% The functions and services are country- dependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio.

The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing.

% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.

Setting up satellite radio

Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider has

been completed. R If registration is not included when purchasing

the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5Z

# Select Service Information. The service information screen appears show- ing the radio ID and the current subscription status.

# Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service sta 's instructions.

The activation process may take up to ten minutes.

% You can also have the satellite service activa- ted online. To do so, please visit https:// www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

Music and sport alerts

Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5Z 5 Alerts

Setting music and sport alerts This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of

matches in the live program.

Activating messages for a category # Select a category and activateD.

Adding messages for a category # Select a category and add a message W. # Select Artist Alerts or Song Alerts in the dia-

log window. The message is set for the activated O track and artist. If a match is found, a prompt

MBUX multimedia system 351

appears asking whether you wish to change to the station.

Deleting messages in a category # Select a category, mark the desired messages

and deleteE. or # Do not mark any messages and delete all

entriesE.

Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu

The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can nd out which sound system is installed in your

vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Standard sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer:

- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume:

- Automatic adjustment

Burmester surround sound system and Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer:

- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seat (Burmester high-end 3D surround

sound system only) R Sound pro les R Volume:

- Automatic adjustment

352 MBUX multimedia system

ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- play

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the driver display informs you of the next regular service due date. Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date will be displayed. You can hide this service display using theG back button on the le -hand side of the steering wheel. You can obtain information concerning the servic- ing of your vehicle from a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter.

Displaying the service due date

Driver display: 4 Service The next service due date is displayed.

# To exit the display: press the back button G on the le -hand side of the steering wheel.

Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the driver display (/ page 287).

Information on regular maintenance work

* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates

Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # Adhere to the prescribed service inter-

vals. # Always have the prescribed maintenance

work carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

* NOTE Irreparable damage to the high-volt- age battery due to maintenance work not being carried out

The high-voltage battery is subject to wear. Maintenance work which is not carried out in time can lead to irreparable damage to the high-voltage battery. # Always observe the warning messages

about the high-voltage battery and immediately consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Notes on special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on nor- mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more o en than speci- ed if the vehicle is operated under arduous con-

ditions or increased loads. This is the case for fre- quent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces, for example.

Maintenance and care 353

In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air lter changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehi- cle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a quali ed special- ist workshop. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsibil- ity as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more o en than speci ed based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads.

Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can cal- culate the service due date only when the battery is connected. # Display and note down the service due date

on the driver display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 353).

Engine compartment Notes on the hood

Only the specialist personnel of a quali ed spe- cialist workshop should open the hood. Access by the customer is not permitted. To open the hood, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked

The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is

locked.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood

The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement.

# Do not open or close the hood if there is a person in the hood's range of move- ment.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to overheated vehicle

If you open the hood in the event of an over- heated vehicle or re in the engine compart- ment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other

escaping hot operating uids. # In the event of overheating or re in the

engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the re service.

# Allow the overheated vehicle to cool down rst if you need to open the hood.

354 Maintenance and care

& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched o . Observe the following if you must open the hood: # Switch o the vehicle. # Never touch the danger zones surround-

ing moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

# Remove jewelery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away

from moving parts.

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open

If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage.

# Always switch o the windshield wipers and the vehicle rst if you need to open the hood.

Notes on the coolant level

Checking or re lling coolant should be carried out only by the trained personnel of a quali ed spe- cialist workshop. Access by the customer is not permitted. To check or re ll coolant, use a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot cool- ant

If you open the cap when the drive system is at operating temperature, you may scald your- self. # Allow the vehicle to cool before opening

the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective

gloves and protective eyewear.

# To release the pressure, slowly open the cap.

Keeping the air-water duct free # Keep the area between the hood and the

windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves.

Adding washer uid to the windshield washer system

& WARNING Risk of re and injury from windshield washer concentrate

Windshield washer concentrate is highly am- mable. # Avoid re, open ames, smoking and the

creation of sparks when using windshield washer concentrate.

Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked.

Maintenance and care 355

# Press on the back area of washer uid ap 1. Washer uid ap1 will open.

# Add washer uid. # Washer uid ap1 will close. % Further information about the windshield

washer uid (/ page 416)

Cleaning and care Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash

& WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking e ect a er washing the vehicle

The braking e ect is reduced a er washing the vehicle. # A er the vehicle has been washed, brake

carefully while paying attention to the tra c conditions until the braking e ect has been fully restored.

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situa- tions: # During towing # In a car wash

* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash # Before driving into a car wash make sure

that the car wash is suitable for the vehi- cle dimensions.

# Ensure there is su cient ground clear- ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.

# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is su cient.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva-

ted. R The HOLD function is switched o .

356 Maintenance and care

R The surround view camera or the rear view camera is switched o . R The vehicle is locked and the door handles

retracted. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are com-

pletely closed. R The blower for the ventilation and heating is

switched o . R The windshield wiper switch is in position g. R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of

20 (6 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate or a door could open unintention- ally. R For car washes with a conveyor system:

- Neutral i is engaged. - The vehicle is locked from inside. R Do not make any hand movements in the area

of the overhead control panel or deactivate (/ page 316) the Sliding Sunroof and Roller Sunblind option in the settings for the MBUX interior assistant.

% If, a er the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.

Notes on using a power washer

& WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles

The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex- pectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with round-

spray nozzles. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts

replaced immediately.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol- lowing when using a power washer: R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of

10 (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the tailgate or a door could open unintention- ally.

R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative foil: Parts of your

vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140F (60C). R Observe the information on the correct dis-

tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper- ating instructions. R Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer

directly at sensitive parts, such as tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sources and ventilation slits.

Washing the vehicle by hand

Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.

Maintenance and care 357

# Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a so car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.

# Carefully hose the vehicle o with water and dry using a chamois.

% Observe the notes on the care of vehicle parts (/ page 359).

Notes on paintwork/matte nish paintwork care

To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes:

Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and

rinse o the treated areas a erwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse o

a erwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by

rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro- leum ether or lighter uid. R Coolant and brake uid: remove with a damp

cloth and clean water.

R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-

als. Only have lm attached to the bumper at a quali ed specialist workshop. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.

Matte nish R Only use care products approved for

Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-

als. Only have lm attached to the bumper at a quali ed specialist workshop. R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the

latest engineering standards. R Do not use car wash program with a nal hot

wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, bu ng or polishing

products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.

In the event of paintwork damage: R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a

quali ed specialist workshop.

R Make sure the radar sensors function (/ page 217).

Notes on cleaning decorative foils

Observe the notes on matte nish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte nish paint- work care" (/ page 358). They also apply to matte decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage.

Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild

cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible,

whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is oth- erwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. R If there is dirt on the nish or if the decorative

foil is dull: Use the Paint Cleaner recommen- ded and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

358 Maintenance and care

R Insect remains: Soak with insect remover and rinse o the treated areas a erwards. R Bird droppings: Soak with water and rinse o

a erwards. R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped

vehicle with a so , absorbent cloth a er every car wash.

Avoiding damage to the decorative foil R The service life and color of decorative foils

are impaired by: - Sunlight - Temperature, e.g. hot air blower - Weather conditions - Stone chippings and dirt - Chemical cleaning agents - Oily products R Do not use polish on matte decorative foil.

Polishing will have the e ect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. R Do not treat matte or structured decorative

foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas a ected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a quali ed specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical di er- ences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil a er removing a decorative foil. % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car-

ried out at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. in an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Notes on care of vehicle parts

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the wind- shield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned

If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

# Always switch o the windshield wipers and the drive system before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehicle parts:

Wheels and rims R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to

remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and

brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes a er cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out.

Windows R Clean the windows inside and outside with a

damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom- mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-

based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.

Maintenance and care 359

% A er changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windshield thoroughly with cleaning agents recommen- ded for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or blinding spots.

% Remove external fogging or dirt on the wind- shield in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or not available (/ page 217).

Wiper blades R Move the wiper arms into the replacement

position (/ page 157). R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the

wiper blades with a damp cloth.

% Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating can leave residues on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too o en.

Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild

cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.

R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.

Vehicle socket (high-voltage battery) R Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the

vehicle socket. R Do not use power washers or cleaning agents,

such as soap.

Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear bump-

ers with a so cloth and car shampoo (/ page 217). R When using a power washer, maintain a mini-

mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).

Rear view camera and surround view camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia

system (/ page 266). R Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the

camera lens. R Do not use a power washer.

Notes on care of the interior

& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking o a er the use of solvent-based care products

Care and cleaning products containing sol- vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning products

containing solvents to clean the cockpit.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts

Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol- lowing notes on cleaning and care:

360 Maintenance and care

Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 176F

(80C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.

Display R Switch o the display and let it cool down. R Clean the surface carefully with a micro ber

cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT- LCD). R Do not use any other agents.

Head-up Display R Clean with a so , non-static, lint-free cloth. R Do not use cleaning agents.

Plastic trim R Clean with a damp micro ber cloth. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-

ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-

als.

R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact with the plastic trim.

Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a micro ber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a damp

cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-

ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, pol-

ishes or waxes.

Headliner R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.

Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recom-

mended for Mercedes-Benz.

Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINA- MICA

* NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners # Do not use solvent-based cleaning

agents such as tar remover or wheel

cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the nish.

R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-

ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that

has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. R Do not use a micro ber cloth.

% Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, such as di erences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color di erences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. What's more, leather is subject to a natural aging process during which the surface properties change.

Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a

dry cloth.

Maintenance and care 361

R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. R Do not use a micro ber cloth.

% Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear marks and aging dam- age and thus signi cantly extends its life span. Clothing that can leave stains, e.g. jeans, can leave discoloration on the leather.

DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a micro ber cloth.

Imitation leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. R Do not use a micro ber cloth.

362 Maintenance and care

Emergency Removing the safety vest

The safety vests are located in stowage spaces in the front door.

# Take the safety vest bag out of stowage space 1.

# Open the safety vest bag and pull out the safety vest.

% Safety vests can also be stored in the rear door stowage spaces.

1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry clean 7 This is a class 2 vest

The requirements de ned by the legal standard are only ful lled in the following cases: R The safety vest is the correct size R The safety vest is fully closed whilst being

worn

Replace the safety vest in the following cases: R The re ective strips are damaged or dirt on

the re ective strips can no longer be removed R The maximum number of washes is exceeded R the uorescence has faded

Warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

# Open the cargo compartment oor. # Remove warning triangle1.

Breakdown assistance 363

Setting up the warning triangle

# Fold side re ectors1 upwards to form a tri- angle and attach at the top using upper press- stud2.

# Fold legs3 down and out to the side.

First-aid kit (so sided)

First-aid kit (so sided)1 is located on the le - hand side of the trunk when delivered.

Flat tire Notes on at tires

& WARNING Risk of accident due to a at tire

A at tire severely a ects the driving charac- teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle.

Tires without run- at characteristics: # Do not drive with a at tire. # Change the at tire immediately with an

emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a quali ed special- ist workshop.

Tires with run- at characteristics: # Observe the information and warning

notes on MOExtended tires (run- at tires).

In the event of a at tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is possible

to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run- at tires) (/ page 365). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the

tire so that it is possible to continue the jour- ney for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 366).

364 Breakdown assistance

R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a break- down (/ page 336). R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 404).

% The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries.

Notes on MOExtended tires (run- at tires)

& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode

When driving in emergency mode the handling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the speci ed maximum

speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving

maneuvers as well as driving over obsta- cles (curbs, pot holes, o -road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.

# Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice:

R Banging noise R Vehicle vibration R Smoke which smells like rubber R Continuous ESP intervention R Cracks in the tire side walls # A er driving in emergency mode, have

the rims checked by a quali ed specialist workshop with regard to their further use.

# The defective tire must be replaced in every case.

With MOExtended tires (run- at tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How- ever, the tire a ected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-

tion with an activated tire pressure monitoring system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows: R Check the tire for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes.

Driving distance possible in emergency mode a er the pressure loss warning: Load condition Driving distance possi-

ble in emergency mode

Partially laden 50 miles (80 km)

Fully laden 19 miles (30 km)

The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has gone at and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a standard tire as a temporary measure.

Breakdown assistance 365

TIREFIT kit storage location

The TIREFIT kit is located under the cargo com- partment oor.

1 Tire sealant bottle 2 Tire in ation compressor

Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the cargo com- partment oor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

Requirements: R Tire sealant bottle and tire in ation compres-

sor (/ page 366) R TIREFIT sticker R Gloves

You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora- tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 F (-20 C).

& WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant

The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases: R There are large cuts or punctures in the

tire (larger than damage previously men- tioned) R The wheel rims have been damaged R A er journeys with very low tire pressure

or with at tires

# Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant

The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita- tion. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse o the tire sealant from your skin

immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor-

oughly rinse out the eyes using clean water.

# If tire sealant has been swallowed, imme- diately rinse out the mouth thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.

366 Breakdown assistance

# Change out of any clothes contaminated with tire sealant immediately.

# If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately.

* NOTE Overheating due to the tire in ation compressor running too long

# Do not run the tire in ation compressor for longer than ten minutes without inter- ruption.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire in ation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a quali ed specialist workshop every ve years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which have

entered the tire.

# A x part1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's eld of vision.

# A x part2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the faulty tire.

# Pull plug4 with the cable and hose5 out of the tire in ation compressor housing.

# Push the plug of hose5 into ange6 of tire sealant bottle1 until the plug engages.

# Place tire sealant bottle1 head downwards into recess2 of the tire in ation compressor.

Breakdown assistance 367

# Remove the valve cap from valve7 on the faulty tire.

# Screw lling hose8 onto valve7. # Insert plug4 into a 12 V socket in your vehi-

cle. # Switch on the vehicle. # Switch on the tire in ation compressor using

On/O switch3. The tire is in ated. First, tire sealant is pum- ped into the tire. The pressure may brie y rise to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch o the tire in ation compressor during this phase!

# Let the tire in ation compressor run for a max- imum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pres- sure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the a ected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera- ble to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy- lene.

If, a er ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch o the tire in ation compressor. # Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the

faulty tire.

Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the lling hose. # Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for

approximately 33 (10 m).

# Pump up the tire again. A er a maximum of ten minutes the tire pres- sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the speci ed tire pressure not being achieved

If the speci ed tire pressure is not achieved a er the speci ed time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking characteristics as well as the driv- ing characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

If, a er ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch o the tire in ation compressor. # Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the

faulty tire.

368 Breakdown assistance

& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires

A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed limit

with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.

# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h).

* NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire seal- ant

A er use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the lling hose. # Therefore, place the lling hose in the

plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre- sponsible disposal

Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of

professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

# Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire in a- tion compressor.

# Pull away immediately. # Stop driving a er approximately ten minutes

and check the tire pressure using the tire in ation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the speci ed tire pressure not being attained

If the speci ed tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance.

The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

In cases such as the one mentioned above, con- tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the Bpillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the socket ap for values.

# To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire in ation compressor.

Breakdown assistance 369

# To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button1 next to manometer2.

# When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire.

# Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire in a- tion compressor. The lling hose stays on the tire sealant bottle.

# Drive to the nearest quali ed specialist work- shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and lling hose replaced there.

Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery

& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec- trostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge

that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery.

The highly ammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assis- tance.

& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid

Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or

clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases.

# Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid o thor-

oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat- teries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. #

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a quali ed specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

370 Breakdown assistance

If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con- tact a quali ed specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open ames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes o with clean water. Consult a doctor if neces- sary. Wear safety glasses.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

If you do not want to use the vehicle for a long period of time, consult a quali ed specialist work- shop.

Notes on the high-voltage battery

& DANGER Risk of explosion from excessive internal pressure of the high-voltage bat- tery

Flammable gas may escape and ignite in the event of a vehicle re. # Stop the charging process immediately

in case of unusual odors, smoke or burn marks.

# Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at a su cient distance.

# Call the re brigade.

Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage battery (/ page 195).

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open ames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes o with clean water. Consult a doctor if neces- sary.

Breakdown assistance 371

Wear safety glasses.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery # Only have starting assistance provided by a

quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

# Only have the battery charged at a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Replacing the 12 V battery # Only have the battery replaced at a quali ed

specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Tow starting or towing away Overview of the permitted towing methods

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situa- tions: # During towing # In a car wash

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems. If you notice that the vehicle has lost coolant, do not have it towed away. Have the vehicle transpor- ted instead.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow- ing away incorrectly

# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

372 Breakdown assistance

Vehicles with rear wheel drive Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground

Yes, maximum 30 miles (50 km) at 30 mph (50 km/h), only forwards with the driver in the cockpit.

Front axle raised

No

Rear axle raised

Yes, maximum 30 miles (50 km) at 30 mph (50 km/h)

4MATIC vehicles Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground

Yes, maximum 30 miles (50 km) at 30 mph (50 km/h), only forwards with the driver in the cockpit.

Front axle raised

No

Rear axle raised

No

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground # Observe the notes on the permitted towing

methods (/ page 372). # Make sure that the 12 V battery is connected

and charged.

Observe the following points when the 12 V bat- tery is disconnected or discharged: R The drive system cannot be started R The electric parking brake cannot be released

or applied R The transmission cannot be shi ed to position

i or j

In the following situations, only transporting the vehicle is permitted: R If the transmission cannot be shi ed to i R If the 12 V battery is disconnected or dis-

charged R If the display in the instrument cluster is not

working R If the Towing Not Permitted See Oper-

ator's Manual message is displayed

R If the + Check Coolant Level See Opera- tor's Manual message is displayed R If the d Stop Switch Engine Off message

is displayed # In such cases, transport the vehicle

(/ page 375).

* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis- tances

The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distan- ces. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)

must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km)

must not be exceeded.

Breakdown assistance 373

& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may

swerve or rollover. # Before tow-starting or towing away,

check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass.

If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the per- missible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of

the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identi- cation plate (/ page 412).

Towing away the vehicle # Install the towing eye (/ page 378).

# Fasten the towing device.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec- tion of the tow bar

# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.

# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 80).

# Do not activate the HOLD function. # Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 101). # Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 246). # Shi the transmission to position i. # Release the electric parking brake. # Remain in the cockpit during towing and

observe the display messages. # Do not switch o the vehicle while it is being

towed. # Do not open the driver's door or front

passenger door; the transmission will other- wise automatically shi to j.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process

Safety-related functions are limited or no lon- ger available in the following situations: R The vehicle is switched o . R The brake system or power steering sys-

tem is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electri-

cal system is malfunctioning. # In such cases, do not tow the vehicle.

# Transport the vehicle (/ page 375).

* NOTE Damage to the drive system due to incorrect towing

The vehicle may not be towed in the following situations: R The vehicle is switched o . R The brake system or power steering sys-

tem is malfunctioning.

374 Breakdown assistance

R The energy supply or the on-board electri- cal system is malfunctioning.

# In such cases, do not tow the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power

If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly.

Loading the vehicle for transport

Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The vehicle is switched o . R The driver's display is in the initial state with

no menus open (/ page 287). Transport is also possible with a warning message visible. R The 12 V battery is charged.

# If necessary, set the system language (/ page 320).

# Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 373).

# Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.

# Switch on the power supply (/ page 180). # Shi the transmission to position i. % The transmission may be locked in position

j in the event of damage to the electrics. To shi to i, provide the on-board electrical system with power (/ page 372).

* NOTE Possible damage to the vehicle when loading or unloading

When loading or unloading, the vehicle must be raised to transport level. If the transport settings are not shown or the Vehicle Not Ready for Loading message is displayed, the vehicle may not be loaded or unloaded.

# If required, raise the vehicle to transport level again.

# A vehicle that cannot be raised to trans- port level may not be loaded or unloaded using a ramp. Consult a quali ed special- ist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to activa- ted transport level

If the vehicle is raised to transport level, driv- ing and driving safety systems have only limi- ted availability and the view from the vehicle is restricted.

Breakdown assistance 375

Driving safety is severely restricted and there is a risk of an accident! # Do not use transport level in normal road

operation. # Only activate and use transport level to

load the vehicle and when not on public roads.

# Ensure that no persons or obstacles are located in the area surrounding the vehi- cle.

Raising the vehicle to transport level # Press theG button for at least ve sec-

onds. # Immediately press and hold the a button

for at least one second. The For Transport Level Switch On Vehicle message is displayed.

# Switch on the vehicle (/ page 181). The transport settings are displayed.

# Swipe downward to select Transport Level and press a. The vehicle is raised and the Vehicle rais- ing...... Do not drive onto ramp yet message is displayed for 5 seconds. The raising process can last up to 60 seconds and can be can- celed with theG button.

# When raising, do not switch o the vehicle.

While the vehicle is being raised, you can maneu- ver at a maximum speed of 25 mph (40 km/h).

# Before loading the vehicle, wait until transport level has been reached and the Transport Level status is shown.

% If the vehicle is raised to transport level, the transport settings will continue to be shown even a er a restart. Operation of the driver's display is meanwhile restricted.

When the vehicle is at transport level, it is lowered again in the following situations: R When driven faster than 25 mph (40 km/h). R The 12 V battery is discharged.

The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active level.

Transporting the vehicle # Load the vehicle onto the transporter.

376 Breakdown assistance

# Shi the transmission to position j. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the

vehicle against rolling away. # Switch o the vehicle and the power supply. # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

4MATIC vehicles

# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle

# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi- cle.

Unloading the vehicle # Make sure that the vehicle is raised to trans-

port level before unloading (/ page 259).

Lowering the vehicle a er unloading # Switch on the power supply. # Switch on the vehicle. # Swipe upward in the transport settings to

select Standard Level and press a. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active level and the Lowering Vehicle mes- sage is displayed.

# A er the vehicle has been lowered, press the G button for at least two seconds. The transport settings are closed.

Towing eye storage location

Towing eye1 is located under the trunk oor.

Breakdown assistance 377

Installing and removing the towing eye

# Press cover1 at top2 inwards and remove.

# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.

# Make sure that cover1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incor- rect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch

When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process.

# Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow start the vehicle.

# Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery.

Tow-starting the vehicle # If the drive system does not start, have the

vehicle transported to a quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

# The drive system cannot be started by tow- starting the vehicle. Do not perform any attempts to tow-start the vehicle.

Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- age, the electric line could be overloaded.

378 Breakdown assistance

This could result in a re. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci-

ed new fuses containing the correct amperage.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses

Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their function- ality may be signi cantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved

by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and the label. The fuse ratings and further infor- mation to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the rear passenger compartment (/ page 380).

* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture

Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure

that no moisture can enter the fuse box. # When closing the fuse box, make sure

that the seal of the lid is positioned cor- rectly on the fuse box.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and recti ed at a quali ed specialist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched o . R The vehicle is switched o .

The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit

(/ page 379)

R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 379) R Fuse box in the rear passenger compartment

(/ page 380)

Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit R Observe the notes on electrical fuses

(/ page 378).

The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover. # To open and close it, consult an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell

Requirements: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses

(/ page 378).

Right-hand drive vehicles: the fuse box is on the le side.

Breakdown assistance 379

# To open the fuse box: Remove cover1. # To close the fuse box: Reinsert cover1.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the rear passenger compartment

Requirements: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses

(/ page 378).

The fuse box is under the seat on the right side of the vehicle. # Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

for further information.

380 Breakdown assistance

Notes on noise or unusual handling characteris- tics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is malfunctioning, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires

& WARNING Risk of injury through damaged tires

Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of

damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

& WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insu cient tire tread

Insu cient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the

tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.

Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: in (3 mm) R M+S tires: in (4 mm) # For safety reasons, replace the tires

before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels regu- larly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving o - road: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 383).

R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. R Check the valve caps. R Visual check of the tire tread depth and the

tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is in (3 mm) and for winter tires in (4 mm).

Six marks1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tire tread depth of approximately in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

Wheels and tires 381

Notes on snow chains

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rectly installed snow chains

If you have installed snow chains on the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. # Never install snow chains on the front

wheels. # Only install snow chains on the rear

wheels in pairs.

* NOTE Damage to components of the vehi- cle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains

If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo- nents of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only mount snow chains to the rear

wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.

Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain

wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain infor- mation about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that

have been speci cally approved for your vehi- cle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R Comply with the installation instructions of the

snow chain manufacturer. R If snow chains are installed, the maximum per-

missible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do not

use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. R Vehicles with level control: If snow chains are

installed, only drive at raised vehicle level (/ page 259). R Vehicles with rear axle steering: If snow chains

are installed, only drive with snow chain mode active (/ page 382).

% You can deactivate ESP to pull away (/ page 221). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.

Activating or deactivating snow chain mode Multimedia system: 4 5 5y

# Activate or deactivate Snow Chain Mode.

When the function is active, the vehicle behaves as if snow chains were mounted. For example, the maximum steering movement of the rear wheels is limited. Additionally, parts of the driving and driving safety systems are not available when snow chain mode is active.

382 Wheels and tires

Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insu - cient or excessive tire pressure

Underin ated or overin ated tires pose in par- ticular the following risks: R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or

unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the

steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.

# Comply with the recommended tire pres- sures and check the tire pressure of all tires, including the spare wheel, regu- larly: R Monthly R When the load changes R Before embarking on a longer journey

R If operating conditions change, e.g. o - road driving

# Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary.

Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely a ect driving characteristics and

thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to too low a tire pressure

Tires with pressure that is too low can over- heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also su er from irregular wear, which can signi cantly impair the brak- ing properties and the handling characteris- tics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressure.

Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire malfunctions as a result of overheating

R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Increased energy consumption

& WARNING Risk of accident due to too high a tire pressure

Tires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also su er from irregular wear, which can signi cantly impair the brak- ing properties and the handling characteris- tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures.

Tire pressure which is too high can cause: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage

Wheels and tires 383

& WARNING Risk of accident due to repea- ted pressure drop in the tires

The wheels, valves or tires could be damaged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting. # Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Check whether the tire has a puncture or

the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage,

contact a quali ed specialist workshop.

You can nd information on tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the

Bpillar of your vehicle (/ page 388). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the socket

ap (/ page 384).

Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 394). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not

permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pres- sure. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires out

of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: You can also see the tire pressure in the driver's display. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can a ect the ride comfort.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuita- ble accessories on tire valves

If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and

malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve

caps speci cally approved by Mercedes- Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the socket ap. % The data shown in the images is example

data.

384 Wheels and tires

The tire pressure table shows the recommended tire pressure for all tires approved for this vehicle. The recommended tire pressures apply for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. load- ing and/or speed of the vehicle. If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for those tire sizes. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are de ned in the table for di erent num- bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may di er from this.

Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diam- eter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 395). Be sure to also observe the following further rela- ted subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 383) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 388)

R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 394)

Checking the tire pressure manually # Read the tire pressure recommended for the

current operating conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pres- sure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.

# Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked.

# Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.

# Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom-

mended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.

# If the tire pressure is higher than the recom- mended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen. Then, check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge.

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve.

Wheels and tires 385

Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 383) R Tire pressure table (/ page 384) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 388)

Tire pressure monitoring system

Function of the tire pressure monitoring system

& DANGER Risk of accident due to incorrect tire pressure

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and in ated to the in ation pressure recommen- ded by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehi- cle placard or tire in ation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a di erent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire in ation pressure label, you should deter- mine the proper tire in ation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- sure telltale when one or more of your tires is signi cantly under-in ated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and in ate them to the proper pres- sure. Driving on a signi cantly under-in ated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-in ation also reduces fuel e ciency and tire tread life, and may a ect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- ers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-in ation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system

detects a malfunction, the telltale will ash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- tions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear on the driver display. If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (/ page 480) or the h warning lamp in the driver display (/ page 498). The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pres-

386 Wheels and tires

sure to the recommended cold tire pressure suita- ble for the operating situation. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem will automatically update the new reference values a er you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val- ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem manually (/ page 387).

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrect reference values were taught in R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign

object penetrating the tire, for example R There is a malfunction caused by another

radio signal source

Checking the tire pressure with the tire pressure monitoring system

Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on.

Driver's display: 4 5 Service # Press a to con rm.

One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure of each wheel:

R Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes.: current values are not yet known to the system. The pressure/tempera- ture values of each tire are displayed as soon as they are known to the system. R Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in

process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being monitored.

# Compare the current tire pressure with the recommended tire pressure for the current operating condition (/ page 384). Addition- ally, observe the notes on cold tires (/ page 383).

% The values displayed on the driver display may deviate from those of the tire pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tire pressure value indicated by a tire pressure gauge are higher than those shown on the driver display.

Bear in mind the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 383)

Restarting the tire pressure monitoring system

Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly

set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels (/ page 383).

Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed.

Wheels and tires 387

R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed.

Driver's display: 4 5 Service # Select Tire Pressure and con rm with a. # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the

steering wheel. The Use current pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the driver's dis- play.

# Select Yes and con rm the restart with a. The Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted message is shown in the driver's display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out. A er you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the speci ed range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If the tire pressure levels are not within the speci ed range, the Please Correct Tire Pres- sure message appears.

Bear in mind the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 383)

Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information placard

& WARNING Risk of accident from overloa- ded tires

Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris- tics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the

permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding

the maximum load.

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.

1 Tire and Loading Information placard

388 Wheels and tires

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the following information: R Maximum number of seats2 according to

the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle.

R Maximum permissible load3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. R Recommended tire pressure1 for cold tires.

The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads

on the vehicle identi cation plate (/ page 412). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres-

sure table (/ page 384).

Further related subjects: R Determining the maximum permissible load

(/ page 389) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 383).

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pursuant to

the "National Tra c and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # (1): Locate the statement The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicle's placard.

# (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

# (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

# (4): The resulting gure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be ve 150 lb pas- sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa- ble cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

# (5): Determine the combined weight of lug- gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the availa- ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula- ted in Step 4.

Wheels and tires 389

# (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

% Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer- hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any ques- tions about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Even if you have calculated the total load carefully, you should still make sure that the maximum per- missible gross weight and the maximum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not excee- ded. Details can be found on the vehicle identi - cation plate.

# Have your loaded vehicle including driver, occupants and load weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identi cation plate.

Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the maxi-

mum load (/ page 390) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 388) R Tire pressure table (/ page 384) R Vehicle identi cation plate (/ page 412)

Calculation example for determining the maximum load

The following table shows examples of how to cal- culate total and load capacities with varying seat- ing con gurations and di erent numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 388). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.

Step 1

Example 1 Example 2

Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

390 Wheels and tires

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2

Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occu- pants)

5 1

Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3

Front: 1

Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)

Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2

Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information plac- ard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg)

Wheels and tires 391

Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling

1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN)

Tire Identi cation Number 3 Maximum tire load (/ page 394) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 394)

5 Manufacturer 6 Tire characteristics (/ page 395) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,

speed rating and load index (/ page 395) 8 Tire name

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Tire Quality Grading

In accordance with the US Department of Trans- portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three per- formance factors:

1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

% The classi cation is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated.

Tread wear grade The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci ed govern- ment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2\) times as

392 Wheels and tires

well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signi cantly from the norm due to var- iations in driving habits, service practices and dif- ferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction grade

& DANGER Risk of accident due to inade- quate traction

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. # Always adapt your driving style and drive

at a speed to suit the prevailing tra c and weather conditions.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin

# Avoid wheelspin.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on speci ed govern- ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature grade

& WARNING Risk of accident from tire over- heating and tire failure

Excessive speed, underin ation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possi- ble tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Regularly check the pressure of all the

tires. # Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci ed indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces- sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perform- ance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN)

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manu- facturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced.

Wheels and tires 393

% The data shown in the image is example data. The TIN is a unique identi cation number to iden- tify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire sym-

bol marks1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identi cation code: manufac-

turer identi cation code2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 399). R Tire size: identi er3 describes the tire size. R Tire type code: tire type code4 can be used

by the manufacturer as a code to describe speci c characteristics of the tire. R Manufacturing date: manufacturing date5

provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the cal- endar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008).

Information on the maximum tire load

% The data shown in the image is example data. Maximum tire load1 is the maximum permissi- ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci- ed load limit. The maximum permissible load can

be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (/ page 388).

Speci cations for maximum tire pressure

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Never exceed maximum tire pressure1 speci- ed for the tire. Always observe the recommen-

ded tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (/ page 384).

394 Wheels and tires

Information on tire characteristics

% The data shown in the image is example data. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall1 and under tire tread2.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed- ing the speci ed tire load-bearing capa- city or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the speci ed tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire dam- age and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed

rating required for your vehicle.

1 First letter(s) 2 Nominal tire width in millimeters 3 Aspect ratio in % 4 Tire code 5 Rim diameter 6 Load-bearing index 7 Speed rating 8 Load index

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any quali ed specialist workshop.

Wheels and tires 395

First letter(s)1: R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to

European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US

manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu-

facturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with

high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.

Aspect ratio3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in percent (tire height divided by tire width).

Tire code4 (tire type): R "R" radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias belted tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above

149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)

Rim diameter5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim ange). The rim diameter is speci ed in inches (in).

Load-bearing index6: Numerical code that speci es the maximum load- bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corresponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of your vehi- cle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci ed load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and

Loading Information placard (/ page 388) R Maximum tire load (/ page 394) R Load index

Speed rating7: Speci es the approved maximum speed of the tire.

% An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).

Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Summer tires Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

396 Wheels and tires

Index Speed rating

ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR1 over 149 mph (240 km/h)

R Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). R If your tire code4 includes "ZR" and there is

no speed rating7, nd out what the maxi- mum speed is from the tire manufacturer. R If load-bearing index6 and speed rating7

are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To nd out the maximum speed, ask the tire man-

ufacturer.

All-weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating

Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

Winter tires bear the i snow ake symbol and ful ll the requirements of the Rubber Manufactur- ers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow.

Load index8: R No speci cation given: standard load (SL) tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein-

forced tire R "Light Load": light load tire

R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a cer- tain pressure

De nition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubber-coated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT-marked tires ful ll the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehicle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard

1 "ZR" stated in the tire code. 2 Or "M+Si" for winter tires.

Wheels and tires 397

to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following speci cations from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommended tire pressure is the tire pressure speci ed for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the factory. The tire and information table contains the recom- mended tire pressures for cold tires, the maxi- mum permissible load and the maximum permissi- ble vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen- ded tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equip- ment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum permissible axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identi cation plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identi cation. It speci es the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle includ- ing fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories instal- led, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as speci ed on the vehicle identi cation plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci ed on the vehicle identi cation plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side.

Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maxi- mum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maxi- mum load and the weight of optional equipment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This speci es the load-bearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air condi- tioning system and optional equipment if these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

398 Wheels and tires

Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is speci ed in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours with- out direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim.

Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identi cation Number): a unique identi - cation number which can be used by a tire manu- facturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from friction between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the

tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat positions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nominal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multi- plied by the number of seats in the vehicle.

Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect wheel and tire dimensions

If wheels and tires of the wrong size are instal- led, the service brakes or components in the

Wheels and tires 399

brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with

ones that ful ll the speci cations of the original part.

For wheels, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Type

For tires, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Manufacturer R Type

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed- ing the speci ed tire load-bearing capa- city or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the speci ed tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire dam- age and to the tires bursting.

# Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model.

# Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved

For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(run- at tire only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-

tain AMG tires)

Otherwise, certain properties, such as han- dling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely a ec-

ted. Furthermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea- ded tires

Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom- mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retrea- ded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar- anteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no

information about their previous usage.

400 Wheels and tires

* NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when driving over obstacles

Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tires being damaged when driving over obstacles increases. # Avoid obstacles or drive especially care-

fully. # Reduce your speed when driving over

curbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes.

# Avoid particularly high curbs.

* NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes

Parking on curbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tires. # If possible, park only on at surfaces. # Avoid curbs and potholes when parking.

* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools

Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a quali ed

specialist workshop only.

* NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures

At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, causing per- manent damage to the tires. # At temperatures below 45 F (7 C) use

i M+S tires.

Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approved acces- sories, visit a quali ed specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations

& WARNING Risk of accident with high per- formance tires

The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running tem- perature. # Switch on the ESP and adapt your driv-

ing style accordingly. # Use i M+S tires at outside tempera-

tures of less than 50 F (10 C). # Only use the tires for their intended pur-

pose.

Wheels and tires 401

Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in

certain regions and areas of operation can be highly bene cial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type

(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size on one

axle (le and right). It is only permissible to install a di erent wheel size in the event of a at tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem: All installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 45 F (7 C) use win-

ter tires or all-season tires marked i M+S for all wheels. Winter tires provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.

R For M+S tires, only use tires with the same tread. R Observe the maximum permissible speed for

the M+S tires installed. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's eld of vision. R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the

rst 60 miles (100 km). R Replace the tires a er six years at the latest,

regardless of wear. R When replacing with tires that do not feature

run- at characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit a er replacing with tires that do not feature run- at characteristics, e.g. winter tires.

For more information on wheels and tires, contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further rela- ted subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 383)

R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 388) R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,

speed rating and load index (/ page 395) R Tire pressure table (/ page 384) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel

(/ page 408)

Notes on rotating the wheels

& WARNING Risk of injury through di erent wheel sizes

Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the

wheels and tires are of the same dimen- sions.

The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels di er: R Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder

402 Wheels and tires

R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the tire

Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This signi cantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the inter- vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is main- tained. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 404).

Notes on storing wheels

When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R A er removing wheels, store them in a cool,

dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease

or fuel.

Overview of the tire-change tool kit

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Apart from some country-speci c variants, vehi- cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a quali ed spe- cialist workshop. You require the following tools, for example, to change a wheel: R Jack R Chock R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt

The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag1 in the trunk.

% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tool bag may be located at other positions in the trunk.

The tool bag contains: R Jack R Gloves R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack

Wheels and tires 403

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change

Requirements: R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level

ground. R The required tire-change tool kit is available.

% If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire- change tool kit, consult a quali ed specialist workshop to nd out about suitable tools.

# Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead

position. # Shi the transmission to position j. # Vehicles with AIRMATIC: Set the raised vehicle

level for greater ground clearance (/ page 259).

# Switch o the vehicle. # Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under the

front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

# Unload the vehicle.

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel

change (/ page 404).

Important notes on using the jack: R Use only a vehicle-speci c jack that has been

approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehi- cle. R The jack is only designed for raising and hold-

ing the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a rm, at and

non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, at, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti-

cally under the jack support point.

Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands or feet under the vehi-

cle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the

electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate.

404 Wheels and tires

# Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws com- pletely.

Position of jack support points

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropriate

jacking point of the vehicle. The base of

the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to using an unsuitable jack

You can damage the vehicle and, in particular the high-voltage battery, if you use a jack that is not speci cally designed for the jack sup- port points of the vehicle. # Only use jacks that are speci cally

designed for the jack support points, or use an appropriate adapter.

* NOTE Risk of damage to the vehicle due to incorrect positioning of the jack

If you do not position the jack at the designa- ted jack support points, you could damage your vehicle and, in particular, the high-voltage battery. # Only position the jack at the designated

jack support points.

Wheels and tires 405

# Take the ratchet out of the tire-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.

# Position support2 of jack4 on jack sup- port point1.

# Turn ratchet3 clockwise until support2 sits completely on jack support point1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

# Turn ratchet3 until the tire is raised a maxi- mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 406).

Removing a wheel

Requirements: R The vehicle is raised.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts

# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.

# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- pletely.

# Screw alignment bolt1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.

# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com- pletely.

# Remove the wheel.

406 Wheels and tires

Installing a new wheel

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel

Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/wheel nuts to come loose. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads,

contact a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam- aged hub threads replaced.

# Do not continue driving.

# Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 399).

For tires with a speci ed direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the cor- rect direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when installing. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-

ment bolt and push it on.

& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts

when the vehicle is on the ground.

# Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 399).

# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.

* NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing in the rst wheel bolt

If the wheel has too much play when screwing in the rst wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel rmly against the wheel

hub when screwing in the rst wheel bolt.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are nger-tight.

# Unscrew and remove the alignment bolt. # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is nger-

tight. # Lower the vehicle (/ page 407).

Lowering the vehicle a er a wheel change

Requirements: R The new wheel has been installed

(/ page 407).

Wheels and tires 407

* NOTE Risk of vehicle jack becoming trap- ped by the AIRMATIC system

If the AIRMATIC system has released air when raising the vehicle, the jack can become trap- ped when the vehicle is lowered. # Start the drive system. This adapts the

vehicle level. # Remove the jack from under the vehicle.

# To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn counter-clockwise.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 with an initial maximum force of 59 lb- (80 Nm).

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 with the speci ed tightening torque of 111 lb- (150 Nm).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect tightening torque

The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque. # Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel

nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.

# If you are not sure, do not move the vehi- cle. Contact a quali ed specialist work- shop and have the tightening torque checked immediately.

# Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary.

% The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.

# Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem: Restart the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem (/ page 387).

Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions

The wheel or tire sizes and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may di er. The emer- gency spare wheel or spare wheel can signi - cantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Drive carefully. # Never install more than one emergency

spare wheel or spare wheel that di ers in size.

408 Wheels and tires

# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel brie y.

# Do not deactivate ESP. # Have the emergency spare wheel or

spare wheel of a di erent size replaced at the nearest quali ed specialist work- shop. The new wheel must have the cor- rect dimensions.

Observe the following notes on installing an emer- gency spare wheel: R The maximum permissible speed with an

emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). R Do not equip the emergency spare wheel with

snow chains. R Replace the emergency spare wheel a er six

years at the latest, regardless of wear. R Use the wheel bolts that are included with the

emergency spare wheel. Speci ed tightening torque: 96 lb- (130 Nm)

R Check the tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary.

% The speci ed tire pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.

% Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem: If an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes a er an emergency spare wheel is installed, the sys- tem may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Be sure to also observe the following further rela- ted subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 383) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 388) R Tire pressure table (/ page 384) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 399) R Installing an emergency spare wheel

(/ page 404)

Wheels and tires 409

Notes on technical data

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement.

You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further infor- mation from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter.

Vehicle electronics Two-way radios

Notes on installing two-way radios

& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios

If two-way radios are manipulated or retro t- ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operat- ing safety of the vehicle.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios

If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particu- lar: R The two-way radio is not connected to an

exterior antenna. R The exterior antenna is installed incor-

rectly or is not a low-re ection antenna.

This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-re ection exterior antenna

installed at a quali ed specialist work- shop.

# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low- re ection exterior antenna.

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instruc- tions for installation and use

The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out-

put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions.

410 Technical data

1 Rear roof area

On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna is not permitted. Use Technical Speci cation ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles "EMCs for installation of a ermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retro tting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts.

If your vehicle has installing for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing.

Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table.

Frequency band and maximum transmission out- put Frequency band Maximum transmis-

sion output

2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm frequency band 430 - 470 MHz

35 W

Frequency band Maximum transmis- sion output

Two-way radio 2G

2 W

Two-way radio 3G/4G/5G

0.5 W

The following devices can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R Two-way radios with a maximum transmission

output of up to 100 mW R Two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in

the 380 - 420 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G)

There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol- lowing frequency bands: R TETRA R 2G/3G/4G/5G

Technical data 411

Regulatory radio identi cation and notes Regulatory radio identi cation of small compo- nents

Manufacturer information about radio-based vehi- cle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation" in the Dig- ital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Inter- net and in the app.

Regulatory radio identi cation Indonesia

Manufacturer information about radio-based vehi- cle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation Indone- sia" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehi- cle, on the Internet and in the app. % These are not small components. Information

about small components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation of small components".

Information on installation clearances

Information on installation clearances of wireless vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Installation clearances" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet, and in the app.

Further component-speci c information

Further component-speci c information can be found using the key phrase "further component- speci c information" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet and in the app.

Vehicle identi cation plate, VIN and engine num- ber overview

Vehicle identi cation plate

412 Technical data

Vehicle identi cation plate (USA only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identi cation number)

Vehicle identi cation plate (Canada only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identi cation number)

The permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle).

Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

VIN below the front right-hand seat

1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identi cation number) 2 Floor covering

Technical data 413

VIN at the lower edge of the windshield

1 VIN (vehicle identi cation number) as label

Operating uids Notes on operating uids

& WARNING Risk of injury from operating uids harmful to your health

Operating uids may be poisonous and harm- ful to your health.

# Observe the text on the original contain- ers when using, storing or disposing of operating uids.

# Always store operating uids sealed in their original containers.

# Always keep children away from operat- ing uids.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of operating uids

Incorrect disposal of operating uids can cause considerable damage to the environ- ment. # Dispose of operating uids in an environ-

mentally responsible manner.

Operating uids include the following: R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake uid R Windshield washer uid

R Climate control system refrigerant

Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. You can identify operating uids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Further information on approved operating uids is available at the following locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Oper-

ating Fluids by entering the designation - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a quali ed specialist workshop

Notes on brake uid

Note the instructions about operating uids (/ page 414).

414 Technical data

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake system

The brake uid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake uid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking e ect to be impaired. # Have the brake uid renewed at the

speci ed intervals.

Have the brake uid replaced regularly at a quali- ed specialist workshop.

Only use a brake uid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.

Coolant

Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 414).

& WARNING Risk of re and injury from antifreeze

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Allow the drive system to cool down

before you add antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out

next to the ller opening. # Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from

component parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool- ant

# Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection.

Information on coolant is available at the fol- lowing locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Speci cation for

Operating Fluids 320.1

- At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a quali ed specialist workshop

* NOTE Overheating at high outside temper- atures

If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not su ciently protected against overheating and corrosion at high out- side temperatures. # Only use coolant approved by Mercedes-

Benz. # Observe the instructions in the

Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Oper- ating Fluids 320.1.

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop. Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down

to about -35F (-37C))

Technical data 415

R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49F (-45C))

Coolant capacity Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Coolant (engine) Model Capacity

EQS 450+

EQS 580 4MATIC

Notes on windshield washer uid

Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 414).

& WARNING Risk of re and injury from windshield washer concentrate

Windshield washer concentrate is highly am- mable. If it comes into contact with hot com- ponents, it may ignite.

# Make sure that windshield washer con- centrate is not spilled near to the ller opening.

* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer uid

Unsuitable windshield washer uid may dam- age the plastic surface of the exterior lighting. # Only use windshield washer uid which is

also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.

* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer uids

# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win- terFit with other windshield washer u- ids.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other- wise, the ll level sensor may be triggered errone- ously. Recommended windshield washer uid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit

R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa- tion on the antifreeze container. Mix washer uid with windshield washer uid all year round.

Refrigerant

Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating uids (/ page 414).

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect refrigerant

If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli- mate control system may be damaged. # USA: use only R134a refrigerant. # Canada: use only R1234yf refrigerant.

416 Technical data

* NOTE Damage to the climate control sys- tem due to incorrect refrigerant compres- sor oil

# Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

# Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a di erent refriger- ant compressor oil.

Work on the climate control system may be car- ried out only at a quali ed specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to. The information label for the climate control sys- tem regarding the refrigerant type and the refrig- erant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the inside of the hood.

Information label (example USA/China) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant lling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refriger-

ant used 6 Refrigerant type

Information label (example Canada) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant lling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refriger-

ant used 6 Refrigerant type

Symbols1 indicate the following: R Possible dangers R Having maintenance work carried out at a

quali ed specialist workshop

Technical data 417

Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil

Capacity Model Refrigerant

All models 33.5 0.4 oz (950 10 g)

Model PAG oil

All models 5.6 0.4 oz (160 10 g)

Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions

The heights speci ed may vary as a result of the following factors: R Tires R Load R Condition of the suspension R Optional equipment

Vehicle dimensions All models

Vehicle length 207.3 in (5265 mm)

Vehicle width including outside mirrors

83.7 in (2125 mm)

Vehicle height 59.6 in (1513 mm)

Wheelbase 126.4 in (3210 mm)

Turning radius 39.0 (11.9 m)

Weights and loads

Vehicle-speci c weight information can be found on the vehicle identi cation plate. Observe the vehicle data speci ed below: optional equipment increases the curb weight and reduces the payload.

High-voltage battery

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Data on charging the high-voltage battery EQS 450+

Model Lithium-ion

Usable energy content 107.8 kWh

Range

Charge time mode 4 with approx. 148 kW peak charging capacity

36 min

Charge time mode 3 with 9.6 kW charging capacity

Approx. 11 h 15 min

EQS 580 4MATIC

Model Lithium-ion

Usable energy content 107.8 kWh

Range

418 Technical data

EQS 580 4MATIC

Charge time mode 4 with approx. 148 kW peak charging capacity

36 min

Charge time mode 3 with 9.6 kW charging capacity

Approx. 11 h 15 min

Charge time mode 3 applies to AC charging from 10% to 100% of the usable energy content. Charge time mode 4 applies to direct current charging from 10% to 80% of the usable energy content. The time taken to charge the battery depends on the condition of charge of the battery, the ambi- ent temperature and the charging capacity of the battery. The charging capacity, in turn, depends on the supply voltage, the current intensity and the type of power supply. The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the socket cover (/ page 195).

Technical data 419

Display messages Introduction

Notes about display messages Display messages appear on the driver display. Display messages with graphical symbols are sim- pli ed in the Operator's Manual and may di er from the symbols on the driver display. The driver display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes- sages and follow the additional notes in the Oper- ator's Manual. For some display messages, symbols will also be shown: R Further information R Hide display message

With the le -hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the le or right. Pressing displays further information on the central display. Press the symbol to hide the display message.

You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the back buttonG or the le -hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The driver display will show these display mes- sages continuously until the cause of the display message has been recti ed.

Calling up saved display messages Driver display: 4 Service The Message Memory: XX message appears in the driver display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip-

ing upwards or downwards on the le -hand Touch Control.

# To exit the display: press theG back but- ton.

420 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Occupant safety

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6 Restraint System Malfunc- tion Service Required

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44).

& DANGER Risk of death due to the restraint system malfunctioning Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may receive an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.

6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)

* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44).

& DANGER Risk of death due to the restraint system malfunctioning Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may receive an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 421

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6 Left Window Airbag Mal- function Service Required (example)

* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbag The window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Front Passenger Airbag Dis- abled See Operator's Man- ual

* The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag have been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- cially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 54).

422 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual

* The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R Even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front

passenger seat R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied

The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is ena- bled

If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is ena- bled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 423

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 54). # If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* The PRESAFE functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* The PRESAFE Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative a er having already been triggered. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Obtain a New Key

* Have the SmartKey replaced. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

424 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Replace Key Battery

* The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 75).

Key Not Detected (white display message)

* The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey (/ page 182).

Key Not Detected (red dis- play message)

* The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch o the vehicle: R You can no longer start the vehicle. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. # Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 182).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 425

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Don't Forget Your Key

* A warning tone will also sound. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

Key Being Initialized Please Wait

* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new SmartKey. # Wait until processing is complete.

Place the Key in the Marked Space See Opera- tor's Manual

* SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 182).

426 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

: Check Left Low Beam (example)

* The corresponding light source is defective. # Drive on carefully. # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes

in the light are faulty.

: Malfunction See Opera- tors Manual

* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

: Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative

* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 427

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

: Active Headlamps Inopera- tive

* The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

: Switch On Headlamps

* You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or position.

: Switch Off Lights

* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the position.

DIGITAL LIGHT Functions Limited

* The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work even without the functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT system. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 150).

428 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 152). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available Again display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoperative

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning. # Drive on.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 429

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually.

Hazard Warning Light Mal- function

* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Climate control

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& Inoperative High-Voltage Battery Charging Not Com- plete

* The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. # Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum charge.

430 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& Inoperative Charge High- voltage Battery

* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. # Charge the high-voltage battery.

& Pre-entry Climate Control Available Again via Smart- Key after Vehicle Start

* You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than three times with the engine switched o . # Start the vehicle for ten seconds.

Pre-entry climate control is operational again.

& Pre-entry Climate Control via Key Inoperative High- voltage Battery Low

* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 431

Drive system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

d Performance Extremely Limited

* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery. Output and range are severely restricted. # Switch the vehicle o and lock it. # A er waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again.

If the display message appears again: # Drive on carefully. # Fully charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 195).

If the output and range are still reduced, there is a malfunction in the drive system. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

u Towing Not Permitted See Operator's Manual

* The drive system is malfunctioning. # Have the vehicle transported only using a transporter or trailer (/ page 372).

432 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Acoustic Presence Indica- tor Inoperative

* The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No driving noises are being produced. The vehicle may not be heard by other road users. # Drive with particular care. # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop.

To switch vehicle off, press and hold Start/Stop but- ton for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times

* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # To switch o the drive system while the vehicle is in motion (/ page 181).

+ Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual

* The coolant level is too low.

* NOTE Damage to the drive system due to insu cient coolant # Avoid long journeys with insu cient coolant.

# Have the cooling system of the drive system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Coolant Stop Switch Off Vehicle

* The coolant is too hot. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the drive system.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 433

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING Risk of injury due to overheated vehicle If you open the hood in the event of an overheated vehicle or re in the engine compartment, the following situa- tions may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids. # In the event of overheating or re in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the re service. # Allow the overheated vehicle to cool down rst if you need to open the hood.

# Wait until the drive system has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the vehicle radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the drive system, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.

* The cooling system has detected a component malfunction. # Avoiding high loads on the drive system, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.

Charger Cable Connected

* You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected. # Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.

434 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Not Possible to Unlock Charger Cable See Opera- tor's Manual

* The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the charging station's socket. # Press the EMERGENCY OFF switch on the charging station.

If the charging cable connector cannot be removed a er that: # Request service personnel from the operator of the charging station via the emergency call button attached to the

charging station or the emergency call numbers. Vehicle Currently Not Being Charged Charging Station Fault

* A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognized. # Start the charging process at a di erent charging station. or # Have the RFID card checked to ensure it is functioning.

Charging Fault Change Charging Mode See Opera- tor's Manual

* A temporary malfunction has occurred at the charging station. # Wait until the malfunction has passed. or # Start the charging process at a di erent charging station.

AC Charging Inoperative Service Required

* The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

DC Charging Inoperative Service Required

* The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 435

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Reduced Drive System Per- formance See Operator's Manual

* The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temper- atures. Drive system power output is reduced. The yellow reduced power output warning lamp_ is lit. Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal (e.g. a er a short trip), the full output will be available again. The display message and the yellow reduced power output warning lamp_ will go out. # Drive on carefully.

* The high-voltage battery is not charged su ciently. Drive system power output is reduced. The yellow reduced power output warning lamp_ is lit. # Drive on carefully. # Charge the high-voltage battery immediately.

* If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a malfunction in the drive system. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Battery Too Low Stop Vehi- cle Charge Immediately

* The charge level of the high-voltage battery is so low that it is no longer possible to drive the vehicle. The drive system can no longer be restarted. When the drive system is restarted, the message Battery Too Low Stop Vehicle Charge Immediately will appear again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 195).

436 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Wait in the READY status Battery is warming up see Operator's Manual

* Operational readiness is established and the transmission position j is engaged. The high-voltage battery is warmed up to the operating temperature. This process can take a few minutes and may be prolonged if defrosting of the windshield is activated. The heating process ends when transmission position h is engaged. However, when driving, the output is signi cantly limited until the high-voltage battery has reached its operating temperature.

Battery Overheated Stop, Everyone Get Out Out- doors if Possible

* The high-voltage battery has overheated. There is a risk of re. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.

% Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. the air-recirculation mode as part of climate control. # Do not continue driving. # If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the re service immediately. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a re.

Malfunction

* The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone will also sound. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 437

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Malfunction Service Required

* The drive system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Have High-voltage System Checked See Operator's Manual

* A function restriction has occurred in the drive system. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Preparing Drive System * The insulation of the drive system is being tested. This process can last for up to ten seconds.

Do Not Restart Vehicle Service Required

* It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction. # Do not switch o the drive system; drive on to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.

Reserve Level Charge High- Voltage Battery

* The charge level of the high-voltage battery has dropped into the reserve range. # Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 195).

438 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

d Malfunction

* The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

d Stop Switch Off Vehicle

* The drive system is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the drive system. Do not con-

tinue driving. # Do not tow the vehicle, stop towing if necessary. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

d Malfunction Visit Workshop

* The drive system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

High-voltage Battery Fault No Start in Approx. XXX mi Service Required (yellow display message)

* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery. It is no longer possible to start the electric drive system a er the distance displayed has been covered. # Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 439

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions High-voltage Battery Fault No Start in Approx. XXX mi Service Required(red dis- play message)

* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery. It is no longer possible to start the electric drive system a er the distance displayed has been covered. # Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out immediately at a quali ed specialist

workshop. Hight-voltage Battery Fault Do Not Restart Service Required

* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery. It is no longer possible to restart the drive system once it has been switched o . # Do not switch o the drive system; drive on to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The driver display is inoperative due to a failed so ware update. The display message will be shown every time the engine is started.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to failure of the driver display In the event that the driver display fails or malfunctions, you will not recognize function restrictions a ecting sys- tems relevant to safety. This may impair operating safety. # Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a quali ed specialist workshop.

440 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the driver display fails, you may not recognize function restrictions a ecting systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired (/ page 316). # Have the vehicle checked by a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting

* You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state. # Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the SmartKey with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch o the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12V bat-

tery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).

Head-up Display Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* The Head-up Display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes: R Malfunctions in the power supply R Signal interference # Stop in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch the vehicle o and on again. # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Head-up Display Inopera- tive

* The Head-up Display has an internal error. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 441

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Head-up Display Bright- ness Currently Reduced See Operator's Manual

* The brightness of the Head-up Display is reduced. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's eld of vision R Faulty exterior brightness signals # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Clean the windshield if necessary. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Steering Malfunction Drive Carefully Service Required

* A power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be impaired as a result. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual

* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Opera- tor's Manual

* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is signi cantly impaired.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do

not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Rear Axle Steering Cur- rently Malfunctioning

* The rear axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning radius may increase. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.

If the display message does not disappear: # Drive on carefully. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Rear Axle Steering Malfunc- tion Service Required

* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may be tilted when you drive in a straight line. # Adapt your speed and drive on carefully. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Rear Axle Steering Malfunc- tion Stop Immediately

* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may be tilted considerably when you drive in a straight line. Depending on the steering wheel's tilted position, the steering wheel will also vibrate and a continuous warning tone will sound.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do

not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# When stopping, bear the enlarged vehicle width in mind. Snow Chain Mode Maxi- mum Speed Exceeded

* The maximum permissible speed for snow chain mode has been exceeded. # Drive more slowly.

C * At least one door is open. # Close all doors.

444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

? * The hood is open.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

A * The tailgate is open. # Close the tailgate.

Ambient Lighting Warning Support Inoperative

* The ambient lighting may not provide full visual warning support. # Lock the vehicle and unlock it again a er a few minutes. # If the display message appears regularly, contact a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

_ Rear Left Backrest Not Latched (example)

* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged. # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.

Check Washer Fluid

* The washer uid level in the washer uid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer uid (/ page 355).

Windshield Wiper Malfunc- tion

* The windshield wipers are malfunctioning. # Restart the vehicle.

If the display message still appears: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Transmission

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to P Only When Vehi- cle Is Stationary

* It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shi the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.

Depress Brake to Shift from P

* You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.

To Deselect P or N Depress Brake and Start Vehicle

* You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission posi- tion. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the vehicle. # Change the transmission position.

Depress Brake to Shift to D or R

* You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h or k.

Apply Brake To Park Service Required

* A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position j. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch o the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Driver's Door Open Position P Not Selected

* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. The vehicle may roll away. # Select park position j when switching o the vehicle.

Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply Brake to Park

* The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected. # Park the vehicle safely. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. # On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving.

Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activated Manually No Automatic Change to P

* While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutral i was engaged with the drive system or the vehicle switched on.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to rolling away

When the vehicle is switched o or the driver's door is opened, automatic engagement of park position j is deac- tivated. The vehicle may roll away. # Be ready to brake. # Do not leave the vehicle unattended.

448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. # Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed. # To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.

N Automatically Activated Please Shift to Transmis- sion Position Again

* Neutral i was automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or being driven. % When you open the driver's door in neutral i, park position j will be engaged automatically. # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. # Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed. # To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.

N is Engaged Please Engage Desired Gear

* The accelerator pedal was depressed while the vehicle was rolling or moving in neutral i. # To accelerate the vehicle, select transmission position h or k.

Reversing Not Possible Service Required

* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction Stop

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shi s to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Service Required Do Not Change Transmission Posi- tion

* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # If transmission position h is selected, consult a quali ed specialist workshop and do not change the transmission

position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Auxiliary Battery Malfunc- tion (white display message)

* There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery. # Visit a quali ed specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch o the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Brakes

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Opera- tor's Manual

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 215).

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 215). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 214). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is ashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on

To apply: # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 215).

To release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp con- tinues to ash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp ashes for approximately ten seconds a er the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the state of charge is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery.

452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To apply: # Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release: # If the conditions for automatic release are ful lled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,

release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 215).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake

* The red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is ashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been ful lled (/ page 214). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 215). # Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. # Release the electric parking brake manually.

454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Switch on Vehicle to Release the Parking Brake

* The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched o . # Switch on the vehicle.

$ (USA only)

J (Canada only) Brake Immediately

* A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated. A horn may also sound at regular intervals. You cannot start the vehicle system. # Immediately depress the brake pedal rmly until the display message disappears.

You cannot start the vehicle system again.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$ (USA only)

J (Canada only) Malfunction see Operator's Manual

* The brake force boosting function is impaired. The hill start assist may be impaired.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

$ (USA only)

J (Canada only) Malfunction Stop

* The brake force boosting function is impaired and the braking characteristics may be a ected.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$ (USA only)

J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level

* There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do

not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Do not add brake uid.

Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual

* The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Off

* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not ful lled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 221).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ATTENTION ASSIST Inoper- ative

* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 224). # If necessary, take a break.

P ATTENTION ASSIST Nod- ding Off Take a Break!

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indicators of microsleep (/ page 224). A warning tone will also sound. # It is recommended that you take a break immediately. # Press the le -hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.

h - - - mph

* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 227).

458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cruise Control Inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. Cruise Control Off * Cruise control has been deactivated.

If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 226).

- - - mph

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 231).

Suspended

* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 228).

Off

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 231).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Distance Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 228). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart

the vehicle. Active Distance Assist Inop- erative

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Distance Assist Now Available

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 231).

Active Steering Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 236). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Drive on # Check the tire pressure if necessary.

Active Steering Assist Inop- erative

* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 236).

You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the tra c conditions.

Active Steering Assist Cur- rently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on

Active Steering Assist is available once more.

Beginning Emergency Stop

* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. The Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 236). # Put your hands on the steering wheel.

Information on canceling an emergency stop (/ page 238).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Emergency Stop Assist Currently Unavaila- ble See Operator's Manual

* Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 238). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart

the vehicle. * Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multi- ple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on

Active Emergency Stop Assist is available once more. Active Emergency Stop Assist Inoperative

* Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Lane Change Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 239). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart

the vehicle. Active Lane Change Assist Inoperative

* Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 228). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning. Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Tra c Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on

Traffic Sign Assist Inopera- tive

* Tra c Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 252). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart

the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist Inopera- tive

* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 252). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart

the vehicle. Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative

* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 255). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on

Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Temporarily Unavailable Sensors are Dirty

* Front and corner radar sensors (herea er "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes: R The sensors are dirty R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other tra c, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steer- ing and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on.

Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o . If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 217). # Restart the vehicle.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Temporarily Unavailable Camera View Restricted

* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the eld of vision of the multifunction camera R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Condensation on the inside of the windshield: in certain weather conditions, condensation can form on the inside

of the windshield during cold times of year in particular.

% This condensation on the windshield will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary.

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steer- ing and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on

Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o . If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Clean the windshield, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 217). # Restart the vehicle.

Driver Camera View Cur- rently Restricted See Oper- ator's Manual

* The view of the driver camera is reduced. Possible causes: R Objects or stickers are projecting into the driver cameras eld of vision.

468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions R The driver camera is dirty. # Keep the driver camera's eld of vision free. # Clean the driver camera if necessary. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior relating to the display

(/ page 360).

Change the steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen.

* The driver camera cannot capture your line of sight. # Change the steering wheel and seat position until six dots are visible on the top edge of the screen.

The display message will appear again if the driver camera is again unable to detect your line of sight a er 30 minutes. The display message will no longer appear at all if you con rm the display message and the driver camera cannot detect your line of sight during the entire journey.

Driver Camera Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* The driver camera is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph

* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be a ected.

* NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions, and set a

higher vehicle level if possible.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Maximum Speed 12mph

* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be a ected. # The current level is too high. Do not drive at speeds greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

STOP Vehicle Level Too Low

* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.

The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIRMATIC is malfunctioning: # Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions, and set a

higher vehicle level if possible.

470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 259).

Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.

Vehicle Rising Please Wait

* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Compressor Is Cooling

* Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor rst needs to cool down in order to set the selected vehicle level. When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue rising to the selected vehicle level. # Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is su cient ground clearance.

Active Parking Assist Limi- ted Availability of Maneu- vering Assistance See Operator's Manual

* Active Parking Assists maneuvering assistant is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (/ page 359). # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* ABS and ESP are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph

(30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-

fully.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* ESP is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph

(30 km/h).

474 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive care- fully.

Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 475

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

T ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi- tion, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Brake Assist Func- tions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual

* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only parti- ally available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRESAFE PLUS

Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: PRESAFE PLUS is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 242). Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.

476 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Drive on.

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart

the vehicle. Active Brake Assist Func- tions Limited See Opera- tor's Manual

* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only parti- ally available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRESAFE PLUS

Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially availa- ble. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 477

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

G Inoperative

* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunction- ing. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Battery

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cannot Start Vehicle See Operator's Manual

* It is not possible to start the vehicle. A malfunction has occurred in the drive system. # Switch the vehicle o and lock it. # A er waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again. # If the display message appears again and the vehicle does not start, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# 12 V On-board Electrical System Service Required

* The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Stop Vehicle See Opera- tor's Manual

* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is too low.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch o the vehicle. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Switch on vehicle to charge the 12 V battery

* The vehicle is o and the condition of charge of the 12 V battery is too low. # Switch o electrical consumers that are not required. # Drive for 3060 minutes. or # Charge the vehicle at a charging station (/ page 195).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Stop vehicle To charge the 12 V battery do not switch off vehicle

* The 12 V battery condition of charge is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the vehicle running # If the display message disappears: drive on. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Tire pressure monitor

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Monitor Cur- rently Unavailable

* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been recti ed. # Drive on.

Tire Press. Monitor Inopera- tive

* The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insu cient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.

480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Monitor Inop- erative No Wheel Sensors

* The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing

* There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the a ected tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop.

h Check Tires

* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped signi cantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tire pressure R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 383) and the tires.

h Please Correct Tire Pres- sure

* The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the di erence in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 387).

h Warning Tire Malfunction

* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a at tire R The tires can overheat and be damaged. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a at tire. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible

speed with a at MOExtended tire. # Observe the notes on at tires.

Notes in the event of a at tire (/ page 364).

482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tires.

Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The a ected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

Decrease Speed * At least one tire is overheating. The a ected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483

Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps

Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warn- ing lamps may brie y light up or ash. This behav- ior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or ash a er the vehicle has been started or dur- ing a journey.

Driver display

Driver display with driver camera

Indicator and warning lamps: 6 Restraint system (/ page 485) Seat belt (/ page 485) _ Reduced power (/ page 487) System error (/ page 487) # Electrical malfunction (/ page 487) Power steering (yellow) (/ page 488) Power steering (red) (/ page 488) Rear axle steering (yellow)

(/ page 488)

Rear axle steering (red) (/ page 488)

F USA: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 490)

! Canada: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 490)

! Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 490)

USA: Recuperative Brake System (/ page 490)

J Canada: brakes (yellow) (/ page 490)

$ USA: brakes (red) (/ page 490) J Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 490) L Distance warning (/ page 493) Active Brake Assist (/ page 493) Active Brake Assist (/ page 493) Active Brake Assist (/ page 493) AIRMATIC (/ page 493) ! ABS (/ page 495) ESP (/ page 495)

484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

ESP OFF (/ page 495) H Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-

tem (/ page 497) h Tire pressure monitoring system

(/ page 498) T Parking lights (/ page 143) L Low beam (/ page 143) K High beam (/ page 144) #! Turn signal lights (/ page 144) R Rear fog light (/ page 143)

Occupant safety

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6 Restraint system warning lamp

* The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on. The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44).

& DANGER Risk of death due to the restraint system malfunctioning Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You may receive an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.

# Drive on carefully. # Note the messages on the driver display. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Seat belt warning lamp ashes

* The red seat belt warning lamp ashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 48). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.

Seat belt warning lamp lights up

*The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the vehicle has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 48).

If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Drive system

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

_ Reduced warning lamp power

* The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on. Drive system power output is reduced. # Note the messages on the driver display.

System error warning lamp

*The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness. There is a malfunction in the drive system. # Note the messages on the driver display.

# Electrical malfunction warn- ing lamp

* The red electrical malfunction warning lamp is lit. There is a malfunction with the electrics. # Note the messages on the driver display.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487

Vehicle

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Power steering warning lamp (yellow)

* The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display.

Power steering warning lamp (red)

* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not

continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow)

* The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display.

Rear axle steering warning lamp (red)

* The red rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not

continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489

Brakes

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F Electric parking brake indi- cator lamp (red) (USA only)

! Electric parking brake indi- cator lamp (red) (Canada only)

! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp

*The red electric parking brake indicator lamp ashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the driver display.

490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)

J Brakes warning lamp (yel- low) (Canada only)

*The yellow warning lamp (USA only) or the yellow J brake warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the vehicle is running.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

The hill start assist may be malfunctioning. # Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the driver display shows a display message, observe it. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$ Brake warning lamp (USA only)

J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)

* The red brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be a ected. R There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir. # Note the messages on the driver display.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not

continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Do not add brake uid.

492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

L Warning lamp for distance warning function

* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance.

Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 242).

Active Brake Assist warning lamp

* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted. # Note the messages on the driver display.

Active Brake Assist warning lamp

* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. The system is switched o or the range of functions has been automatically restricted. This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated. # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 242).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Active Brake Assist warning lamp

* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. A er you drive o , the system's range of functions is restricted due to the teach-in process. Depending on the ambient conditions, the teach-in process may take a few minutes. # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 242).

Suspension warning lamp (yellow)

* The yellow AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit. A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC. # Note the messages on the driver display.

Suspension warning lamp (red)

* The red AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit. A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC.

* NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics will have changed signi cantly. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the driver display. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! ABS warning lamp

* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display.

& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

ESP warning lamp ashes

* The yellow ESP warning lamp ashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 220). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ESP warning lamp lights up

* The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched o . # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

ESP OFF warning lamp

* The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.

& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP deactivated

ESP does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP only for as long as the situation requires.

496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

If ESP cannot be activated, ESP is malfunctioning. # Have ESP checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP (/ page 220).

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp

*The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497

Tire pressure monitor

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp ashes

*The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) ashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insu cient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up

*The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tire pressure R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions. # Check the tire pressure and the tires.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499

1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC

All-wheel distribution.............................. 195 Function................................................ 195

12 V battery see On-board electrical system battery (12 V)

A A/C function

Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 166 Activating/deactivating (MBUX multi- media system)....................................... 167

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).................... 219 Acceleration increase

Notes..................................................... 183 Accelerator pedal

see Haptic accelerator pedal Accident and Breakdown Management

Mercedes me connect........................... 340 Acoustic locking veri cation signal

Activating/deactivating............................ 74

Acoustic presence indicator (sound gener- ator)

Notes..................................................... 178 Activating a commuter route........................ 325 Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating.......................... 255 Brake application................................... 254 Function................................................ 252 System limitations.................................. 252

Active Brake Assist Function/notes...................................... 242 Setting................................................... 246

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 238 Active Lane Change Assist..................... 239 Calling up a speed................................. 231 Function................................................ 228 Increasing/decreasing the speed........... 231 Route-based speed adaptation............... 234 Storing a speed...................................... 231 Switching o /deactivating..................... 231 Switching on/activating......................... 231 System limitations.................................. 228

Active Emergency Stop Assist...................... 238

Active headlamps......................................... 146 Active Lane Change Assist

Activating/deactivating.......................... 242 Function................................................ 239

Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 258 Activating/deactivating the warning....... 258 Function................................................ 255 Setting the sensitivity............................. 258 System limits......................................... 255

Active Parking Assist Automatic braking function.................... 275 Cross tra c warning.............................. 280 Drive Away Assist................................... 279 Exiting a parking space.......................... 274 Function................................................ 270 Maneuvering brake function................... 281 Parking.................................................. 272 Pausing.................................................. 275 System limitations.................................. 270

Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS

Active Speed Limit Assist Display................................................... 233

500 Index

Function................................................ 233 Active Steering Assist

Activating/deactivating.......................... 238 Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 238 Active Lane Change Assist..................... 239 Function................................................ 236 System limits......................................... 236

Active Tra c Jam Assist Function................................................ 235

Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 151 Function................................................ 150

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Function................................................ 152 Switching on/o .................................... 153

ADS PLUS damping system see AIRMATIC

A er-sales service see ASSYST PLUS

Air bag Reduced protection.................................. 52

Air conditioning menu Calling up.............................................. 166 Selecting climate modes........................ 167

Air conditioning system see Climate control

Air distribution Setting................................................... 163 Setting (3-zone automatic climate control).................................................. 164 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 168

Air freshener system see Fragrance system

Air inlet see Air-water duct

Air pressure see Tire pressure

Air suspension see AIRMATIC

Air vents Adjusting (front)..................................... 176 Adjusting (rear)...................................... 176

Air vents see Air vents

Air-conditioning system see Climate control

Air-recirculation mode (with ne particle pre lter).................................. 169, 170 Air-water duct

Keeping free.......................................... 355 Airbag

Activation................................................ 44 Automatic co-driver airbag shuto ............ 53 Belt airbag............................................... 48 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)........ 50 Installation locations................................ 50 Knee airbag............................................. 50 Overview.................................................. 50 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 54 Protection................................................ 51 Side airbag.............................................. 50 Window curtain airbag.............................. 50

Air ow Setting................................................... 163 Setting (3-zone automatic climate control).................................................. 164

AIRMATIC Setting................................................... 259

Index 501

Suspension............................................ 258 Alarm

see Panic alarm Alarm system

see ATA (anti-the alarm system) All-wheel drive

see 4MATIC Alternative route

see Route Ambient lighting

Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 155 Android Auto

see Smartphone integration Animals

Pets in the vehicle.................................... 72 Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains

see Snow chains Anti-the protection

Immobilizer.............................................. 99

Anti-the protection see ATA (anti-the alarm system)

Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

Apple CarPlay see Smartphone integration

Assistance systems see Driving safety system

ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods................ 354 Displaying the service due date.............. 353 Function/notes...................................... 353 Regular maintenance work..................... 353 Special service requirements................. 353

ATA (anti-the alarm system) Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor........................................ 101 Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm... 101 Deactivating the alarm........................... 100 Function.................................................. 99 Interior motion sensor function.............. 101

The tow-away alarm function.................. 100 ATTENTION ASSIST

Setting................................................... 226 ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection

Function................................................ 224 System limits......................................... 224

Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro- sleep detection

Augmented reality Function on the Head-up Display............ 290

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Quali ed specialist workshop

Authorized workshop see Quali ed specialist workshop

Automatic co-driver airbag shuto Function of co-driver airbag shuto .......... 53

Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Automatic driving lights................................ 144 Automatic front passenger airbag shuto

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 54

502 Index

Automatic measures a er an accident............ 58 Automatic mirror folding function

Activating/deactivating.......................... 162 Automatic seat adjustment

Setting................................................... 111

B Back seat

see Seats Bad weather light......................................... 148 Bag hook..................................................... 132 BAS (Brake Assist System)........................... 219 Battery

see High-voltage battery Battery (high-voltage on-board electrical system)

see High-voltage battery Battery (SmartKey)

Replacing................................................. 75 Battery (vehicle)

Notes..................................................... 370

Beginner driver mode Activating/deactivating.......................... 224

Belt see Seat belt

Belt airbag Activation................................................ 44 Function/notes........................................ 48

Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 255 Function................................................ 252 System limitations.................................. 252

Blower see Climate control

Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake uid Notes..................................................... 414

Brake force distribution EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)....................................................... 221

Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 219 Active Brake Assist................................. 242

BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 219 Breaking-in notes................................... 182 Driving tips............................................ 183 EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)....................................................... 221 HOLD function....................................... 221 Limited braking e ect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 183 New/replaced brake linings/brake discs...................................................... 182 Post-collision brake.................................. 58

Brakes see Recuperation

Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Breakdown Assistance overview................................. 24 Changing a wheel................................... 404 Roadside Assistance................................ 30 Tow-starting........................................... 378 Towing away.......................................... 373 Transporting the vehicle......................... 375

Breakdown see Flat tire

Index 503

Breaking-in notes......................................... 182

C Calls

Mercedes me......................................... 336 Camera

Information............................................ 217 Camera

see Dashcam see Driver camera see Rear view camera see Surround view camera

Car key see SmartKey

Car wash see Care

Car wash (care)............................................ 356 Car-to-X-Communication

Displaying hazard warnings.................... 329 Care

Air-water duct........................................ 355 Automatic car wash............................... 356 Carpet................................................... 360

Decorative foil........................................ 358 Display................................................... 360 Exterior lighting...................................... 359 Head-up Display..................................... 360 Headliner............................................... 360 Paint...................................................... 358 Plastic trim............................................ 360 Power washer........................................ 357 Real wood/trim elements...................... 360 Rear view camera................................... 359 Seat belt................................................ 360 Seat cover............................................. 360 Sensors................................................. 359 Steering wheel....................................... 360 Surround view camera........................... 359 Vehicle socket for the high-voltage battery................................................... 359 Washing by hand.................................... 357 Wheels/rims.......................................... 359 Windows................................................ 359 Wiper blades.......................................... 359

Cargo compartment cover Extending/retracting.............................. 129 Notes..................................................... 128 Removing/installing............................... 129

Cargo tie-down rings.................................... 132 Carpet (Care)............................................... 360 Change of address......................................... 30 Change of ownership...................................... 30 Changing a wheel

Preparation............................................ 404 Raising the vehicle................................. 404

Changing a wheel see Emergency spare wheel

Charging At time of departure............................... 209 Charging cable control panel.................. 200 Condition of charge display.................... 208 Con guring weekly pro le...................... 209 Ending the charging process (alternat- ing current, mode 2/3).......................... 205 Ending the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 207 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 202 Maximum charging current (mains socket).................................................. 200 Notes - charging station (mode 3).......... 198 Notes - fast charging station (mode 4).... 199 Notes - mains socket (Mode 2)............... 197

504 Index

Notes - wallbox (mode 3)........................ 198 Notes on charging the high-voltage battery................................................... 195 Notes on the high-voltage battery........... 371 Notes on wireless charging.................... 138 On-board electrical system battery (12 V).................................................... 372 Starting the charging process (alter- nating current, mode 2/3)..................... 202 Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 205 Stowing the charging cable.................... 195 USB port................................................ 138

Charging cable Control panel......................................... 200 Stowing................................................. 195

Child safety lock Rear doors............................................... 70 Rear side windows................................... 72

Child seat Attaching (notes)...................................... 62 Basic instructions.................................... 58 Front-passenger seat (notes).................... 69 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing)................ 63 Notes on risks and dangers...................... 59

Securing on the front passenger seat....... 69 Securing on the rear seat......................... 67 Top Tether................................................ 66

Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle................ 59 Basic instructions.................................... 58 Special seat belt retractor........................ 63

Chock Storage location..................................... 403

Chock see Chock

City lighting.................................................. 148 Cleaning

see Care Cleaning uid

see Windshield washer uid Climate control

Activating/deactivating.......................... 166 Activating/deactivating (rear operat- ing unit)................................................. 166 Activating/deactivating the A/C func- tion (control panel)................................. 166 Activating/deactivating the A/C func- tion (MBUX multimedia system).............. 167

Activating/deactivating the fragrance system................................................... 170 Activating/deactivating the synchro- nization function (MBUX multimedia system).................................................. 169 Air-recirculation mode (with ne parti- cle pre lter)................................... 169, 170 Automatic control.................................. 167 Calling up the air conditioning menu....... 166 Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control....................................... 164 Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control....................................... 163 Defrost.................................................. 167 Defrosting the windshield....................... 163 Defrosting the windshield (3-zone automatic climate control)..................... 164 Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil................................................... 418 Front air vents........................................ 176 Immediate pre-entry climate control....... 175 Information on the windshield heater...... 172 Inserting/removing the acon (fra- grance system)...................................... 171 Ionization............................................... 170 Note...................................................... 163

Index 505

Pre-entry climate control at departure time....................................................... 173 Pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked................................. 172 Rear air vents......................................... 176 Rear operating unit.......................... 22, 165 Refrigerant............................................. 416 Removing condensation from the win- dows...................................................... 169 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 166 Setting the air distribution...................... 163 Setting the air distribution (3-zone automatic climate control)..................... 164 Setting the air ow.................................. 163 Setting the air ow (3-zone automatic climate control)...................................... 164 Setting the fragrance system.................. 170 Setting the temperature......................... 163 Setting the temperature (3-zone auto- matic climate control)............................ 164 Switching the rear window heater on/o ................................................... 163 Switching the rear window heater on/o (3-zone automatic climate control).................................................. 164

Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening).................................................. 94

Clothes hooks Using..................................................... 133

Co-driver airbag shuto see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto

Cockpit Overview (central display).......................... 6 Overview (MBUX Hyperscreen)................... 8

Co ee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro- sleep detection

Collision detection (parked vehicle) Setting................................................... 216

Combination switch..................................... 144 Component-speci c information................... 412 Content sharing menu

Overview................................................ 301 Control elements

Touch-sensitive........................................ 29 Convenience closing...................................... 94

Convenience doors Setting (MBUX multimedia system)........... 85

Convenience doors see Door

Convenience opening..................................... 94 Coolant (engine)

Capacity................................................ 416 Level check............................................ 355 Notes..................................................... 415

Cooling see Climate control

Copyrights License.................................................... 42 Trademarks.............................................. 42

Cornering light............................................. 147 Crosswind Assist

Function/notes...................................... 221 Cruise control

Activating............................................... 227 Buttons.................................................. 227 Calling up a speed................................. 227 Deactivating........................................... 227 Function................................................ 226

506 Index

Requirements:....................................... 227 Selecting............................................... 227 Setting a speed...................................... 227 Storing a speed...................................... 227 System limitations.................................. 226

Cup holder Installing/removing (center console)...... 135 Using..................................................... 137

Customer Assistance Center (CAC)................ 36 Customer Relations Department..................... 36

D Dashcam

Notes..................................................... 331 Selecting a USB device.......................... 332 Starting/stopping a video recording....... 332

Data acquisition Vehicle..................................................... 37

Data protection rights Data storage............................................ 40

Data storage Data protection rights.............................. 40 Electronic control units............................ 37

Online services........................................ 40 Vehicle..................................................... 37

Daytime running lamp mode see Daytime running lamps

Daytime running lamps Activating/deactivating.......................... 153

Deactivating the alarm (ATA)......................... 100 Dealership

see Quali ed specialist workshop Declaration of conformity

Wireless vehicle components................... 33 Decorative foil (cleaning instructions)........... 358 De nitions (tires and loading)....................... 397 Defrost function........................................... 167 Destination entry

Entering a POI or address....................... 324 Detecting inattentiveness

see ATTENTION ASSIST Diagnostics connection.................................. 33 DIGITAL LIGHT

Active headlamps................................... 146 Assistance functions.............................. 148

Bad weather light................................... 148 City lighting............................................ 148 Cornering light....................................... 147 Fog light (enhanced).............................. 147 Highway mode....................................... 147 Overview................................................ 146 Switching the Intelligent Light System on/o ................................................... 150 Topographical compensation.................. 148

Digital Operator's Manual............................... 26 Dinghy towing

see Tow-bar system DIRECT SELECT lever

Engaging drive position.......................... 195 Engaging neutral.................................... 194 Engaging park position........................... 194 Engaging park position automatically...... 194 Engaging reverse gear............................ 194 Function................................................ 193

Disconnect device High-voltage on-board electrical sys- tem........................................................ 179

Display (care)............................................... 360

Index 507

Display (driver's display) Overview of displays............................... 292

Display (MBUX multimedia system) Calling up the Zero Layer........................ 298 Home screen......................................... 301 Operating.............................................. 303 Operating the Zero Layer........................ 298 Zero Layer (function).............................. 295 Zero Layer (overview)............................. 296

Display message Calling up (driver display)....................... 420 Notes..................................................... 420

Display messages - - - mph........................................ 459 h - - - mph........................................ 458 # 12 V On-board Electrical Sys- tem Service Required............................. 478 Acoustic Presence Indicator Inoperative............................................. 433 : Active Headlamps Inoperative....... 428 ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative..... 458

P ATTENTION ASSIST Nodding O Take a Break!......................................... 458 ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!.................................................... 458 : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative............................................. 427 Battery Overheated Stop, Every- one Get Out Outdoors if Possible........... 437 Battery Too Low Stop Vehicle Charge Immediately............................... 436 Beginning Emergency Stop............ 461 $ Brake Immediately........................ 455 Charger Cable Connected............. 434 $ Check Brake Fluid Level................ 457 + Check Coolant Level See Oper- ator's Manual......................................... 433 : Check Le Low Beam (example)... 427 h Check Tires.................................. 481 Check Washer Fluid...................... 446 Compressor Is Cooling.................. 471

Coolant Stop Switch O Vehicle.... 433 ! Currently Unavailable See Oper- ator's Manual......................................... 473 Currently Unavailable See Oper- ator's Manual......................................... 474 Don't Forget Your Key................... 426 6 Front Le Malfunction Service Required (example)................................ 421 Have High-voltage System Checked See Operator's Manual............ 438 & Inoperative Charge High-voltage Battery.................................................. 431 & Inoperative High-Voltage Bat- tery Charging Not Complete................... 430 ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 474 Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 475 T Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 476

508 Index

G Inoperative................................... 478 Key Being Initialized Please Wait.... 426 Key Not Detected (red display message)............................................... 425 Key Not Detected (white display message)............................................... 425 6 Le Window Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example).................... 422 Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph....................................................... 469 $ Malfunction see Operator's Manual.................................................. 456 : Malfunction See Operators Manual.................................................. 427 Malfunction Service Required........ 438 $ Malfunction Stop.......................... 456 d Malfunction Visit Workshop........... 439 d Malfunction.................................. 439 Malfunction.................................. 437 Maximum Speed 12mph............... 470

Obtain a New Key......................... 424 O ................................................ 459 O ................................................ 457 F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual.................................................. 451 d Performance Extremely Limited..... 432 h Please Correct Tire Pressure......... 482 F Please Release Parking Brake........ 454 & Pre-entry Climate Control Avail- able Again via SmartKey a er Vehicle Start...................................................... 431 & Pre-entry Climate Control via Key Inoperative High-voltage Battery Low....................................................... 431 Rear Axle Steering Currently Malfunctioning....................................... 443 Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Service Required.................................... 443 Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately................................... 444

_ Rear Le Backrest Not Latched (example)................................. 446 Replace Key Battery...................... 425 Reserve Level Charge High-Volt- age Battery............................................ 438 6 Restraint System Malfunction Service Required.................................... 421 Steering Malfunction Drive Carefully Service Required..................... 442 Steering Malfunction Increased Physical E ort See Operator's Manual.... 442 Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual....... 443 d Stop Switch O Vehicle................. 439 STOP Vehicle Level Too Low.......... 470 # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual.................................................. 479 # Stop vehicle To charge the 12 V battery do not switch o vehicle............. 480 Suspended................................... 459

Index 509

: Switch O Lights........................... 428 : Switch On Headlamps................... 428 # Switch on vehicle to charge the 12 V battery........................................... 479 F Switch on Vehicle to Release the Parking Brake................................... 455 Temporarily Unavailable Camera View Restricted...................................... 468 Temporarily Unavailable Sen- sors are Dirty......................................... 467 u Towing Not Permitted See Oper- ator's Manual......................................... 432 d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition O Before Exiting................. 441 Vehicle Rising Please Wait............. 471 h Warning Tire Malfunction.............. 482 h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing............... 481 AC Charging Inoperative Service Required................................................ 435

Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 465 Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative........ 465 Active Brake Assist Functions Cur- rently Limited See Operator's Manual..... 476 Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual.......................... 477 Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 460 Active Distance Assist Inoperative.......... 460 Active Distance Assist Now Available...... 460 Active Emergency Stop Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.................................................. 462 Active Emergency Stop Assist Inoper- ative...................................................... 462 Active Lane Change Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 463 Active Lane Change Assist Inoperative... 463

Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 466 Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative... 466 Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera- tor's Manual........................................... 472 Active Parking Assist Limited Availa- bility of Maneuvering Assistance See Operator's Manual................................. 471 Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer- gency Stops........................................... 461 Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 460 Active Steering Assist Inoperative........... 461 Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 463 Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... 464

510 Index

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ 428 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative.... 429 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.................................................. 429 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inop- erative................................................... 429 Ambient Lighting Warning Support Inoperative............................................. 445 Apply Brake To Park Service Required.... 447 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (white display message).................................... 450 Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila- ble See Operator's Manual..................... 464 Blind Spot Assist Inoperative.................. 465 Cannot Start Vehicle See Operator's Manual.................................................. 478

Change the steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen....................... 469 Charging Fault Change Charging Mode See Operator's Manual................. 435 Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual.................................................. 457 Cruise Control Inoperative...................... 459 Cruise Control O .................................. 459 DC Charging Inoperative Service Required................................................ 435 Decrease Speed.................................... 483 Depress Brake to Shi from P................ 447 Depress Brake to Shi to D or R............. 447 DIGITAL LIGHT Functions Limited........... 428 Do Not Restart Vehicle Service Required................................................ 438 Driver Camera Inoperative See Opera- tor's Manual........................................... 469

Driver Camera View Currently Restric- ted See Operator's Manual..................... 468 Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual................................. 422 Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual................................. 423 Hazard Warning Light Malfunction.......... 430 Head-up Display Brightness Currently Reduced See Operator's Manual............ 442 Head-up Display Currently Unavaila- ble See Operator's Manual..................... 441 Head-up Display Inoperative................... 441 High-voltage Battery Fault No Start in Approx. XXX mi Service Required (red display message).................................... 440 High-voltage Battery Fault No Start in Approx. XXX mi Service Required (yel- low display message)............................. 439 Hight-voltage Battery Fault Do Not Restart Service Required........................ 440

Index 511

N Automatically Activated Please Shi to Transmission Position Again............... 449 N is Engaged Please Engage Desired Gear...................................................... 449 Not Possible to Unlock Charger Cable See Operator's Manual.......................... 435 PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera- tor's Manual........................................... 471 Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual.......................... 426 PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... 424 PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 424 Preparing Drive System....................... 438 Reduced Drive System Performance See Operator's Manual.......................... 436 Reversing Not Possible Service Required................................................ 449

Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply Brake to Park......................................... 448 Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Driver's Door Open Position P Not Selected........ 448 Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activa- ted Manually No Automatic Change to P........................................................... 448 Service Required Do Not Change Transmission Position............................. 450 Shi to P Only When Vehicle Is Sta- tionary................................................... 447 Snow Chain Mode Maximum Speed Exceeded............................................... 444 Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavail- able....................................................... 480 Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative............... 480 Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors....................................... 481 Tires Overheated.................................... 483

To Deselect P or N Depress Brake and Start Vehicle.......................................... 447 To switch vehicle o , press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec- onds or press 3 times............................ 433 Tra c Sign Assist Currently Unavaila- ble See Operator's Manual..................... 464 Tra c Sign Assist Inoperative................. 464 Transmission Malfunction Stop............... 449 Vehicle Currently Not Being Charged Charging Station Fault........... 435 Wait in the READY status Battery is warming up see Operator's Manual........ 437 Windshield Wiper Malfunction................ 446

Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Door Child safety lock (rear doors).................... 70 Closing the convenience doors................. 80

512 Index

Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 86 Opening (from inside)............................... 77 Opening the convenience doors............... 80 Power closing function............................. 85 Unlocking (from inside)............................ 77

Door control panel......................................... 20 Door control panel (rear passenger com- partment)....................................................... 22 DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN)............ 393 Drawbar

see Tow-bar system Drinking and driving..................................... 183 Drinks holder

see Cup holder Drive Away Assist......................................... 279 Drive position

Engaging................................................ 195 Drive program display.................................. 192 Drive programs

see DYNAMIC SELECT Drive system

Manual switch-o ................................... 179

Starting (emergency operation mode).... 182 Driver camera

Activating/deactivating.......................... 311 Overview................................................ 310

Driver display Displaying the service due date.............. 353 Function/notes...................................... 286 Notes on menus..................................... 288 Operating.............................................. 287 Warning/indicator lamps........................ 484

Driver display with driver camera.................... 14 Driver's display.............................................. 10 Driver's seat

see Seat Driving safety system

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 219 Active Brake Assist................................. 242 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 219 Cameras................................................ 217 EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)....................................................... 221 ESP Crosswind Assist.......................... 221 Overview................................................ 218 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 217

Responsibility......................................... 217 Driving system

see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see AIRMATIC see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro- sleep detection see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Memory Parking Assist see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera see Remote Parking Assist see Surround view camera see Tra c Sign Assist

Index 513

Driving tips Acoustic presence indicator (sound generator).............................................. 178 Breaking-in notes................................... 182 Drinking and driving............................... 183 Electric mode......................................... 178 General driving tips................................ 183 Range maximization............................... 190

Driving tips see Recuperation

Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro- sleep detection

Dynamic handling control system see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

DYNAMIC SELECT Calling up the fuel consumption indi- cator...................................................... 193 Con guring drive program I.................... 192 Displaying vehicle data........................... 193 Drive program display............................ 192 Drive programs...................................... 191 Function................................................ 191 Operating.............................................. 192

Selecting the drive program................... 192

E Easy entry feature

Function/notes...................................... 116 Setting................................................... 118

Easy exit feature Function/notes...................................... 116 Setting................................................... 118

EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Function/notes...................................... 221

ECO Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 190 Function................................................ 188

ECO display Function................................................ 186

Electric mode Notes..................................................... 178

Electric parking brake Applying automatically........................... 214 Applying/releasing manually.................. 215 Emergency braking................................ 215 Releasing automatically.......................... 214

Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency Assistance overview................................. 24 First-aid kit (so sided).......................... 364 Re ective safety vest............................. 363 Removing the warning triangle............... 363 Setting up the warning triangle............... 364

Emergency braking...................................... 215 Emergency braking

see BAS (Brake Assist System) Emergency call

see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Emergency key

Locking/unlocking the doors................... 86 Emergency operation mode

Starting the vehicle................................ 182 Emergency shuto

see High-voltage on-board electrical system Emergency spare wheel

Notes..................................................... 408 Emergency start (drive system).................... 378

514 Index

Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation................................................ 44

Energy ow display Displaying.............................................. 321

Engine Engine number....................................... 412

Engine number............................................. 412 ERM (Extended Range Mode)

see Range maximization Error message

see Display message ESC (Electronic Stability Control)

see ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ESP

Crosswind Assist.................................... 221 ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Activating/deactivating.......................... 221 Function/notes...................................... 220

Exiting procedure Playing back.......................................... 284

Exterior lighting Care...................................................... 359

Exterior lighting see Lights

Exterior mirrors Automatic mirror folding function........... 162 Automatic preselection (MBUX Inte- rior Assistant)........................................ 309 Parking position..................................... 161

F Fatigue detection

see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro- sleep detection

Favorites Adding................................................... 313

Fine particle status display........................... 166 First-aid kit (so sided)................................. 364 Flacon

Inserting/removing................................ 171 Flat tire

Changing a wheel................................... 404 MOExtended tires.................................. 365 Notes..................................................... 364 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 366

Flat towing see Tow-bar system

Floor mats................................................... 141 Fog light (enhanced)..................................... 147 Foil covering

Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 217 Fragrance

see Fragrance system Fragrance system

Activating/deactivating.......................... 170 Adjusting the fragrance intensity............ 170 Inserting/removing the acon................ 171

Free so ware................................................. 42 Frequencies

Two-way radio........................................ 411 Front airbag (driver, front passenger).............. 50 Front passenger seat

Adjusting from the driver's seat.............. 105 Adjusting from the rear passenger compartment......................................... 105

Front passenger seat see Seat

Index 515

Fuel consumption indicator Calling up.............................................. 193

Function seat see Door control panel

Function seat (rear passenger compart- ment)

see Seat (rear passenger compartment) Fuses

Before replacing a fuse.......................... 378 Dashboard fuse box............................... 379 Fuse assignment diagram....................... 378 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot- well........................................................ 379 Fuse box in the rear passenger com- partment............................................... 380 Notes..................................................... 378

Fuses see Fuses

G Garage door opener

Clearing the memory.............................. 213 Garage door openers

Opening/closing the door...................... 213

Programming buttons............................. 211 Resolving problems................................ 213 Synchronizing the rolling code................ 213

Genuine parts................................................ 27 Glove box

Opening/closing.................................... 123 GPS-based vehicle level

Setting................................................... 260

H Handbrake

see Electric parking brake Handling (unusual)....................................... 381 HANDS-FREE ACCESS................................... 90 Haptic accelerator pedal.............................. 190 Hazard warning lights................................... 145 Hazardous substances

Information.............................................. 31 Head restraint

Activating/deactivating neck heating..... 109 Attaching/removing the additional cushion (rear passenger compartment).. 109 Front (adjusting mechanically) (4-way).... 107

Front (luxury head restraint)................... 108 Rear (folding into position/folding back mechanically)................................ 110 Rear (setting) (standard)......................... 108

Head-up Display Augmented reality.................................. 290 Care...................................................... 360 Function................................................ 288 Operating.............................................. 291 Operating the memory function.............. 119 Selecting (with augmented reality).......... 291 Switching on/o .................................... 291

Headlamps see Automatic driving lights

Headliner (care)........................................... 360 Heating

see Climate control Help call

see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system High beam

Activating/deactivating.......................... 144 High beam

see Adaptive Highbeam Assist see Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

516 Index

High-beam asher........................................ 144 High-voltage battery

Charging at time of departure................ 209 Charging cable control panel.................. 200 Charging duration.................................. 418 Condition of charge display.................... 208 Con guring weekly pro le...................... 209 Disconnect device................................. 179 Ending the charging process (alternat- ing current, mode 2/3).......................... 205 Ending the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 207 Energy ow display................................. 321 Function/notes...................................... 371 General notes on charging..................... 195 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 202 Maximum charging current (mains socket).................................................. 200 Notes on charging (charging station, mode 3)................................................. 198 Notes on charging (fast charging sta- tion, mode 4)......................................... 199 Notes on charging (mains socket, mode 2)................................................. 197 Notes on charging (wallbox, mode 3)...... 198

Range.................................................... 418 Range maximization............................... 190 Starting the charging process (alter- nating current, mode 2/3)..................... 202 Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4).................................... 205 Stowing the charging cable.................... 195 Type....................................................... 418

High-voltage on-board electrical system Charging cable control panel.................. 200 Disconnect device................................. 179 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 202 Manual disconnection............................ 179

Highway mode............................................. 147 Hill start assist............................................. 223 HOLD function

Function/notes...................................... 221 Switching on/o .................................... 222

Home screen (central display) Overview................................................ 301

Hood Opening/closing.................................... 354

I Identi cation plate

Engine................................................... 412 Refrigerant............................................. 416 vehicle................................................... 412

Ignition key see SmartKey

Immediate pre-entry climate control............. 175 Immobilizer.................................................... 99 Indicator lamp

see Warning/indicator lamp Individual drive program

Con guring............................................ 192 Selecting............................................... 192

Inside rearview mirror Anti-glare mode (automatic)................... 160

Inside rearview mirror see Outside mirrors

Inspection see ASSYST PLUS

Instrument cluster see Driver display

Index 517

Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating.......................... 150 Active headlamps................................... 146 Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 150 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 152 Assistance functions.............................. 148 Bad weather light................................... 148 City lighting............................................ 148 Cornering light....................................... 147 Fog light (enhanced).............................. 147 Highway mode....................................... 147 Overview................................................ 146 Topographical compensation.................. 148

Interior lighting Adjusting............................................... 154 Ambient lighting..................................... 155 Reading lamp......................................... 154 Switch-o delay time.............................. 156

Interior motion sensor Activating/deactivating.......................... 101 Function................................................ 101

Internet radio see TuneIn

Ionization Activating/deactivating (MBUX multi- media system)....................................... 170

iPhone

see Smartphone integration

J Jack

Storage location..................................... 403 Jump-start connection.................................. 372

K KEYLESS-GO

Deactivating a function............................ 74 Locking/unlocking the vehicle................. 78 Problem................................................... 79 Unlocking setting..................................... 74

Knee airbag.................................................... 50

L Labeling (tires)

see Tire labeling

Lamp see Interior lighting

Lamp (driver display) see Warning/indicator lamp

Lane detection (automatic) see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Language Notes..................................................... 320 Setting................................................... 320

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor Installing.................................................. 63

Level control system see AIRMATIC

Light switch Overview................................................ 143

Lighting see Interior lighting see Lights

Lights Active headlamps................................... 146 Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 150

518 Index

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 152 Automatic driving lights.......................... 144 Bad weather light................................... 148 City lighting............................................ 148 Combination switch............................... 144 Cornering light....................................... 147 Fog light (enhanced).............................. 147 Hazard warning lights............................. 145 High beam............................................. 144 High-beam asher.................................. 144 Highway mode....................................... 147 Intelligent Light System.......................... 146 Light switch........................................... 143 Low beam.............................................. 143 Parking lights......................................... 143 Rear fog light......................................... 143 Responsibility for lighting systems.......... 143 Setting the exterior lighting switch-o delay time.............................................. 153 Standing lights....................................... 143 Switching the Intelligent Light System on/o ................................................... 150 Switching the locator lighting on/o ...... 154 Turn signal light...................................... 144

Limited Warranty Vehicle..................................................... 37

Limiting the opening angle (tailgate)............... 91 Live Tra c Information

Switching the tra c information dis- play on................................................... 329

Load index (tires)......................................... 395 Load-bearing capacity (tires)........................ 395 Loading

Bag hook............................................... 132 Cargo tie-down rings.............................. 132 De nitions............................................. 397 Notes..................................................... 119 Roof luggage rack.................................. 133

Loading guidelines....................................... 119 Loading information table............................. 388 Loads

Fixing..................................................... 119 Locator lighting

Activating/deactivating.......................... 154 Locking/unlocking

Emergency key......................................... 86 KEYLESS-GO............................................ 78

Opening the tailgate................................. 87 Switching the automatic locking fea- ture on/o .............................................. 80 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside................................................. 77

Low beam Activating/deactivating.......................... 143

Luggage Securing................................................ 119

Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way)

Lumbar support (4-way)............................... 106

M Maintenance

Vehicle..................................................... 30 Maintenance

see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction

Restraint system...................................... 44 Maneuvering assistance

Activating/deactivating.......................... 282 Cross tra c warning.............................. 280

Index 519

Drive Away Assist................................... 279 Maneuvering brake function................... 281

Maneuvering brake function......................... 281 Map

Displaying online map contents.............. 329 Displaying weather information.............. 329 Moving................................................... 329 Selecting the map orientation................ 329 Setting the map scale............................ 329

Massage programs Overview................................................ 112 Resetting the settings............................ 113 Selecting the front seats........................ 113

Maximum load rating.................................... 394 Maximum permissible load

Calculation example............................... 390 Determining........................................... 389

Maximum tire pressure................................. 394 MBUX Interior Assistant

Anticipatory exit warning........................ 308 Automatic preselection of the outside mirror.................................................... 309 Calling up favorites with the V pose........ 310

Operating the function with the favor- ites pose................................................ 310 Overview................................................ 306 Switching the reading light on/o (contactless).......................................... 308 Switching the search light on/o (contactless).......................................... 308

MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating snow chain mode..................................................... 382 Activating/deactivating the fragrance system................................................... 170 Calling up the Zero Layer........................ 298 Con guring drive program I.................... 192 Coupling the steering wheel heater to the seat heating..................................... 116 Driver camera........................................ 310 Home screen......................................... 301 Notes..................................................... 294 Operating the touchscreen..................... 303 Operating the Zero Layer........................ 298 Overview................................................ 294 Restoring (factory settings).................... 320 Setting collision detection (parked vehicle).................................................. 216

Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 235 Setting the air distribution...................... 168 Setting the fragrance system.................. 170 Setting the rear climate control.............. 168 Switching ionization on/o .................... 170 Zero Layer (function).............................. 295 Zero Layer (overview)............................. 296

MBUX multimedia system see Display (MBUX multimedia system) see MBUX Interior Assistant

MBUX Voice Assistant Function................................................ 304 Voice prompting..................................... 305

Mechanical key Inserting/removing.................................. 75 Unlocking the tailgate.............................. 92

Media Overview of the functions and symbols... 346

Medical aids................................................... 35 Memory function

Function................................................ 118 Head-up Display..................................... 119 Operating.............................................. 119 Outside mirrors...................................... 119

520 Index

Seat....................................................... 119 Steering wheel....................................... 119

Memory Parking Assist Exiting a parking space.......................... 284 Function................................................ 282 Parking.................................................. 284 Recording.............................................. 283 Setting................................................... 285 System limits......................................... 282

Menus (driver display) Notes..................................................... 288

Mercedes me app Information............................................ 341 Notes....................................................... 29 On-demand feature.................................. 29

Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment............ 338 Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center.................................................... 337 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center a er automatic accident or breakdown detection............................. 337 Information............................................ 337

Making a call via the overhead control panel..................................................... 336 Transferred data..................................... 338

Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management... 340 Information............................................ 339 Transferred data..................................... 341

Mercedes-AMG vehicles Notes..................................................... 178

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call...................... 344 Information............................................ 343 Information about data transfer.............. 345 Manual emergency call.......................... 344 Overview................................................ 343

Message (driver display) see Display message

Message memory......................................... 420 Mirrors

see Outside mirrors Mobile phone

Authorizing (Remote Parking Assist)....... 279 Notes on wireless charging.................... 138 Wireless charging (front)........................ 140

Wireless charging (rear passenger compartment)........................................ 140

Mobile phone see Smartphone integration see Telephone

Model type see Vehicle identi cation plate

MOExtended tires........................................ 365 Multimedia system

Setting Memory Parking Assist............... 285

N Navigation

Notes..................................................... 321 Overview................................................ 321 Switching on.......................................... 321

Navigation see Destination entry see Map

Navigation with Electric Intelligence see Route

Neutral Engaging................................................ 194

Index 521

Nodding o see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro- sleep detection

O Occupant safety

see Airbag see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto see Automatic measures a er an accident see Child seat see Pets in the vehicle see Post-collision brake see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- pant protection) see PRE-SAFE Impulse Side see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt

On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection

On-board electrical system battery (12 V) Charging................................................ 372 Replacing............................................... 372

Starting assistance................................ 372 On-board electronics

Notes..................................................... 410 Two-way radios...................................... 410

On-demand feature Activating................................................. 29 Notes....................................................... 29

Online services Data storage............................................ 40

Open-source so ware.................................... 42 Opening the tailgate using your foot

HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 90 Operating uids

Brake uid............................................. 414 Coolant (engine).................................... 415 Notes..................................................... 414 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)...... 416 Windshield washer uid.......................... 416

Operating safety Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)................................ 33 Information.............................................. 31

Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment................................... 28

Operator's Manual (digital)............................. 26 Outside mirrors

Anti-glare mode (automatic)................... 160 Folding in/out........................................ 159 Operating the memory function.............. 119 Setting................................................... 159

Overhead control panel Overview.................................................. 18

Overview Toll system............................................. 321

P Paint (cleaning instructions)......................... 358 Paint code................................................... 412 Panic alarm

Arming/disarming.................................... 74 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

see Sliding sunroof Park position

Engaging................................................ 194

522 Index

Selecting automatically.......................... 194 Parking

see Electric parking brake Parking aid

see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Activating............................................... 269 Adjusting warning tones......................... 270 Function................................................ 266 Switching o .......................................... 269 System limitations.................................. 266

Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist see Memory Parking Assist

Parking brake see Electric parking brake

Parking lights............................................... 143 Parking position

Exterior mirrors...................................... 161 Storing the position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear........................................... 161

Parking procedure Playing back.......................................... 284

Partitioning net Attaching/removing............................... 130

PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger airbag shuto

Payload Calculation example............................... 390 Determining the maximum..................... 389

Perfume see Fragrance system

Perfume atomizer Setting................................................... 170

Perfume vial see Fragrance system

Permissible towing methods......................... 372 Pets in the vehicle.......................................... 72 Plastic trim (Care)........................................ 360 Post-collision brake........................................ 58 Power closing function

Door........................................................ 85

Power supply Switching on (start/stop button)............ 180

Power washer (care)..................................... 357 Pre-entry climate control (immediate)........... 175 Pre-entry climate control at departure time

Function................................................ 173 Setting................................................... 174

Pre-entry climate control for departure time

Activating/deactivating.......................... 175 Pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked

Activating/deactivating.......................... 173 Function................................................ 172 Setting................................................... 173

PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection) Function.................................................. 57 PRE-SAFE Sound................................... 57 Reversing measures................................. 57

PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Activation................................................ 44 Function.................................................. 58

Index 523

PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

Function.................................................. 57 Reversing measures................................. 57

Preventative occupant protection system see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

Pro le Notes..................................................... 311

Program see DYNAMIC SELECT

Protecting the environment Notes....................................................... 27

Protection against collision see Drive Away Assist see Maneuvering brake function

Q QR code

Rescue card............................................. 37 Quali ed specialist workshop......................... 35

R Radar and ultrasonic sensors

Damage................................................. 217 Radio

Overview of the functions and symbols... 348 Rain-closing feature

Sliding sunroof......................................... 98 Range

Notes..................................................... 286 Range maximization

Activating/deactivating.......................... 191 Function................................................ 190

Reading lamp see Interior lighting

Reading light Switching on/o (contactless)............... 308

Real wood (Care).......................................... 360 Rear axle steering........................................ 185 Rear climate control

Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 168 Rear doors (child safety lock)......................... 70

Rear fog lamp Switching on/o .................................... 144

Rear passenger compartment seat Seats..................................................... 106

Rear seat see Seats

Rear view camera Activating using GPS (surround view camera)................................................. 266 Care...................................................... 359 Function................................................ 260 Managing activation points (surround view camera)......................................... 266

Rear window heater...................................... 163 Rear window heater (3-zone automatic cli- mate control)............................................... 164 Recuperation

Function................................................ 186 Setting................................................... 187

Re ective safety vest.................................... 363 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)

Notes..................................................... 416

524 Index

Regulatory radio identi cation Indonesia............................................... 412 Small components................................. 412

Regulatory radio information Installation clearances........................... 412

Remote Parking Assist Authorizing a mobile phone.................... 279 Function................................................ 275 Operating.............................................. 276 System limitations.................................. 275

Reporting safety defects................................. 36 Rescue card................................................... 37 Reset function (MBUX multimedia system).... 320 Restoring (factory settings)

see Reset function (MBUX multimedia system) Restraint system

Basic instructions for children.................. 58 Function in an accident............................ 44 Functionality............................................ 44 Limited protection.................................... 43 Malfunction............................................. 44 Protection................................................ 43 Self-test................................................... 44 Warning lamp........................................... 44

Reverse gear Engaging................................................ 194

Reversing camera Opening the camera cover (surround view camera)......................................... 266

Rims (care).................................................. 359 Roadside Assistance (breakdown).................. 30 Roll away protection

see HOLD function Roller sunblind

Sliding sunroof......................................... 95 Roof load..................................................... 418 Roof luggage rack

Loading.................................................. 133 Securing................................................ 133

Route Activating a commuter route.................. 325 Selecting a type..................................... 325 Selecting an alternative route................. 325 Switching on Electric Intelligence........... 325

Route guidance with augmented reality Activating............................................... 325

Activating/deactivating the tra c light view............................................... 250 Displaying street names and house numbers................................................ 325

Route-based speed adaptation Function................................................ 234 Setting................................................... 235

Run- at characteristics MOExtended tires.................................. 365

S Safety systems

see Driving safety system Satellite radio

Logging in.............................................. 351 Setting music and sport alerts................ 351

Search light Switching on/o (contactless)............... 308

Seat 4-way lumbar support............................ 106 Adjusting (electrically)............................ 102 Adjusting the front passenger seat from the rear passenger compartment... 105 Automatic adjustment............................ 111

Index 525

Con guring settings............................... 111 Correct driver's seat position................. 102 Folding back the backrest (rear passenger compartment)....................... 127 Locking the backrest (rear passenger compartment)........................................ 128 Massage program overview.................... 112 Operating the memory function.............. 119 Resetting the settings............................ 113 Setting options......................................... 20 Workout program overview..................... 112

Seat (rear passenger compartment) Setting options......................................... 22

Seat belt Adjusting the height................................. 48 Care...................................................... 360 Fastening................................................. 48 Protection................................................ 45 Warning lamp........................................... 49

Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating............................ 49 Function.................................................. 49

Seat belt warning see Seat belt

Seat belts Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 49 Belt airbag............................................... 48 Reduced protection.................................. 46 Releasing................................................. 49 Seat belt adjustment (function)................ 49

Seat cover (Care)......................................... 360 Seat heating

Activating/deactivating.................... 22, 113 Seat ventilation

Activating/deactivating.................... 22, 114 Seats

Folding the backrest forwards (rear passenger compartment)....................... 124 Rear passenger compartment (adjust- ing electrically)....................................... 106

Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever

Self-test Automatic front passenger airbag shut o ............................................................ 54

Sensors (care)............................................. 359

Service see ASSYST PLUS

Service Center see Quali ed specialist workshop

Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS

Setting a speed see Cruise control

Setting the map scale see Map

Side airbag..................................................... 50 Side windows

Child safety lock in the rear passenger compartment.......................... 72 Closing using the SmartKey...................... 94 Convenience closing................................ 94 Convenience opening............................... 94 Opening with the SmartKey...................... 94 Opening/closing...................................... 92 Problem................................................... 95

Size designation (tires)................................. 395 Sliding sunroof

Automatic functions................................. 98

526 Index

Closing.................................................... 95 Closing using the SmartKey...................... 94 Opening................................................... 95 Opening with the SmartKey...................... 94 Problem................................................... 98 Rain-closing feature................................. 98

SmartKey Acoustic locking veri cation signal........... 74 Battery..................................................... 75 Deactivating a function............................ 74 Energy consumption................................ 74 Function overview.................................... 73 Key ring attachment................................. 75 Mechanical key........................................ 75 Panic alarm.............................................. 74 Problem................................................... 77 Unlocking setting..................................... 74

SmartKey see SmartKey

Smartphone see Smartphone integration see Telephone

Smartphone integration Overview................................................ 342

Snow chain mode Activating/deactivating.......................... 382

Snow chains................................................ 382 Socket (12 V)

Front passenger footwell........................ 138 So ware update

System updates..................................... 316 Sound

PRE-SAFE Sound................................... 57 Wheels and tires.................................... 381 Wheels/tires.......................................... 381

Sound generator Acoustic presence indicator................... 178

Sound menu Functions overview................................ 352

Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel

Special seat belt retractor.............................. 63 Specialist workshop

see Quali ed specialist workshop Speed index (tires)....................................... 395 Standing lights............................................. 143

Start/stop button Parking the vehicle................................. 210 Starting the vehicle................................ 181 Switching on the power supply/vehicle.. 180

Starting see Vehicle

Starting assistance see Jump-start connection

Starting-o aid see Hill start assist

Steering Rear axle steering.................................. 185

Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically)............................ 115 Care...................................................... 360 Operating the memory function.............. 119

Steering wheel heater Coupling to seat heating........................ 116

Storage areas see Storage space

Storage compartments see Storage space

Index 527

Storage space Armrest................................................. 122 Center console...................................... 122 Door...................................................... 122 Front center console.............................. 122 Glove box............................................... 122

Stowage areas see Loading

Stowage compartments see Loading

Street names and house numbers Displaying.............................................. 325

Surround View see Surround view camera

Surround view camera Activating using GPS (rear view cam- era)........................................................ 266 Button................................................... 266 Care...................................................... 359 Function................................................ 262 Managing activation points (rear view camera)................................................. 266 Opening the camera cover (reversing camera)................................................. 266

Selecting a view..................................... 266 Suspension

Setting the suspension level (AIR- MATIC)................................................... 259

Suspension see AIRMATIC

Suspension level (AIRMATIC) Setting................................................... 259

Switch-o delay time Exterior.................................................. 153 Interior................................................... 156

Switching on the ignition see Vehicle

Synchronization function Activating/deactivating (MBUX multi- media system)....................................... 169

System settings Overview of the system settings menu.... 316 Reset function (MBUX multimedia sys- tem)....................................................... 320

System settings see Language

T Tailgate

Closing.................................................... 88 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 90 Limiting the opening angle....................... 91 Opening................................................... 87 Opening dimensions.............................. 418 Unlocking (mechanical key)...................... 92

Technical data Component-speci c information............ 412 Information............................................ 410 Regulatory radio identi cation (Indo- nesia).................................................... 412 Regulatory radio identi cation of small components.................................. 412 Regulatory radio information.................. 412

Telephone Authorizing a mobile phone (Remote Parking Assist)....................................... 279 Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey).... 335 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)....................................... 335 Functions in the telephone menu............ 336 Notes..................................................... 333

528 Index

Notes on wireless charging (mobile phone)................................................... 138 Operating modes................................... 335 Telephone menu overview...................... 335 Wireless charging (mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment).... 22, 140 Wireless charging (mobile phone, front)..................................................... 140

Telephony operating modes Bluetooth Telephony............................. 335

Temperature................................................ 163 Temperature (3-zone automatic climate control)........................................................ 164 Temperature grade....................................... 392 Through-loading feature

see Seats TIN (Tire Identi cation Number).................... 393 Tire and Loading Information placard............ 388 Tire characteristics....................................... 395 Tire in ation compressor

see TIREFIT kit Tire information table................................... 388

Tire labeling Characteristics....................................... 395 DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN)..... 393 Load index............................................. 395 Load-bearing capacity............................ 395 Maximum tire load................................. 394 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 394 Overview................................................ 392 Speed rating.......................................... 395 Temperature grade................................. 392 Tire Quality Grading............................... 392 Tire size designation.............................. 395 Traction grade........................................ 392 Tread wear grade................................... 392

Tire load (maximum)..................................... 394 Tire pressure

Checking (manually)............................... 385 Checking (tire pressure monitoring system).................................................. 387 Maximum............................................... 394 Notes..................................................... 383 Restarting the tire pressure monitor- ing system............................................. 387 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 386

Tire pressure table................................. 384 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 366

Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure..................... 387 Checking the tire temperature................ 387 Function................................................ 386 Restarting.............................................. 387

Tire pressure table....................................... 384 Tire Quality Grading...................................... 392 Tire temperature

Checking (tire pressure monitoring system).................................................. 387 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 386

Tire tread..................................................... 381 Tire-change tool kit

Overview................................................ 403 TIREFIT kit

Storage location..................................... 366 Using..................................................... 366

Tires Characteristics....................................... 395 Checking............................................... 381

Index 529

Checking the tire pressure (manually)..... 385 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres- sure monitoring system)......................... 387 De nitions............................................. 397 DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN)..... 393 Flat tire.................................................. 364 Installing................................................ 407 Load index............................................. 395 Load-bearing capacity............................ 395 Maximum tire load................................. 394 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 394 MOExtended tires.................................. 365 Noise generation.................................... 381 Notes on installing................................. 399 Overview of tire labeling......................... 392 Removing............................................... 406 Replacing....................................... 399, 404 Restarting the tire pressure monitor- ing system............................................. 387 Rotating................................................. 402 Selection............................................... 399 Snow chains.......................................... 382 Speed rating.......................................... 395 Storing................................................... 403 Temperature grade................................. 392 Tire and Loading Information placard..... 388

Tire pressure (notes).............................. 383 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 386 Tire pressure table................................. 384 Tire Quality Grading............................... 392 Tire size designation.............................. 395 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 366 Traction grade........................................ 392 Tread wear grade................................... 392 Unfamiliar handling................................ 381

Toll system Windshield............................................. 162

Tool see Vehicle tool kit

Top Tether...................................................... 66 Touch Control

Driver display......................................... 287 Operating.............................................. 303

Touch-sensitive controls................................. 29 Touchscreen

Operating.............................................. 303 Tow-away alarm

Activating/deactivating.......................... 101 Function................................................ 100

Tow-bar system............................................ 285 Tow-starting................................................. 378 Towing away................................................. 373 Towing eye

Installing................................................ 378 Storage location..................................... 377

Towing methods........................................... 372 Traction grade.............................................. 392 Tra c information

Switching on the display......................... 329 Tra c light data service

Display in the driver display.................... 250 Tra c light view

Activating/deactivating.......................... 250 Information............................................ 250 Tra c light data service......................... 250

Tra c Sign Assist Function/notes...................................... 246 Setting................................................... 249 System limits......................................... 246

Transmission DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 193 Drive programs...................................... 191

530 Index

DYNAMIC SELECT button....................... 191 Engaging drive position.......................... 195 Engaging neutral.................................... 194 Engaging park position........................... 194 Engaging reverse gear............................ 194 Transmission position display................. 193 Transmission positions........................... 193

Transmission position display....................... 193 Transporting

Vehicle.................................................. 375 Tread wear grade......................................... 392 Trim element (Care)...................................... 360 Trunk lid

see Tailgate TuneIn

Calling up.............................................. 350 Turn signal indicator..................................... 144 Turn signal light

Activating/deactivating.......................... 144 Two-way radios

Frequencies........................................... 411 Notes on installation.............................. 410 Transmission output (maximum)............. 411

U Unlocking

see Locking/unlocking Updates

Important system updates...................... 316 USB port

Front storage compartment.................... 122 Rear passenger compartment................ 138

User pro les Adding a user......................................... 313 Selecting user options............................ 313

V Valet service mode

Activating/deactivating.......................... 223 Function................................................ 223

Vehicle Collision detection (parked vehicle)........ 216 Correct use.............................................. 35 Data acquisition....................................... 37 Data storage............................................ 37 Diagnostics connection............................ 33 Equipment............................................... 28

Limited Warranty...................................... 37 Locking (automatically)............................ 80 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 86 Locking/unlocking (from inside)............... 78 Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)............ 78 Lowering................................................ 407 Maintenance............................................ 30 Medical aids............................................ 35 Problem noti cation................................. 36 QR code rescue card............................... 37 Quali ed specialist workshop................... 35 Raising................................................... 404 Starting (emergency operation mode).... 182 Starting (start/stop button)................... 181 Switching o (start/stop button)............ 210 Switching on (start/stop button)............ 180 Towing................................................... 285 Ventilating (convenience opening)............ 94

Vehicle battery see On-board electrical system battery (12 V)

Vehicle camera Information............................................ 217

Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT)............... 193 Roof load............................................... 418

Index 531

Turning circle......................................... 418 Vehicle height........................................ 418 Vehicle length........................................ 418 Vehicle width......................................... 418 Wheelbase............................................. 418

Vehicle data storage Event data recorders................................ 41 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect............................................. 40

Vehicle dimensions...................................... 418 Vehicle identi cation number

see VIN Vehicle identi cation plate

Paint code............................................. 412 VIN........................................................ 412

Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS

Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada...................... 30

Vehicle sensors Information............................................ 217

Vehicle socket Care...................................................... 359

Indicator lamps...................................... 202 Vehicle tool kit

TIREFIT kit.............................................. 366 Towing eye............................................. 377

Ventilating Convenience opening............................... 94

Ventilation see Climate control

Vents see Air vents

VIN Identi cation plate................................. 412 Seat....................................................... 412 Windshield............................................. 412

Vision Removing condensation from the win- dows...................................................... 169 Windshield heater.................................. 172

W Warning lamp

see Warning/indicator lamp

Warning system see ATA (anti-the alarm system)

Warning triangle Removing............................................... 363 Setting up.............................................. 364

Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp......................... 495 Active Brake Assist warning lamp.............................................. 493, 494 J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)......................................... 492 $ Brake warning lamp (USA only)..... 492 J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only)......................................... 491 ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only)........................ 490 F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only)............................. 490 # Electrical malfunction warning lamp...................................................... 487 ESP OFF warning lamp................ 496

532 Index

ESP warning lamp ashes........... 495 ESP warning lamp lights up......... 496 H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp............................. 497 Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... 488 Power steering warning lamp (yellow).................................................. 488 Rear axle steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... 489 Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow).................................................. 489 Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)........................ 491 _ Reduced warning lamp power....... 487 6 Restraint system warning lamp...... 485 Seat belt warning lamp ashes...... 486 Seat belt warning lamp lights up.... 486 Suspension warning lamp (red)..... 494

Suspension warning lamp (yel- low)....................................................... 494 System error warning lamp........... 487 ! The electric parking brake (yel- low) indicator lamp................................. 490 h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp ashes............................. 498 h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up........................... 498 L Warning lamp for distance warning function.................................... 493 Overview................................................ 484 PASSENGER AIR BAG............................... 54

Warranty........................................................ 37 Washing by hand (care)................................ 357 Water tank

see Air-water duct Weather information..................................... 329 Web browsers

Overview................................................ 341

Wheel change Lowering the vehicle.............................. 407 Mounting a new wheel........................... 407 Removing a wheel.................................. 406

Wheel rotation............................................. 402 Wheels

Care...................................................... 359 Checking............................................... 381 Checking the tire pressure (manually)..... 385 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres- sure monitoring system)......................... 387 De nitions............................................. 397 DOT, Tire Identi cation Number (TIN)..... 393 Flat tire.................................................. 364 Installing................................................ 407 Load index............................................. 395 Load-bearing capacity............................ 395 Maximum tire load................................. 394 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 394 MOExtended tires.................................. 365 Noise generation.................................... 381 Notes on installing................................. 399 Overview of tire labeling......................... 392 Removing............................................... 406 Replacing....................................... 399, 404

Index 533

Restarting the tire pressure monitor- ing system............................................. 387 Rotating................................................. 402 Selection............................................... 399 Snow chains.......................................... 382 Speed rating.......................................... 395 Storing................................................... 403 Temperature grade................................. 392 Tire and Loading Information placard..... 388 Tire characteristics................................ 395 Tire pressure (notes).............................. 383 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 386 Tire pressure table................................. 384 Tire Quality Grading............................... 392 Tire size designation.............................. 395 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 366 Traction grade........................................ 392 Tread wear grade................................... 392 Unfamiliar handling................................ 381

Wi-Fi Con guring............................................ 318

Window curtain airbag.................................... 50 Window li er

see Side windows

Windows Care...................................................... 359

Windows see Side windows

Windshield Defrosting.............................................. 163 Defrosting (3-zone automatic climate control).................................................. 164 Infrared re ective................................... 162 Radio waves........................................... 162 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 157

Windshield see Windshield

Windshield heater........................................ 172 Windshield heater

see Windshield heater Windshield washer uid

Notes..................................................... 416 Windshield washer system

Re lling.................................................. 355 Windshield wipers

Activating/deactivating.......................... 157 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 157

Winter operation Activating/deactivating snow chain mode..................................................... 382 Snow chains.......................................... 382

Wiper blades Care...................................................... 359 Replacing (windshield)............................ 157

Wireless charging Function/notes...................................... 138 Mobile phone (rear passenger com- partment).............................................. 140 Mobile phone, front................................ 140

Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity......................... 33

Workout program Overview................................................ 112

Workshop see Quali ed specialist workshop

Z Zero Layer (central display)

Calling up.............................................. 298 Function................................................ 295 Operating.............................................. 298

534 Index

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the EQS Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz EQS 2022 Operator's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operator's Manual for Mercedes-Benz EQS as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operator's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz EQS. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz EQS 2022 Operator's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mercedes-Benz EQS 2022 Operator's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mercedes-Benz EQS 2022 Operator's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mercedes-Benz EQS 2022 Operator's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz EQS 2022 Operator's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.